%
amel
Program Users Guide
it t ■
,/
/
/
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L Air Conditioning
Load Calculations
and Psychrometrics
i
ACADS
DflMifi teoMiio
CAMEL
USER GUIDE
r'-
Air Conditioning Load Calculations
\
o fmrn
f\
t
11
II
f
■
%.
1
5
V
^
\v._. Ill
© ACADS-BSG
ACADS-BSG
18 High St Glen Iris VIC 3146 Australia
Phone +61 3 9885 6586
Fax
+61 3 9885 5974
Email acadsbsa@ozemail.com.au
r
The computer program CAMEL and this User Guide are
Copyright by
ACADS-BSG
18 High St Glen Iris VIC 3146 Australia
First published for the Department of Housing and Construction 1981
Second Edition July 1987
Third Edition January 1991
Fourth Edition February 1998
Reprinted with amendments February 1999
Fifth Edition (V5.0) May 2002
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.1) Aug 2002
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.3) Dec 2002
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.4) Mar 2003
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.5) Jun 2004
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.6) Sep 2004
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.8) Oct 2006
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.9) Dec 2007
Reprinted with amendments (V5.10.0) Sep 2009
Reprinted with amendments (V5.10.2) Oct 2011
Reprinted with amendments (V5.10.4) Jul 2013
Reprinted with amendments by ACADS-BSG (V5.11.0) JULY 2015
ISSN 0725-1998
ISBN 0 644 00800 8
Disclaimer
The information or advice contained in this document is intended for use only by persons
who have had adequate technical training in the field to which the User Guide relates.
The document has been compiled as an aid only and the information or advice should be
verified before it is put to use by any person. The user should also establish the
applicability of the information or advice in relation to any specific circumstances. While
the information or advice is believed to be correct ACADS-BSG, its officers, employees
and agents disclaim responsibility for any inaccuracies contained within the document
including those due to any negligence in the preparation and publication of the said
document.
[
Preface
This document is a User Guide for the computer program CAMEL - Carrier Air
Conditioning Method of Estimating Loads. It describes the program, the
procedure for using the program and the results. The program is based on the
methodologies described in the AIRAH/IRHACE Application Manual DA9 entitled 'Air Conditioning Systems - Load Estimation and Associated Psychrometrics'.
The program can be licensed from ACADS-BSG Pty. Ltd. A copy of the User
Guide is supplied to Licensees. Separate copies of the User Guide and
Application Manual may be purchased from ACADS-BSG.
The program although originally developed by Australian Construction Services,
the Federal Government’s Construction Authority it has now been completely re­
written by ACADS-BSG Pty Ltd who distribute, support and maintain the program.
Between reprints of this document, ACADS-BSG issues to it’s members
supplementary program user advice notices. Further details of these notices and
the availability of the program can be obtained from the office of ACADS-BSG in
Glen Iris, Melbourne.
The fourth edition incorporates a description of the WINDOWS version of the
program which replaced the DOS based data entry program CAMLIN. This
involved a complete rewrite of Chapter 2 and the removal of Chapters 3 and 5.
This fifth edition describes the major update to Version 5 which replaces the
simple single zone analysis with an air handling unit/zone/room input thereby
enabling rooms and zones to be combined into air handling plants and the
psychrometrics to be carried out for a number of difficult system types. It also
describes the new form of the results and the many other enhancements that
have been included in this update.
Review and Revision
In order to assist with the periodic review and revision of this User Guide, users
are encouraged to make known their experience in using the User Guide and the
associated program and to notify any additional information which they can
provide or to which reference can be made. This information should be forwarded
to the ACADS-BSG Office in Melbourne.
Acknowledgements
Acknowledgement is also given to the people involved with the development of
the program, including the authors of this user guide and Ferdynand Kozlowski
who was the programmer for the conversion to WINDOWS and this latest version.
r
ACADS-BSG
I
Date of issue July 2015
Mechanical Engineering Services User Guides
Users Guide for the Computer Program Camel
Murray Mason B.Sc.(S&V), B.E.(Mech.), F.I.E.(Aust), F.AIRAH, M.AAS
Tom Hamilton Dip.Mech.E., B.App.Sc.(Math.), Dip.Math,,
Trevor Kingston B.Eng, Grad,Dip.Comm.Comp., M.I.E.(Aust), M.AIRAH, M.ASHRAE
I
Contents:
1
Features and Limitations
1
1-10 General Description
1-20 Program Features
1-30 Program Limitations
1-40 Limitations Imposed by the Use of the Carrier Method
1-50 Limitations Imposed by the Program
1-60 The CAMEL Program and Associated Programs and Files
1-70 Modelling Different Systems
r
2 Entering
3
Data - General
8
2-10 General Description
2-20 Getting Started
2-30 Main Screen
2-40 Setting Project Defaults
2-50 The Configuration Screens
2-60 The Summary Screen
2-70 AHU’s, zones and rooms tree
8
9
11
13
15
17
21
Entering Data - Project Screens
23
3-10 The Project Screens
3-20 The Project Tab Page
3-30 Weather Location
3-40 The Map Screen
3-50 The Schedules Tab Page
3-60 The Shading Tab Page
3-70 The Windows Tab Page
3-80 Glass Selection Form
3-90 The Walls Tab Page
3-100 The Chillers, Boilers and Circuits Tab Page
3-110 Preconditioners Tab Page
4 Entering Data - AHU Screens
Calculating, Viewing and Printing
5-10 Calculate
5-20 The VIEW Screens
5-30 Project Results Tab Page
5-40 AHU Results Tab Page
5-50 Zones and Rooms Results Tab Page
'
23
24
27
33
35
36
40
46
49
50
53
56
4-10 The AHU, Zones and Rooms Screen
4-20 The AHU Tab Page
4-30 The AHU Coil Tab Page
4-40 The Zone and Room Tab Page
4-50 External (Walls & Roofs) Tab Page
4-60 The Partitions Tab Page
4-70 The Internal Tab Page
5
1
1
3
3
4
5
5
56
60
66
70
79
86
88
Results
94
94
94
97
102
104
5-60 Room Load Charts Tab Page
5-70 Printing Results Tab Page
5-80 Table Results Tab Page
5-90 Errors
5-100 Graphing the Load and Air Quantity Tables
5-110 Viewing Shadows on Walls and Roofs
120 Psychrometric Charts
5-
6 Data Checking and Error Messages
108
110
112
114
114
117
118
120
120
10 Data Checking
6120
6-20 Error Messages
120
6-30 Errors that cause the Calculations to Fail - (Fatal Errors)
6-40 Errors or Comments that do not Cause Calculations to Fail - (Non-Fatal Errors) 121
7 Technical Description
7-10 Heating and Cooling Loads
7-20 Outside air Quantity and Conditions
7-30 Outside to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger
7-40 Psychrometrics
7-50 Adjusted Room Sensible, Latent and Total Heat
7-60 Apparatus Load and Air Quantity Option
7-70 Light Weight Roofs
7-80 Modified Window Storage Load Factors (SFMOD) and Wall ETD's
7-90 Window, Wall & Roof Shading Calculations
7-100 Skylights
7-110 Azimuth Angles
7-120 Sun on the Normally Shaded Exposure
7-130 Operation in the Northern Hemisphere
7-140 Plant Operating Times
7-150 Winter Warm Up Capacity
123
123
124
125
130
131
131
132
136
139
139
140
141
141
142
Appendix A
[
f
Revised Equivalent Temperature Differences for Roofs Exposed to Sun and in Shade. 143
Appendix B
Peak Solar Heat Gain Through Reference Glass
144
Appendix C
Extract from MASTER.WEA file
145
Appendix D
List of Standard Walls and Roofs
146
Appendix E
Extract from CAMEL.WAR file
151
Appendix F
CAMEL & BEAVER Master Glass Data
152
Appendix G
Users Weather Data File
References
156
157
!
f
1 Features and Limitations
1-10 General Description
The program CAMEL calculates building air conditioning heating and cooling
loads and performs a psychrometric analysis to determine the air quantities for
each air handling unit, zone and room. It caters for the design of buildings located
between 50° North and 50° South latitude.
The program has extensive capabilities in terms of the psychrometric calculations
that can be performed and in terms of the shading devices that can be modelled.
These include shading from reveals and overhangs on both walls and windows
and shading from adjacent buildings or integral parts of the same building.
The methods employed are based on the principles set out by Carrier
International Corporation, as described in the AIRAH/IRHACE Application Manual
DA9 - Air Conditioning Systems [1] with extensions to these methods carried out
under contract to the Australian Construction Service (the Federal Government
Construction Authority) by Murray Mason, Tom Hamilton and Trevor Kingston
through ACADS-BSG Pty Ltd. The technicalities of some of these extensions to
the "Carrier" method are described in Section 5 of this User Guide. A thorough
appreciation of the design procedures outlined in the Application Manual and this
User Guide is essential for the fullest advantage to be gained from the use of the
program.
The program performs an analysis on a peak load basis only (i.e. no part load
analysis is performed). Interpretation and use of the output must take this into
consideration.
1-20 Program Features
The main features of the program are as follows:
(i)
The program performs an hourly cooling load analysis on a design day either:in each of the twelve months from January to December if the monthly 3 pm
design dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures are used (note these monthly
temperatures may be selected for some 600 Australian locations as well as
some other countries supplied with the program, or entered for a particular
calculation, or the hourly design temperatures extracted from the users own
weather data file) OR
in each of the nine months from September to May (March to November in
the Northern Hemisphere) if the Carrier yearly range corrections (Table 1 of
DA9) are required to be used.
(ii)
The program includes corrections for elevation above sea level to both the solar
radiation on windows, walls and roofs and the psychrometrics in calculating air
flows.
(iii)
The program models air handling systems with either single or multiple zones
and if required, multiple rooms within a zone. The program performs a load
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
1
r
analysis for each room, combines these loads into zone loads and then air
handling unit loads. The psychrometrics are carried out at air handling
unit/zone level and the air quantities can then be distributed to rooms on the
basis of load or floor area. When loads are accumulated for different rooms,
the program takes account of AS1668 - 2012 compartment formula in
modelling outside air if requested, allowing entry as l/s/person at room or
zone level which is then converted to a percentage outside air at the air
handling plant adjusted to comply (but not for VAV systems).
(iv)
The program carries out a psychrometric analysis for each air handling unit
entered for a range of system types viz:
•
•
•
•
®
•
•
Constant volume cooling with zone reheat
Constant volume single zone heating and cooling (also used for RCHP
and Variable refrigerant multi head systems)
Constant volume face and bypass
Variable air volume
Variable air volume with reheat
Evaporative cooling - Direct and Indirect types
Outside air Preconditioners - Temperature or Humidity controlled.
(v)
Coil performance can be stipulated by the nomination of a by-pass factor, the
apparatus dew point or the leaving coil conditions or by fixing the supply air
quantity.
(vi)
The program can simulate the operation of a return/exhaust air heat
exchanger which can be installed on the outside air intake to an individual
AHU or on, or as a Preconditioner to serve one or more AHU(s).
(vii)
The program models shading from overhangs with or without a drop (at the
extremity of the overhang) and/or symmetrical or unsymmetrical reveals on
windows and walls with provision for a solar transmission factor to be
specified for each shading surface. This allows opaque or partially
transparent shading panels to be modelled. Shading can also be applied to
roofs and skylights.
(viii) Shading panels may be at any angle to the window or surface and may have
a “gap” between the shading surface and the wall or window.
(ix)
Shading from adjacent building and portions of the current building including
light wells, etc. can be modelled.
(x)
The location of windows/skylights in walls/roofs entered by the user enables
the effects of shading from overhangs and reveals and from adjacent
buildings on both windows, walls and roofs to be accounted for.
(xi)
The Carrier storage load factors have been modified to more realistically
model the effects of shadows from overhangs, reveals and adjacent
buildings as they pass across walls and windows.
(xii)
The calculation of heat gains through roofs (Effective Temperature
Differences) has been extended to cater for lightweight roofs down to 10
kg/m2 (the Carrier data for roofs caters for roofs down to 100 kg/m2).
(xiii) Minimum air quantities can be entered for rooms or zones, including ,for
VAV systems, a minimum turn down of VAV boxes.
(xiv) The original Carrier storage load factor data has been graphically
interpolated to enable any azimuth angle to be used for external walls and
windows.
(xv)
The building can be rotated simply by entering a rotation angle (rather than
altering all the azimuth angles on each wall in each zone).
(xvi) Wall and roof types can be selected from a file of often used materials
included with and accessed by the program. These wall and roof types are
identical to those used in the energy program BEAVER and this facility
therefore assists in the interfacing of the data between these two programs.
2
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
[
(xvii) A percentage of the load through external walls/roofs and of internal lighting,
equipment etc. loads can be specified as a return air load.
(xviii) Air handling units can be nominated as having their cooling supplied by the
central chiller plant and/or their heating supplied by the central boiler plant
such that the boiler and chiller capacity in projects with a mixture of
packaged and central station air handling units can be determined.
(xix) Packaged AHU may be grouped on to “circuits” to allow the calculation of the
outdoor unit capacity for multi-head variable refrigerant systems, or the
combined capacity of water cooled packaged units on a condenser loop.
(xx)
An unconditioned room through which return air passes from selected rooms
on the same AHU can be entered with its own fabric and internal loads.
(xxi) The zone thermostat can be located in one of the rooms for that zone instead
of the return air duct for that zone.
(xxii) Desiccant humidity control units can be attached to individual AHUs to
precondition the outside air to maintain a nominated room RH
(xxiii) Preconditioners serving a number of AHUs can be modelled with
temperature control (cooling coil) or humidity control (desiccant wheel) with
or without a fresh to exhaust air heat exchanger.
(xxiv) The program allows the entry diversity factors for people lights and
equipment when calculating chiller capacity.
(xxv) The results can be viewed selectively and built up into a user defined print
file. Templates can be set up and stored between runs with predefined
sections of the results for viewing and printing.
(xxvi) The loads, air quantities and temperatures at each hour of the design day for
each month can be displayed graphically for each or a number of rooms,
zones and air handling units as appropriate. For reheat systems, the reheat
can also be graphed.
(xxvii) A psychrometric plot is available for each air handling unit.
(xxviii) A dynamic view of the shadows cast on each external room surface by time
and by month is provided.
(xxix) Items of input data can be globally changed throughout the project to enable
‘what if scenarios to be quickly investigated.
1-30 Program Limitations
The limitations of the program can be subdivided into those that are inherited from
the use of the Carrier Method of calculation and those that are imposed by the
program itself. The majority of the limitations are minor and of significance only in
special circumstances. However, a few of the limitations may occasionally have
considerable effect on the results, and a careful assessment of their implication
must be made before the results from the program can be confidently used.
1-40 Limitations Imposed by the Use of the Carrier Method
(i)
I
L
Cooling load calculations are based on a single design day in each month
considered and the program cannot therefore be used for determining
energy consumption.
(ii) The Carrier method does not make any allowance for the effect of mean
radiant temperature on inside comfort conditions. No provision is made in
the program for the calculation of mean radiant temperature, however the
user can input a 'revised' temperature, for the inside design conditions
(based on the procedure described on page 18 of DA9).
(iii) Storage factors for calculation of thermal storage effects of solar heat gain
through glass and from lights are based on empirical calculations in the
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
3
Carrier method. These calculations were substantiated by experiment
originally but did not make detailed allowance for the surface coefficients of
the building materials. The only allowance made in the Carrier manual is a
halving of the floor mass if a rug is on the floor. Present day building
materials offer a whole range of finishes to walls, floors and ceilings that can
often considerably inhibit the transmission of heat into the structure. The
program does not offer any more accurate means of determining the thermal
storage effects. The User may however make an assessment of the
significance of a reduction in the thermal storage effect by re-running the
program with a reduced mass per unit floor area (storage mass).
(iv) The method only considers vertical walls and windows and horizontal roofs
and skylights (windows).
(v) Solar heat gains through glass are based on internal and external wind
velocities as stipulated in Chapter 4 of DA9.
r
f
(vi) No allowance is made for ground reflection or reflection of solar radiation
from adjacent buildings. Reflection from adjacent buildings can have a
significant effect if solar reflecting glass is installed in the neighbouring
building.
(vii) Although the plant operating hours may be entered between 1 and 24 the
hourly loads are calculated on the basis of plant operation being restricted to
12, 16 or 24 hours and for 12 and 16 hour, operation commences at 6 am
(viii) No allowance is made for daylight saving and displacement from time zone
longitude.
[
1-50 Limitations Imposed by the Program
(i)
Only one winter heating load is calculated for each zone on the basis of the
entered internal and external conditions and the solar, internal, return and
supply duct loads being ignored.
(ii) The winter 'U' values are calculated from the entered summer 'U' values by
correcting for the different internal and external film coefficients. Where the
summer 'U' values represent components which are neither vertical nor
horizontal (eg. pitched roof) or contain air gaps or reflective sheeting, the
winter 'U' values computed are only approximate.
(iii) In the heating load analysis no provision is made for heat loss through
basement walls and floors below ground level as described in Ch. 6 of DA9.
(iv) The program does not provide for solar heat gain through glass blocks
(Table 19 in DA9).
(v) The multipliers for solar altitudes below 40° (included in Table 18 in DA9 and
applicable to outside shading screens with 17° horizontal slats) is not
included in the program.
(vi) No provision is made for excess heat and moisture for short term occupancy
by people (refer page 97 of DA9).
[
(vii) No provision is made for the inclusion of storage effects from swing. If
required, however, this can be allowed for manually (after running the
program) by adjusting the peak cooling load in the program output, as
described in the footnotes in Table 12 of DA9.
(viii) The program does not include moisture absorption and latent heat gain
reductions (as described on page 104 of DA9).
(ix) For the cooling load estimate, the program provides for heat gain to ducts as
a percentage of room sensible heat. This percentage figure is input by the
user and is not calculated in the program (ie, it does not follow the method
outlined in chart 3, page 108 in DA9). The user should therefore, after
running the program, check the input percentage against the calculated
room sensible heat in this Chart.
4
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
(x) The formulation used in the program for the saturation curve in the
psychrometric chart restricts the apparatus dew point to the range 2°C to
28°C, which should however adequately cover the range normally
encountered in air conditioning systems design.
|
(xi) In calculating the thermal storage effects from lights the program cannot
provide for lights turned on prior to the time the plant is switched on (6 am).
(xii) The program makes provision for the user to nominate some of the design
parameters associated with a number of psychrometric processes. The
limitations associated with the use of these options are stated in Section 5 of
this User Guide.
(xiii) The number of air handling units, zones and rooms that can be processed is
limited to 600 each.
1-60 The CAMEL Program and Associated Programs and Files
The CAMEL program comprises:•
The main WINDOWS program (CAMEL.EXE) in which the input data is entered
and all other operations are controlled,
© The main calculation program (CAMCALC.EXE) which is executed from within
the main CAMEL program,
•
A configuration file (CAMEL.CFG) which stores things like the default drives for
data and results files. These can be changed under “Configuration” on the main
CAMEL screen,
•
A "key" file (CAMEL.KEY) that contains the user details,
®
A file containing the walls and roof 'U' values and densities (CAMEL.WAR),
•
A file containing the 3 pm monthly design dry and wet bulb temperatures
(MASTER.WEA). This file contains data for over 600 locations. For details
of how this weather data was compiled see Reference 6.
The file can be added to by the user (ie. additional locations with the
appropriate data can be added) but the format of the file must be strictly
adhered to. An extract from this file is included in Appendix C. Note that the
last figure on each line of the data is an arithmetic sum of all the values on
that line. This is used to check that the data has not been inadvertently
changed or corrupted.
•
A file containing over 200 “master” glass types (BMWindow.txt) (which
correspond to those in BEAVER - the Energy Calculation Program) as well the
corresponding User entered glass file (BUWindow.txt). Both these files are
typically stored in separate directory eg. CAMEL BEAVER GLASS DATA
•
Other files used by the program including a number of .DLL and .VBX files.
1-70 Modelling Different Systems
Various systems may be directly modelled in CAMEL with the psychrometrics
controlled by various means. The Technical details of how each system is
modelled is included in Chapter 5 and the various means of defining the
psychrometrics are:.
(a) a bypass factor
(b) a bypass factor and the coil ADP
(c) the coil leaving dry bulb temperature in which case the program calculates
the leaving wet bulb temperature.
(d) both the coil leaving dry bulb and wet bulb coil temperatures
(e) a nominated supply air quantity, in which case the leaving coil dry bulb
and wet bulb are calculated.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
5
t
(f) a nominated supply air quantity with a fixed bypass around the coil in
which case the type of bypass (MIXed or RETurn) must be nominated
together with either the coil bypass factor or the coil leaving temperature
(DB or DB and WB).
In all cases it is assumed that the entered room dry bulb condition is maintained
(at design conditions) and if the room sensible heat factor differs from zone to
zone or room to room then the room relative humidity will vary accordingly.
The basic air systems modelled by CAMEL are:
•
•
Constant volume cooling with zone reheat
Constant volume single zone heating and cooling (also used for RCHP and
Variable refrigerant multi head systems)
•
Constant volume face and bypass
•
Variable air volume
•
Variable air volume with reheat
•
Evaporative cooling
» Outside air Preconditioners
In addition extensions to these can be made as described below.
Mixed or Return air bypass systems.
This is used when the calculated dehumidified air quantity is fixed by the leaving
coil conditions but the entered supply air quantity is required to be higher than the
dehumidified air quantity. The excess of supply air over dehumidified air may be
all return air or a mixture of return and outside air and is bypassed around the coil
through a fixed bypass.
Dump back system
This situation arises when an entered supply air quantity (on the AHU-Coil Tab
Page) is less than the calculated dehumidified air quantity (using the entered
bypass factor or leaving coil conditions). In this situation the type of bypass must
be MIXED.
100 Percent Outside air plant
For a 100% outside air plant simply nominate the outside air as 100% (Ahu Tab
Page). In this situation all return duct gains are assumed to apply to the
exhausted air and are ignored. The program iterates to a solution where the
dehumidified air quantity equals the outside air quantity.
Any other percentage can be entered for outside air. This is taken as a
percentage of the dehumidified air quantity. If a minimum air quantity is also
entered, the program calculates the outside air quantity as a percentage of the
calculated dehumidified air quantity and then if the dehumidified air quantity is
less than the minimum, the program increases the supply air quantity to the
minimum.
Example: if the outside air quantity is entered as 100% and the program
calculates a dehumidified air quantity of say 1000 L/s. If now the user also wants
a minimum air quantity of 4 Air Changes and this is equal to 1250 L/s then the
program increases the supply air quantity but not the outside air. If the user wants
the outside air to be equal to the supply air quantity a rerun of the program is
required with the outside air also set to 4 Air Changes.
Outside to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger
Simply enter the Heat Exchanger Efficiency on the AHU Tab Page provided the
Heat Exchanger only serves that one AHU. (A Heat Exchanger may also be
included in a preconditioner and serve multiple connected AHU’s.)
6
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
Desiccant Humidity Control Unit (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)
Desiccant Humidity Control Units are connected before the AHU and pre-process
the outdoor air. When entered on the AHU Tab the entered unit only dehumidifies
the outside air supplied to that AHU. (A HCU may also be included in a
preconditioner and serve multiple connected AHU’s.) The way the desiccant
humidity control unit is modelled in CAMEL is detailed in clause 7-40
Psychrometrics.
Provision is provided for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre­
cooling coil is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design
conditions (entered on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity
control unit. It enables a re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity
and/or the actual moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a
particular manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled
water pre-cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Outside Air Preconditioner (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)
Outside air preconditioners can be entered (on the Preconditioners Tab Page on
the Project Screen) and connected to any number of the entered AHU plants.
The type of Preconditioner can be:
• Temperature Controlled (Cooling and/or heating Coil) with or without an
outside to exhaust air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit.
• Humidity Controlled (Desiccant Wheel) with or without an outside to exhaust
air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit. Refer 7-40
Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity Control Unit for description of how the
HCU is modelled.
® An outside to exhaust air heat exchanger only.
The Air Handling Units that are connected to the preconditioner can be nominated
on the Tab Page (as from AHU m to n) or individually on each AHU Tab Page.
The condition of the outside air supplied to each connected AHU is then the
leaving conditions for the particular preconditioner connected to a particular AHU.
Provision is provided for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre­
cooling coil is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design
conditions (entered on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity
control unit. It enables a re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity
and/or the actual moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a
particular manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled
water pre-cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Evaporative Air Cooling
For direct evaporative cooling the program assumes 100% outside air and the
evap cooler efficiency is entered on the AHU-Coil Tab Page. As normal comfort
outside air temperatures (hottest day in each month) are used the room internal
design temperature may need to be higher than normal otherwise excessive air
quantities will result. To achieve an acceptable air change rate re-runs of the
program may be required.
For indirect evaporative cooling the program assumes 100% outside air and
provides on AHU-Coil Tab Page the means of expressing the effectiveness of the
indirect evaporative cooler. The choice is between:
•
•
•
Wet Bulb approach effectiveness
Dew Point Efficiency
Leaving DB
The assumptions listed for each of the above may be invalid and the user may,
after running CAMEL, have to change the entered values based on the ambient
conditions at the time of the peak load.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
7
I
r
2 Entering Data - General
2-10 General Description
The input data for CAMEL is entered on two sets of screens accessed via the
P
Project or LzJ AHU, Zone and
Menu Bar or the appropriate Button Room on the Tool Bar. Within each of these sets of screens individual Tab
Pages are accessed by selecting the appropriate tab at the top of the screen.
CAMEL requires a minimum 600 X 800 (SVGA) screen resolution. VGA screens
(480 x 640) cannot display the complete CAMEL screens. If the CAMEL screens
are not fully visible then the user must use the WINDOWS setup to change the
screen resolution.
[
[
I
Moving Around the Screens
There are two types of screens in CAMEL, those with a tabular spreadsheet type
format where each field is a cell in the table and those with separate (boxed)
fields.
To move from field to field (or cell to cell) the mouse can be used to move directly
to a field or cell while from the keyboard: o the TAB key or down arrow moves to the next field
the shift TAB or up arrow moves to the previous field.
•
In fields/cells that are combo boxes with drop down lists: •
•
In the boxed field format the drop down list is brought up by either clicking
the mouse or hitting function key F10.
In the tabular format the mouse must be used to bring up the list.
In any combo box the list can be traversed using the up and down arrow keys, by
direct selection with the mouse or typing the first letter eg. L for Litres/sec.
In the tabular screens the equal sign on the keyboard, copies from either the left
in a row or from above in a column depending on the particular screen.
Editing a Field
In the boxed fields once the cursor is moved to the field either by using the
mouse, the tab key or the up and down arrow keys, the value in the field is
highlighted. Hitting delete, backspace or the space bar will clear the field. Typing
a value at this point will overwrite the existing value. Clicking on the value or
using the left and right arrow keys allows the user to edit the specific numbers or
letters in the field.
In the tabular format once the cursor is moved to a particular cell clicking the left
mouse will invoke edit mode and the value in the cell will be highlighted. Editing is
then as for the box field format.
Selection Lists
”y
The mouse symbol 0 with a red right button adjacent to a field indicates that
selection is available from a list or pop up form which in a number of cases allows
the user access to other screens for editing eg. to edit or add another item in the
selection list.
8
I
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
i.
Data Validation
As the data is entered on each screen, various data checks are made. Range
checks are made on each field as data is entered. Consistency checks are made
between items as they are entered and a smiley face on the tool bar changes
colour between green (no errors) and red (errors). Clicking on the smiley face
when it is red causes a list of the current errors on this screen to be displayed.
At the top of the SUMMARY Screen there is a validate button which when clicked
invokes a series of more extensive cross checks on the data in different screens.
This is further described in clause 6-10.
When all the input data is entered and validated, the calculations can be
performed after which the results can be viewed and/or printed.
The Data
The data entered into CAMEL is stored in a data base (Access) but before doing
the calculations, the data is transferred to an ASCII text file. This is achieved by
Saving (or Save As..). The reason for this is that the calculations are carried out
by a separate Fortran program formerly called CAMEL but now in this WINDOWS
version called CAMCALC and this program has as input, the ASCII text file.
In theory there is no need to SAVE your data until you wish to do the calculations
because even if someone “pulls the plug” the data will be in your project data
base. Murphy's 39th law however states that if you are assured nothing will ever
go wrong it will go wrong; so on a large job it is a good idea to SAVE your data in
the text file every so often as a back up to the data base.
A description of each input data item is given in the following clauses with a cross
reference where appropriate, to the AIRAH/IRHACE Air Conditioning Load
Estimation and Psychrometrics Application Manual (DA9) and/or sections of this
Users Guide. Reference to this Manual is given as table and/or page numbers,
eg. (Table 1,pp. 10-13 of DA9).
The user is not precluded from obtaining values for input data items from sources
other than DA9, but extreme care should be taken to ensure that any such values
are truly appropriate.
Items of data marked with a ' #' are mandatory if that particular Tab Page,
column or line is entered or as further detailed in the particular clauses relating to
that input item. All other values are optional and may be left blank when not
required.
2-20 Getting Started
To become familiar with the program it is suggested that you open the sample
project included on the supplied CD. From File on the Menu Bar in the MAIN
Screen, select Open Project and from the list of data files, select, by ‘double
clicking’ the mouse, the sample project SAMPLE.DAT.
Having opened the project it is suggested you view the various screens and Tab
Pages taking note of the Help button available on each screen. General help on a
particular screen can be accessed by clicking the Help button. All fields have
range checks and specific help is accessed by hitting function key F1.
The data is grouped into general project information and the Air Handling Unit;
P
A
zone and room data accessed through the Project — or AHU ..... .. button and it
is simply a matter of working your way through the screens and reviewing (or in
the case of a new project inputing) your data.
The Tab Pages on the Project Screen are:•
•
•
Project - General Project Information including the job location
Schedules - Schedules for people, lights and equipment
Shading - Window and Wall Shading Schemes
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
9
•
•
•
•
Window - Details of the windows by type
Chillers and Boilers - Details of Chiller and Boiler pump and piping heat
losses and gains
Walls - Details of any special walls by type
Preconditioners - Outside air preconditioners
The Tab Pages on the Air Handling Unit Screen are:•
•
•
•
•
•
AHU - General input for the AHU
AHU Coil - Air handling unit coil details
Zone and Room - General information about zones and rooms
External - External Walls and Roofs
Internal - Internal loads; People, Lights and Equipment
Partitions - Internal Floors, Ceilings and Partitions
Data is entered for each Air Handling Unit (which is primarily the data for sizing
the coil) and for each zone in the air handling unit. Individual rooms in each zone
can also be entered but this is optional. The program apportions supply air to the
rooms on the basis of load or floor area as indicated by the user. If individual
rooms are not required to be entered each zone comprises ‘one room’ containing
ail the external surfaces, internal loads, etc. for that zone.
There is also a Summary screen accessed from the Main Screen. On this, red
frowning or green smiley faces appear representing each Tab Page for which
data has been entered. Double clicking on any smiley face will drop the user into
the particular Tab Page. To remove any errors double click on the particular red
face with the left mouse and drop into that Tab Page where the error(s) can be
displayed by clicking on the red face on that screen.
To perform the calculations the project must first be validated then saved using
SAVE or SAVE AS, in the File Menu. Validation is performed from the
SUMMARY Screen and this invokes a number of cross checks between data in
different screens.
The calculation can then be performed by clicking the calculate button.
Once the calculations are performed the results can be viewed by clicking the
View button. The results are categorised and can be selectively displayed by
checking a series of check boxes on the various Results Tab Pages. For further
details refer Chapter 3.
On the Printing Screen, the selected results from the other results screens are
accumulated ready for printing (refer clauses 5-20 to 5-70 for further details).
r
Tables of loads, air quantities etc. can also be (separately) viewed and printed
individually (refer clause 5-80 for further details).
If there are errors in the results, a different results screen appears where the
errors are detailed (refer 5-90 for further details).
Once the data is entered for a particular external wall or roof, the shadows that
the various shading devices cast on that particular wall or roof can be viewed by
clicking the camel shadow button.
For further details refer clause 5-110.
With the calculations completed the AHU, zone and room loads, air quantities etc.
and room temperature, reheat etc. can be displayed graphically by selecting the
Graph button.
BiiTFor further details refer 5-100.
r
The psychrometrics for selected AHU’s may also be plotted, t
details refer clause 5-120.
For further
Once you have toured through the various screens you should be ready to enter
your own project. To do this select New Project from File on the Menu Bar on the
MAIN Screen and then enter your data. The data for each screen is described in
detail in the following clauses.
10
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
If you need further assistance of any sort you will find it of considerable
advantage to be a member of ACADS-BSG’s CLUB-BSG and then you can take
advantage of our comprehensive hot-line service. For further details contact the
ACADS-BSG Office in Glen Iris on (03) 9885 6586.
For further details of our comprehensive range of building services software visit
our web site at www.ozemail.com.au/~acadsbsg.
2-30 Main Screen
File Project aHU, Zone Room Summary Calculate View Shadow Graph Psychrometrics Configuration Help
Mi
PjAj
-i
arllffl ?\
Updates 1
Fig 2-30A The Main Screen Menu and Tool Bar
The MAIN or First screen in CAMEL enables a user to open an existing or new
project, display a summary of the project, proceed to the Project or AHU, Zone
and Room data input Screens, perform the calculations and finally view and or
print the results. In addition the user can look at the shadows cast by shading
devices on any external wall, view a psychrometric plot of each AHU coil and view
graphics of the loads, air quantities etc.
The items in the pull down menus on the MAIN Screen are:
File
Open New Project
Open Existing Project
Append Project
Save Project
Save Project As
Project Defaults
Printer Setup
List of 4 most recent files
View Input Data
Exit
Project -- takes the user to the Project Input Data Screens
AHU, Zone, Room - takes the user to the AHU, Zone and Rooms input data
Screens
Summary - takes the user to the Summary Screen
Calculate
f
View - Viewing the results (refer clause 5-20) or Viewing the Calculation
Errors (refer clause 5-90)
Shadow - takes the user to the Shadow Screen (refer clause 5-110)
Graph - takes the user to the Graph Screen (refer clause 5-100)
Psychrometrics - takes the user into the Psychrometrics plotting
(refer clause 5-120)
Configuration - (refer clause 2-50)
System
Colours
Help
Contents
Index
Tip of the Day
Overview
Program Features
Program Limitations
Getting Started
Entering Data
About
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
11
!
The buttons on the Toolbar are shown in Fig 2-30A and in order left to right are:
as
['
Exit
S^7 Open Existing Project
P Open New Project
ill Save Project
p
— Project Screens - refer clause 3-10
A
_ AHU, Zones and Rooms Screens - refer clause 4-10
l
Summary Screen - refer clause 2-60
MS)
Calculate - refer Chapter 3
w View Results - refer Chapter 3
Shadow - refer clause 5-110
B
...
Graph - refer clause 5-100
. Psychrometric Charts - refer clause 5-120
Updates J UPDATES - This opens a form which displays the list of updates to the
program to produce this version of the program.
[
Open Existing Project
Allows the user to open an existing project (file). When this is selected a file
selection box appears in which the title of the project and the number of air
handling units is displayed for the file highlighted.
Open New Project
Selecting Open New Project clears any existing data from the data base.
Append Project
This allows a user to append a previously saved input data file to the current
project. When selected the data in the file to be appended is added to each of the
screens and:
•
any identical schedules, window and shading schemes and/or special walls
are merged and
•
any schedules, window and shading schemes and/or special walls that are
different, but have the same title, are renamed
I
l
Both the data in the file to be appended, and the current data, must be free of
errors before the appending will be implemented.
Where there are any differences in the data on the Project screen and/or the
Chillers and Boilers Screens, the values in the current (base) data are used (the
values in the appended file being discarded) These differences can then be listed
by selecting the Append Messages button on the Summary Screen.
Save Project
Saves the existing data in a file with a name corresponding to the current CAMEL
data file. If current data has not been saved previously the user is prompted for a
new file name.
Save Project As
Displays a dialogue box enabling the user to select or enter the name of a file in
which the current input data in CAMEL will be saved.
12
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
I
r-
Printer Setup
This option allows the user to select the printer, change orientation of the paper
from landscape to portrait, etc.
View Input File
This displays the current input data file. At the top of the screen is a Menu Bar:
File
Open - opens another input data file.
Save - saves the data file. Changes can be made to the file manually but
this is not recommended as it is very error prone.
Exit - exits this screen
Search
Find - allows the user to find a character string in the file
Repeat Next F3 - repeats find
Options
Font - this allows the user to change the font so the file can be viewed
better.
Calculate
This causes the calculations to be performed. The data however must first be
saved to a data file selected by the user. The actual calculation program is written
in FORTRAN.
View Results
Once the calculations are completed (or if there are errors) the program drops
into VIEW Screens where the Results can be selectively viewed and/or printed.
Refer Chapter 3 for details.
2-40 Setting Project Defaults
This menu item calls up a screen in which the user can set default values for a
range of items. Each time a user opens a new project, these values will be
inserted by default in the respective fields. This data is stored permanently and
will apply to any new project opened. This screen also allows the user to
determine which countries appear in the countries selection list on the Project Tab
page (refer to the end of this clause and fig. 2-40B).
Default data
The items for which defaults can be set are for items on the Project Tab Page and
the AF1U Tab Page. The items are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
!
•
•
•
Location
Conditions - Comfort or Critical
# Latitude
# South or North
# Elevation
# Winter Design °CDB
#8-18 or 24 Hr
# Winter Design % RH
# Daily Range °C
All Single Zone Single Room units
Room Design Conditions (AHU Screen)
- Summer DB
- Summer RH%
- Winter DB and
- Winter RH%
Use AS1668-2012 Multiple Compartment Formula
Minimum Leaving Coil Temperature
Default Plant Operating Times
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
13
For the Storage Mass Calculator
• Glass Thickness (for Windows in the External Surfaces)
• The Factor for Walls and Windows (in the External Surfaces)
• The Factor for Roofs (in the External Surfaces)
• The Surface Density and Factor for Floors
• The Factor for Partitions
Once set these apply to all the storage mass calculator forms but can be
overridden for an individual Project (on any Storage Mass Calculator Form) or
individually for any space.
1
Design Conditions based on climatic data
1990 C* after
before ^
For the Storage Hass Calculator
Locations in List
r AH AHLTs, Single Zone, Single Room
Externa! Surface
3
~
(ALBION PARK
Map j Locationj New South Wales
Glass Thickness (mm)
DO
299
29.9
29.9
28.0
24,7
21.8
22.3
25.0
28.7
29.9
29.9
29.9|
WB
23.5
23.5
23.5
20.9
18.8
1G.5
15.2
1G.7
18.3
20.9
23.0
23.5j
Factor Roofs
34.6
Latitude
Elevation (m)
a
Density
kg/m2
05
Factor
Critical
South
:0.5
Floors
Surface
Room Design Conditions
Summer
ICpfroorL
10
Factor Walls & Windows 1 ”o
JAN |f!b (MAR l APR [MAY ]jUN [jUL [AUG |sEF | OCl"] NOV [Di^~l:
Conditions
£.
Ceilings & Partitions
DB [24
North
i
RH% I50
Factor
i0.25
Winter
j8
Winter Design *CDB
]6.1
Winter Design %RH
|80.0
Daily Range *C
'10 0
DB j20
[
RH% ;50'
Use AS 1568 Multiple
Compartment Formula?
No
▼ |
10
a Min. leaving coil temp *C
Default Plant Operating Time--------------Start < !
i'
mmmmmmmmmm
Finish < !
3
1
I
?
Cancel
Save
Fig 2-40A The Project Defaults Screen
The first ten and the minimum leaving coil temp and operating times are for the
Project Tab Page and are described in Clauses 3-20 and 3-30. The Room
Design Conditions and Use AS1668-2012 are described in clause 4-20 while the
Storage Calculator Defaults are described in clause 4-40.
• If a location is selected in the PROJECT DETAILS Tab Page values for these
five items are extracted from the CAMEL weather file MASTER.WEA. The
defaults only apply when the user elects to ‘Enter his/her own outdoor design
conditions’ and then three additional items are displayed in lieu of ‘Conditions’ on
the Project Details Tab Pages:
•
•
•
f
Summer Design °CDB - the 3pm Jan (July) Summer outdoor DB temp.
Summer Design °CWB - the 3pm Jan (July) Summer outdoor WB temp.
Yearly Range °C
These three values are then used to calculate the 3pm outdoor temperatures at
other months (rather than using the values from the MASTER.WEA file)
Locations in List Button
This button brings up a form (fig. 2-40B) that displays a list of countries where
climatic data is available and stored in CAMEL and allows the user to determine
those which appear on the country selection list on the Project Tab Page.
Locations in Selection List Form
This selection form displays the available countries and states of Australia where
climatic data is stored in the program. The user can select the desired locations
that are required to be included in the Location selection list (on the Project Tab
Page) by checking the appropriate selection boxes.
14
L
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
f
\••
. .1..........
I.".'.'
I nr» il
■K
mm B
s
.' i
7 AUS
c:-!!
7
17 s'dSW
17 z:t
NZ
7
7
PiiC
7
7
GLD
\\f
SA
SIa
TAS
i
■ 1/
A Li si. Capifsi Cities
Ca
So:jii'd V/ohs
.'■J o:i hern 7 s;dlory
i' je.v Ze
and
Pacific Isisriri:'
Papua I'irif; Guinsc
;lLiesr:sid?sC
StiLiih Australia
South Easl Asi
Tasmania
rwi-:
Taiwan
VIC
VM
Vic! o.ia
\VSS*5n*l AiJstiBiia
Apply j
CiiL;CbI
Fig. 2-40B Locations in selection List Form
2-50 The Configuration Screens
liii
WHmBBM
ipum
mss*
iH—HSIi
C: \ CaSe L 510\DAT a"
€3ca
(3CAMEL510
lei _
■—pa
-| j [23 old stuff
Output Files Director#
<• Same as Input
f' Select
.i: \
JCAMEL510
_J old sluff
I
wmSmmm
Weather Files Director#
....... CACAMEL5T0........~
jC:\
__i DATA
C-Sc:
i_| Updates
Glass Data riles Directory
CACAKELJ!E.WbR Pb\GS DATA\
JC\
1
Close
r
?
Apply
Fig 2-50A The Systems Configuration Screen
The Configuration drop down menu on the Menu Bar has two items:
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
15
I
The Systems Configuration
On this screen default drives and other system requirements are set. Once
selections are made the Apply button is clicked and then this configuration will be
saved permanently.
Input files directory
[
r
This is the directory where your input data files will be saved by default when you
save your data.
Output files directory
If Select is checked, this is the directory where your output (Results) files will be
saved by default after the calculations are performed. If Same as input is
checked the default output files directory is set to match the input file directory for
each particular run file.
I
Weather files directory
This is the default directory for any user weather files. These files comprise DB
and WB temperatures at each hour of a design day in each month and have to be
developed separately by the user. Now that an extensive range of weather
locations are readily available in CAMEL, users will rarely need this option.
Glass Data Files Directory
This is the directory where the Master Glass Data (BMWindow.txt file) and the
User Glass Data (BUWindow.txt file) reside. They are located in a separate
directory that is common to both CAMEL and BEAVER so that both programs
access the same file. If the user is not using BEAVER then these files may be
located in the main CAMEL directory
I
The Colours Configuration
Csnfg j’-gtion
- Tables r Table -
i
Preview
1
Tent
Col • S
A
T essl 1
n
r Edit Cell—..... —
C
t
S |
I Background I
Headings----------Background I
-Diagrams
r Colours -
Drag mouse on graphic to rotate;
right click to restore to defaults
j
i
i
Adjacent shading
i
i ESS
Mandatory Fields
Mandatory Field
Close
?;
Apply
Fig 2-50B The Colours Configuration Screen
16
r ■
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
In this screen certain colours under the control of the user can be set:
• Tables
This applies to the screens with tabular type input ie. Schedules, Shading,
Windows, Walls and Preconditioners on the Project Tab Pages, the AHU and
AHU-Coil Tab Pages when “Show All" is selected and for the Zones and
Rooms the External, Partitions and Internal Tab Pages. The settings available
are the background colour and the text colour for:
Table - the main colour for the Tables
Edit Cell - the colour for the current cell (where the cursor is located)
• Headings - the headings for the Tables
• Diagrams
S
Picture background - the colour of the graphics window
Walls - the colour of the walls in the External Tab Pages
Windows - the colour of the windows in the External Tab Pages and the Shading
Tab Page
Shades - the colour of window or wall shades or shading surfaces from
Adjacent Shading. Reveals are always drawn as wire frame whilst
overhangs and drops are drawn solid if they are opaque and hatched
if they are partially transparent (factor greater than zero)
Shadow
the colour of the shadow cast on the building by the various shades
which can be viewed via the Camel Shadow button (clause 5-90).
Graphic - The default angle for the display of the external surface graphic may
be set by clicking and dragging with the mouse.
Adjacent Shading - The colour of the Adjacent Shading Graphic.
® Mandatory fields
Text and background - Text and background colour of the of the cells for items that
are mandatory.
2-60 The Summary Screen
inlr.
i
{toil j m I h;fi- (
Schedules
Project
I':. ;
l.Mnli'iVr Hifjili:*
■*;il
.i*.
&«S|i
liillliiiffli
•AHUGftf ROMP
AHIJftOi
hchp
1
s.Mir.iii i-im.. .i
1
I Kmr :
i
by
i
V/ !• i (•id'jri.i
AHUG03 RCIIP
.on -Am
vil
r.;
it,
I'i.
.V : \
M.MiSl n«
>
t'Mhr.i!. u uCAST
uA Hr
WEST first Ph
n i: i
First rh
>na r Is
I...
AHU/VA
if'il b ' .*M \ i*
VI ' i f i.i 1
i.Kiii.t ’
7 AH US CV * Reheat
1
It.
tend Fli
‘.'uHiH :l.s‘11's
EAST Third Ph.
CENTRE Third Fir
Add New
itf i Booth
J * Hoorn
! ‘ AHU
m % Boots
Fig. 2-60AThe Summary Screen
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
17
! ..
i
1
Shading
' Schedules
. ' Ptojccl
B
l‘« \'l:!:. :■* ...
mam.
s
■Jill
( sUmp.i!
Ijw
AHUGfM FSCHP
f._.! Roiler & Oiiiic!
Walls
"i: I i- 1
■H ■■jam
a
PifiComJitioncis
mm ■■■■
I
f
2 AHUG02 RCHP
:s AHUtiOoriuip
-1 AHII6M S Zone HtC
HMSjitSiJ IfSjiji
Delete '?
■; r
wm r AHU
Fig. 2-60B The Summary Screen for Single Zone/Room Units.
This screen provides:• A line of 7 buttons which display the Project Screens status and
If the “All Single Zone/Room Units” check box on the Project Tab Page is:
Not Checked• A list of all AHU, zones and rooms entered with an indication of which Tab
Pages in each AHU have been entered under the headings:
AHU Title, AHU and Coil for each AHU and
Zone No, Room Title, Zone/Room, External, Partitions and Internal
for each zone/room.
Checkede A list of all AHU’s and zones entered with an indication of which Tab
Pages in each AHU have been entered under the headings:
AHU Title, AHU and Coil for each AHU and
Zone, External, Partitions and Internal for each zone.
A green smiley face indicates data for the particular Tab Page is present and is
valid. A red face indicates data is present but it is invalid or incomplete. No face
indicates that data has not been entered for this Tab Page. The user can go
directly into any of the Project or AHU, Zone or Room Tab Pages (e.g. to correct
any errors or make changes) by double clicking the particular smiley face.
The AHU and Zone/Room Title can be edited as can the Zone Number (when
present). When the zone number is edited however the zone numbers must
remain in sequence e.g. zone numbers 1, 2 and 3 can only be changed by
changing the 3 to 2 and then changing the 2’s to 1 from the last zone upwards.
And any more complicated renumbering should be done using the Move button.
|
f
At the top left is a Validation button. This performs a series of additional cross
checks zone to zone and zone to project data. The status is displayed in a
message line at the top of the screen. A green Project Valid is displayed if there
are no errors whilst a red Project not Valid is displayed if there are errors. A
yellow Project not Validated indicates that data has been changed but has not
been validated and you will need to press the validation button. When this is
done, if there are now no errors the button and status will turn green. If there are
still errors the button and status will remain red until any errors are corrected and
the validation button pressed again.
Any cross check errors that are found are displayed in a table on the foot of the
screen when the red face on the tool bar is clicked.
Display AHU’s, zones and rooms tree - refer clause 2-70
m
18
Help - Help on this screen.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
Split into single zone I
_____ ____ __ : Split into Single Zone Button
This splits all multi-zone Air Handling Units into separate single zone units. When
selected a Split Options form (Fig 2-60C) appears in which the user can select
between converting all the air handling units in accordance with the requirements
of the Deemed-to-satisfy JV2 provisions of the BCA2006 or leaving the AHU types
unchanged. For the To BCA’ option, since in CAMEL the fuel type is not input, it
is assumed that if there is any AHU connected to a boiler then there is gas or oil
heating and thus:
isi
ft
T Sane AHU Types
IS
Cancel 1
m,.j
Fig 2-60C Split Option Form
- If there is any AHU connected to a boiler, all AHUs are set to Single Zone H&C
Water Cooled and all AHUs are connected to a boiler
If there are no AHUs connected to a boiler, all AHUs are set to Reverse Cycle
Heat Pump
Append Messagesj Append Messages Button
This button appears on the Summary Screen if there are any Messages after an
existing saved CAMEL data file has been “Appended” (by selecting Append
Project under File on the Main Screen). The messages are listed in a form with
the value for the Base (Current) file and Appended File displayed. Once the file
with the appended data is saved, this button is no longer displayed.
Combine rooms Combine rooms button
This combines the Zones&Rooms, External, Partitions and Internal Data for all
rooms in each zone of multi-room AHU’s into a single room on that zone.
The Add, Delete and Move Buttons
Also on the Summary Screen, AHU’s, zones and rooms can be added, deleted or
moved. These are implemented by selection of the appropriate button at the foot
of the Screen.
Delete - deletes a Room or a complete AHU. The delete is carried out at the
current cursor position.
‘Add New’ AHU adds an AHU after the last AHU in the current project. When the
button is selected an ‘Add New AHU’ Form appears where existing data from
another AHU can be copied as the New AHU is created
I
I n-.iti■ Mi'w Allil Hmiilit-i 'i
m
1 Lieale New Hoorn
a
NORTH Ground 3
AHU JT il-ZoiMip
:AM0TiaR:|AHU9TopFioof
C.-.pj* (te. ff0»;ROOK'"~
.j——-i~Afill:
! No ' jAHUeOt RCHP
83
3‘
01
JililSltTj;
it
M
Fig. 2-60D The ‘Add New AHU’ Form
! No i
-RoopTItfcv jNoith East Ground
JSwjfefcT
M
OK
Fig. 2-60E The ‘Add New Room’ Form
l
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
19
‘Add New’ room, adds a new room in a nominated zone in a nominated AHU.
When the button is selected an Add New Room form appears where the
zone number can be nominated and existing data from another Room can be
copied as the New Room is created
r
With Move, a Move AHU, Move Zone or Move Room form appears on screen where the
user enters details of the source and destination of the move.
Move AHU
This allows the re-ordering of AHUs.
m
WKBSSSssm
E*
'©ITi:
AHU ! 5
Zone
AHU I G
Cancel j
MU
■■Bill
mi
§§§(§
11
imm
is
■1
Zone 1 2 ftount ! 1
1
AHU 17
I
I
c :.= .....
Is -jj
■
&
[
Zone iStlj
Insert as Las* Room
9
k
f
in
Fig 2-60F The ‘Move Zone’ Form
Cancel
r,-
Fig 2-60G The ‘Move Room’ Form
Move Zone (Fig 2-60F):
l
[
Move From
AHU - the AHU number in which the zone to be moved is currently located
Zone - the zone number of the zone being moved
Move To
AHU - the AHU to where the zone (including all rooms in this zone) is to be
moved.
A radio button to select whether the zone is to be moved Before, After or
Joined to the selected (referenced) zone shown to the right of these radio
buttons.
Zone - The zone number in the AHU referenced by the radio button selection.
Move Room (Fig 2-60G):
Move From
AHU - the AHU number in which the room to be moved is currently located
Zone - the Zone number in which the room to be moved is currently located
Room number being moved
Move To
AHU - AHU number to where the room is to be moved.
Zone - zone number to where the room is to be moved.
Radio button to select whether moved room is to be the first or last in the zone.
L
|
[
If the ‘All Single Zone/Room Units’ check box has been selected on the Project
Tab Page only AHUs’ can be added or deleted.
f
20
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
1
2-70 AHU’s, zones and rooms tree
Display Tree - the button to display AHU’s, zones and rooms tree is provided on
-d=
j the Summary screen and on all the Ahu’s, Zones and Rooms screens.
Ciose Font Add Delete Copy Paste Help
ahu + :X jRa
i
Zone +! RA
ri
i
j
i
Room
I____i
Original Tree
:n .IVXV.P J
Or ndHCHP 1
- ZONE
ZONE
Grnd Shopl
Grnd Shopl
Grnd RCHP2
Grnd RCHP2
-
ZONE
1
ZONE
Coffee
Coffee Shop
Grnd RCHP3
Grnd RCHP3
r> ZONE
-
:
Grnd Shop3
Grnd RCHP 4
d ZONE
- ZONE
Grnd Shop4
Grnd Shop4
First
VAV First
ZONE
$- ZONE
North
1ST
Floor
North
North top
East 1ST Floor
East Top
East Top
ZONE
ZONE
; West 1ST Floor
— West 1ST Floor
West Top
West Top
|
CV Centre
CV Centre
R.A. Room
R.A. Room
ZONE
ZONE
f oyer
Centre
Floor
ZONE
East 1ST Floor
i.
1ST
North top
ZONE
pi
Shop
ZONE
L
Grnd Shop3
Grnd RCHP 4
VAV
?-
flew 1 ree
Foyer
1ST
Floor
r- Centre 1ST Floor
Centre Top
Centre Top
System Type: Reverse Cycle Heat Pump
Change ] Reverse Cycle Heat Pump
Cancel
Applj1
Fig. 2-70A Display AHU’s, zones and rooms tree
This screen displays AHU’s, Zones and Rooms in Tree form with facility to Move,
Copy and Delete selected items.
The left hand side displays the original tree when entering this screen. The right
hand side shows the new tree. AHU’s that are multi zone are coloured blue whilst
single zone systems(RCHP, Single Zone H&C, etc) are coloured black.
The items on the Menu Bar are:
Close - Closes the Tree Screen
Font - Allows the font type and size to be selected
Add - Adds an AHU, Zone or Room. The options available depends on the
current cursor location
Delete - Deletes the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is currently
located. The options available depends on the current cursor location.
Copy - Copies the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is currently located
to the clipboard
Paste - Pastes the AHU, Zone or Room in the clipboard to the AHU where
the cursor is currently located.
The items on the Tool Bar are:
For AHUs, Zones or Rooms:
Adds an AHU, Zone or Room. The Zone or Room is added where the
cursor is located.
JCJ Deletes the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is located.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
21
Copies the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is located to the
clipboard.
r
i
Pastes the AHU, Zone or Room that is in the clipboard to the AHU where
the cursor is located. Note that you cannot add more than one zone to a
single zone AHU.
RA j
This adds a Return Air Room to the current AHU. The return air room is
added as the first room on the AHU under a label RET AIR instead of
ZONE
Note each AHU is only allowed one Return Air Room, however a Return Air
Room can be copied from one AHU to another the same way as a “normal”
room can, by right clicking the mouse and selecting copy/paste R.A.Room
ST"
Undo - Undoes the most recent change (add, delete, move, etc)
Redo - Redoes the most recent undo
Expands the Tree so all zones and rooms are displayed.
Collapses the tree so that only the air handling units are displayed.
/
O
Help - Help on this screen.
I
Mouse Functions
When the mouse is located on an AHU, Zone, RET AIR or Room:
Right clicking the mouse displays a selection list for the toolbar functions
described above. The items on the selection list depends on the cursor location,
eg with the cursor on an AHU, the list only allows Add, Delete or Copy an AHU or
Add a Zone.
r
Left clicking the mouse select the an AHU, Zone, RET AIR or Room and then
clicking and dragging will move the selected item.
Left clicking the expand/compress (plus/minus) symbol to the left of the AHU or
Zone Title, expands or compresses the tree.
At the foot of the screen the system type is displayed for the AHU currently selected. In
front of the System Type is a Change button which displays a list of the available
systems types and allows the user to change the type of the current system.
Below this is two buttons:
^Cancel S
Cancels all moves, deletes, copies, etc and returns the user to the
Main Screen
Appij* )
i Applies all the changes and returns the user back to the Main Screen
where the new and/or rearranged items should now appear.
22
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
I
!
3 Entering Data - Project Screens
3-10 The Project Screens
In this screen general project information and information that is cross referenced
in the individual zones is entered on a series of tab pages (selected by tabs at the
top of the screen).
At the top of each of the project screens is a toolbar with the following functions:
m
; Close and return to the MAIN Screen
—J Go to the AHU, Zone and Rooms Input Data Screens
X
Clears the column/row where the cursor is located (in tabular format
screens only). The items that are deleted on each tab page are:
The entire schedule (row)
Schedules
The entire shading scheme (column)
Shading
The entire window (column)
Windows
The entire wall (column)
Walls
Chiller & Boiler All values on this page
Preconditioner The entire preconditioner (row)
Copies the column of data where the cursor is into the clipboard (in tabular
format screens only), ie. Schedules, Shading, Windows and Walls Tab
Pages. Note the type or title is not copied as this must be unique.
Pastes the column of data in clipboard to the column where the cursor is (in
tabular format screens only), ie. Schedules, Shading, Windows and Walls
Tab Pages.
■;
Validation - CAMEL validates all data as it is entered. When there are
errors this smiley face changes to red and if the user clicks on this face, all
current errors on this Tab Page will be displayed in a pop-up box at the foot
of the screen.
Displays a calculator
jL Help
Below this tool bar is a set of tabs which allows the user to drop into any desired
Project Tab Page:•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Project
Schedules
Shading (schemes)
Window (types)
Wall (types)
Chiller and Boiler
Preconditioners (outside air)
These are now described in detail in the following clauses.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
23
The Project Tab Page
3-20
On this tab page the Project Title, Location, Outdoor Design Conditions and other
project details are entered. Note that defaults for many of these items can be
entered on the Project Defaults screen accessed under File on the Menu Bar of
the main screen.
The items entered are:Project Title
Three lines for an appropriate title comprising letters or numbers, up to 45
characters in length each line.
All Single Zone/Room Units
This simplifies the data input screens when all Air Handling Units are single zone;
single room. A default can be set in the Project Defaults screen.
Comments
This allows the user to add comments which are listed in the Results under
Project Details. The comments form allows entry of any text from the keyboard.
Project Title
BEAVER Workshop
Ail ABUT,
Single Zone,
Single Room
Office and Retail Building
Comments (empty) > (Melbourne CBD
Map! Location
Aust. Capital Cities
Design Conditions based on climatic data
3pm *CDB
3pm *CWB
tJ : 66062
▼JjSYDNEY RO (Observatory Hill)
1990
before
after
FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JIJL
JAN
30.1 30.1 29.9 28.6 26.3 22.4
22.7 22.7 22.7 20.8 18.9 16.5
22.6
15.4
AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC j;
25.5 29.3 30.1 30.1
16.3 18.3 20.0 21.4
f-
30.1b
22 7
Years on which Design Conditions based 1 990-201 2
i
Building Rotation
Conditions
«f
Latitude
33.9
Elevation (m)
39
Winter Design *CDB
)6.4
Winter Design ZBH
80.0
Daily Range *C
6.3
Min. leaving coil temp ‘C
;12
nifori
Critical
North
\
%
1£ it
24 hr
North Wall
Winter Warm Up X f
PLAN
]
I
20
[
f Ambient Design condition for Desiccant HCU's
| Design WB '22.7
Design XRH pO
giultiji
----------- Default Plant Operating Time
Shading Effectiveness
Start < l
Finish <
Shading Effectiveness----------
►
I
►
Equivalent Overhang
Include Adjacent Shading
Disable Load Calcs
l
Fig 3-20A The Project Tab Page When a Location is Selected.
Maps (See Clause 3-40)
To the left of the location drop down lists, when a location in Australia and New
Zealand (others will be included in future versions) is selected, a Maps button
appears. Selection of this button causes another screen to appear on which a
detailed map appears. Refer to the next clause 3-40.
24
I
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
Location # (See clause 3-30)
The weather location used to determine the hourly outside temperatures as well
as the latitude and elevation and therefore the hourly solar position and radiation.
The details of this entry and its alternatives are contained in clause 3-30.
Winter Warm Up %
For buildings with intermittently operated heating plants (e.g. office blocks) or with
dual temperature operation, additional heater or boiler capacity should be
provided if unduly long heating up periods are to be avoided. This Winter Warm
Up % is based on the winter outside to inside temperature. If left blank, the
default value shown in black is used. The details of how the default is calculated
and the modifications done during calculation are shown in clause 7-150.
Minimum Leaving Coil Temperature
This sets a minimum leaving coil temperature to apply to all AHU Coils. CAMEL
will use the value entered here or the value calculated using the by-pass factor
etc., whichever is higher (the default is 6.0 °C). Typical values are 8.0 for a DX
system and 12.0 for a chilled water system. It ensures that an impractical low
value is not used and ensures that the psychrometrics are calculated if the room
sensible heat factor line misses the saturation curve. The default value can be set
in the Project Defaults Screen under File in the Main Screen (refer clause 2-40).
The number of times it is used is printed in the results.
The allowable range is 5 to 20.
Default Plant Operating Times
This is a default for the plant operating times for all air handling units which can
be overwritten for individual AHUs on the AHU Screen. It is the First and Last time
for the calculations within each design day entered via a slide bar.
f.....
From the values that apply to each AHU, the Hours of operation (12 16 or 24
hours) for the purposes of determining the storage load factors are established by
the program. (Refer 7-140 for technical discussion)
For the Chiller, the operating time is taken as the extremes of all AHU operating
times that are connected to it.
Building Rotation
NORTH WALL
BUILDING
PLAN VIEW
j. bloggs &
ASSOCIATES
nsi S3 asdf23jfc
Fig 3-20B Site Plan with Building Rotation Angle of -24°
The rotation of the north (Building Nth) wall of the building with respect to true
north in either hemisphere. Clock-wise positive. This allows the building to be
readily rotated without having to change the azimuth angle for every surface. The
value entered here is added to the surface azimuth angles entered on the
zone/room External (walls and roofs) Tab Page.
The allowable range is -360 to 360 degrees.
Ambient Design Conditions for Dessicant HCU's
If the project has a desiccant humidity control unit, the ambient design conditions
used to determine the required capacity (kW) and moisture removal (g/kg) to
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
25
maintain the room %RH are entered here. Normally this will be a day with a high
moisture level.
Design WB
This is the ambient design wet bulb for estimating the capacities and moisture
removal of the desiccant humidity control units entered in the current project (on
the Preconditioner Screen or the AHU screen for individual AHUs). This and the
Design %RH must be entered if there are any Desiccant HCUs in the current
project. Range - within 2 degrees C of the maximum monthly 3pm design WB for
the location entered.
r
!
Design %RH
This is the ambient design percentage RH for estimating the capacities and
moisture removal of the desiccant humidity control units entered in the current
project (on the Preconditioner Screen or the AHU screen for individual AHUs).
This and the Design WB must be entered if there are any Desiccant HCUs in the
current project. Range 60 to 90
Default Button
If this button is selected, default values are inserted for the desiccant humidity
control units Design WB and Design %RH bulb. The default values are the
maximum 3pm monthly design WB for the location entered and 80 for the %RH
Shading Effectiveness
In this panel check boxes that control how the Window Shading Effectiveness and
Equivalent Overhang are calculated may be selected.
[
[
The shading effectiveness for the windows on each surface is:
1-
(the sum of the solar loads through the windows with shading^
(the sum of the solar loads through the windows with no shading)
over 24 hours for the three summer months (Dec, Jan, Feb in the Southern
Hemisphere and June, July, Aug in the Northern Hemisphere) expressed as a
percentage. Optionally, the program can also calculate the equivalent depth of an
overhang located at the top edge of the windows (with an extension to the left and
right the same as the overhang depth) that gives the same effectiveness as the
entered shading on each surface.
I
r
This, being based on load through the window, is an approximation to the
“percentage of summer solar radiation” in clause J2.5(b) of the BCA.
The window shading effectiveness results in CAMEL can therefore be used:
•
•
•
•
To evaluate the effectiveness of a particular shading device
To determine the equivalent overhang depth of the proposed shading
scheme(s) for entry into the BCA Glass Calculator to check compliance with
clause J2.5 (a), or
After determining the required overhang depth for compliance with clause
J2.5 (a) using the BCA Glass Calculator, and then adjust the proposed
shading scheme(s) until the equivalent overhang depth from CAMEL is
achieved
To ascertain if the shading effectiveness is greater than 80% for compliance
with clause J2.5 (b) of the BCA.
The checkbox items are:
□ Shading Effectiveness -this invokes the shading effectiveness calculations
□ Equivalent overhang - the program also calculates the equivalent overhang
depth
□ Include Adjacent Shading - include any adjacent shading in the
calculations
□ Disable Load Calcs- this causes only the shading effectiveness calculations
to be carried out, bypassing all the other load and psychrometric
calculations. This option is available because the calculation of the
equivalent overhang dimensions takes a considerably longer time.
26
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
3-30 Weather Location
The weather location used to determine the hourly outside temperatures as well
as the latitude and elevation and therefore the hourly solar position and radiation
may be selected directly for many Australian locations as well as several other
countries as detailed in the pull down list. Alternative entries allow the user to
define and / or re use previously entered monthly weather data or just enter 3 PM
summer design conditions all as described below.
Location #
This selects the data for the weather location to be used in the calculations.
Normally the Country or State is selected in the first list and the City or Town in
the second list. If it is known that the required location is not stored in the program
then the first three items of the first selection list may be used to enter alternative
weather data. The first three items of the first list comprises:
Enter 3pm Summer
User Defined Monthly
File
Details of entering weather data using these alternatives is detailed below (at the
end of this section) and shown in figs. 3-30A and B.
For locations for which the weather is stored in the program first select the
Country or Region or for Australia, the State or Territory from the first selection
list. (For South East Asia and the Pacific Islands the Country is in the second
selection list).
Australia - Australian Capital Cities
Australian Capital Territory to Western Australia - Australian States
China
New Zealand
Papua New Guinea
Pacific Islands - Vanuatu and the Solomon Islands
South East Asia - South East Asian Countries
Taiwan
Then select the city or town (or country) from the second selection list.
For locations in Capital Letters, the following data for the location selected is
displayed on the screen:• Monthly dry and wet bulb design temperatures used in the calculations and
depending on the design conditions (Comfort or Critical) selected.
• Latitude in degrees and Elevation metres.
• Winter design conditions - comfort only except for locations where 3 hourly
data is available in which case values for comfort and critical are available.
• Daily range (used to determine corrections to the 3PM summer design
temperatures at other hours of the day).
For locations in lower case lettering the same data is extracted except that:
• For New Zealand, the 3pm January outdoor summer temperatures and the
outdoor winter temperatures are the 1% or 2.5% values for summer cooling
and winter heating from the IHRACE Yearbook - 2006.
• For China and Taiwan the 3pm July outdoor dry and wet bulb temperatures
and the outdoor winter design temperatures are the outdoor design
temperatures for summer air conditioning and winter air conditioning from the
National Standard - Code for the Design of Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning GBJ 19-87.
The yearly range is then used with the corrections from Table 3 of DA9 to
calculate the monthly 3pm temperatures (June, July and August (S) or Dec, Jan
and Feb (N) not available). The daily range is used to calculate the hourly
variations at other times to 3pm.
[.
The latitude, elevation, winter design conditions and daily range may be
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
27
overridden by editing the values in the appropriate field.
AS an alternative to selecting the locations in the location lists the user can select
from the first three items of the first pull down list (Enter 3pm Summer, User
Defined Monthly or File). This alternative entry is detailed below (at the end of this
section) and shown in fig. 3-30A and B.
Design conditions based on climatic data before or after 1990
This is a selection for the years of climatic data that were used in determining the
ambient design conditions used by the program to calculate the cooling loads.
The selection is between “Prior to 1990” - used for all previous versions of
CAMEL up to Version 5.10.5 or “1990 to 2012/13”. For versions after 5.10.5
the design conditions have been recalculated using more recent climatic data.
The new data includes more locations but there are also locations where
recordings of climatic data has been discontinued and that is why the data
locations prior to 1990 have been retained in the program.
Years of climatic data used to calculate the design conditions
This is the actual range of years that the design conditions for the selected
location are based on.
The calculated design conditions does vary depending on the years of climatic
data used and there is no “correct” number of years that should be used. The
more years that are used the more “average” the values are. The less years used
the greater the possibility of specific hot or cold years or months increasing or
decreasing the calculated values.
Conditions
This allows the user to select between outdoor design conditions for Comfort or
for Critical process air conditioning.
If comfort conditions are chosen and a location is selected, the program uses the
lesser of the 3pm temperature not exceeded on 10 days per year (including one
standard deviation) and the monthly 3pm temperature not exceeded more than
once in two years (extracted from the MASTER.WEA file).
r
If critical conditions are chosen and a location is selected, the one day in 2 year
data is used for each month. For further discussion on this, refer Chapter 2 of
DA9.
Latitude #
The Latitude for the location. This value is extracted from the CAMEL weather file
(MASTER.WEA), but can be overwritten by the user. The allowable range is 0.0
to 50.0
South or North
A radio button to specify if the location is in the Southern or Northern Hemisphere.
Elevation
This is the elevation (in metres) of the building above sea level. By default (when
a location is selected) the program inserts the elevation of the Meteorological
Station where the temperature data was recorded. The elevation is used to
calculate the air density which affects the air quantities. The program also adds
2.3% per 1000m above sea level to the Peak Solar Heat gain figures which are
used by CAMEL to determine the solar heat gain through windows. Refer
footnote on Table 5, p25 of DA9 In addition CAMEL adjusts for the reduced air
density at higher elevations and this results in larger air flows to meet the same
cooling load.
Winter Design °CDB #
Ambient Winter design dry bulb temperature. Only used when a heating load is
required. This value is either:
28
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
I
New Zealand
For locations where sufficient data is available (Lower case letters in list) the dry bulb temperature below which the temperature only occurs for 1 % or
2.5% of the time, (1st May to 31st October) depending on whether Comfort or
Critical is entered and for 8-18 hr or 24 hr operation.
For other locations (Capital letters in list) - the 8am dry bulb temperature that
is not exceeded on average on 10 days per year, ie the value for Comfort air
conditioning with no distinction for hours of operation.
China and Taiwan
The outdoor design temperature for winter air conditioning determined from:
Tw = 0.30 Tm + 0.70Td
where:
Tm = Mean temperature of normal coldest month
Td = Mean temperature of normal coldest day
All Other Locations
For locations where 3 hourly data is available - the dry bulb temperature
below which the temperature only occurs for .25% of the plant operating
hours, 8-18 or 24 hrs for Critical operation. For Comfort it is the 8am dry
bulb temperature that is not exceeded on average on 10 days per year, ie the
value for Comfort air conditioning with no distinction for hours of operation.
For all other locations- the 8am dry bulb temperature that is not exceeded on
average on 10 days per year, ie the value for Comfort air conditioning with no
distinction for hours of operation.
In all cases the value displayed can be overwritten. Range is -25.0 to 25.0 °C.
r...
8-18 hr to 24 hr
A radio button to allow selection of plant operating hours upon which the outdoor
heating design temperature is based. This only applies to locations where data is
available, viz.
•
•
Most locations in New Zealand for Comfort or Critical applications.
Some locations in Australia and other S.E.Asian countries but for Critical
applications only, namely those where hourly data is available.
Winter Design %RH #
Ambient Winter design % relative humidity. Only entered when humidifier heating
load is required. This value is extracted from the CAMEL weather file
MASTER.WEA, but can be overwritten by the user.
Typically this value is 80% - (Refer DA9, p9). The allowable range is 10 to 100%
Daily Range °C #
This is the daily range which is the difference between the average daily
maximum and the average daily minimum dry bulb temperature in January (June
in the Northern Hemisphere). It is used in determining the hourly outdoor design
dry & wet bulb temperatures from the 3 pm design conditions (refer Table 2 in
DA9). This value is extracted from the CAMEL weather file, but can be overwritten
by the user. The allowable range is 5.0 to 30.0 °C.
Alternative Entry of Outdoor Design Conditions
Alternatively to selecting an actual location in the locations list the user can select
from the pull down list any of the first three items:-
L
Enter 3pm Summer - Where the user can enter the summer design conditions
(including daily and yearly range) to be used - note that with this selection no
cooling load is produced for the winter three months (because the Carrier
monthly corrections do not provide for the winter months) and the entered
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
29
data only applies to this job, ie the data is not permanently stored for future
use in other runs of CAMEL, Further description appears below.
This option can be used where data such as in the ASHRAE Fundamentals
is available for locations, outside Australia for example. The yearly range is
then used with the corrections from Table 3 of DA9 to calculate the monthly
3pm temperatures.
User Defined Monthly - This option allows the user to enter and permanently
save dry and wet bulb 3pm design temperatures and the daily range for each
month for any location (Edit/Add button to the right) or to select data
previously entered in this format by selecting the required location from the
second selection list. The program then uses the daily range to generate
hourly temperature variations from the entered 3pm values. Such data may
include data available from ASHRAE on the Fundamentals Handbook CD.
Further description appears below.
File - Allows the user to prepare their own weather data file. This file must
contain the monthly and hourly design dry and wet bulb temperatures. It is
an alternative that can be used when the user wishes to enter their own
hourly Dry Bulb and Wet Bulb temperatures. The format of the file is
illustrated in Appendix F. The name of the user’s weather file is prompted for
when ‘Calculate’ is selected.
Enter 3pm Summer
When “Enter 3pm Summer” is selected the Tab Page shown in Fig 3-30A
appears, however the values remain from the previously selected town/city and
v' 1 Description Port Hartog
Enter 3pm Summer
Location
r
[
I
i
f
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
38.5
38.5
DB
38.5
WB
2G.7 26.7 26.7 26.7 25.7
Summer Design *CDB
jms
Yearly Range *C
15.2
Latitude
31.3
Elevation (m)
liF
Winter Design *CDB
5.7
Winter Design %RH
81.0
Daily Range *C
|15.4
37.9
38.5
37.9
38.5
Summer Design *CWB :26.7
r ■ Building Rotation
?
'* South North
i
Winter Warm Up X :
Min. leaving coil temp *C
Fig. 3-30A
38.5
37.9
26.7 26.7 26.7 26.7
North Wall
PLAN
4H
[340
A Section of The Project Tab Page When “Enter 3pm Summer" is Selected
may or may not be appropriate. The items of input are then:Description
This is a description or title of the weather location that is listed in the Results in
the Project Summary.
Summer Design °CDB #
3 PM summer (January in the Southern Hemisphere, July in the Northern
Hemisphere) ambient dry bulb design temperature. The entered yearly range is
used to determine the values for other months.
The allowable range is 10.0 to 50.0 °C
Summer Design °CWB#
3 pm summer ambient wet bulb design temperature.
30
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
|
The allowable range is 10.0 to 50.0 °C.
Yearly Range °C #
The yearly temperature range usually taken as the difference between the 3 pm
summer design dry bulb temperature and the 8am winter dry bulb temperature. It
is used for estimating the shift in 3 pm temperatures month to month.
The allowable range is 0.0 to 68.0 °C.
The other items, ( Latitude, Elevation, Winter Design DBC and RH and Daily
Range) must be entered by the user and are as described above in the Tab Page
where the location is selected.
User Defined Monthly
This option allows the user to enter dry and wet bulb 3pm design temperatures
and the daily range for each month for any location. The program then uses the
daily range to generate hourly temperature variations from the entered 3pm
values. Such data may include data available from ASHRAE. The data once
entered can also be stored for future reference.
The data for the selected location is displayed on screen but cannot be edited.
Data for a previously entered (and saved) location may be called up by selecting
from the second Location selection list.
jEdil/ASS ]|
The Edit/Add button displays the User Monthly Design Conditions form
where the user can edit and re-save the user entered design conditions data for
the selected location or add or delete a location
Location
| User Defined Monthly T] |Kronkfite)
Edit/Add
JUL
FEB
AUG SEP OCT
MAY JUN
MAR APR
JAN
NOV DEC
35. G 36.G 35.G 34.G 30.2
31.6
30.2 31. G 32. G 33. G 34. G|35. G
20.9 21.G 22.2
19.7 20.2
18.5 18.5
20.5 19. G
21.5
23.2 22.1
WB
9.8
10.2 10.1
10.3
11.5
12.7
9.9 10,2 10.5
9,9
9.9
9.2
DRanq
DB
3
i
Latitude
i
Elevation (m)
Winter Design *CDB
Winter Warm Up X \
North Wall
Winter Design XRH
Min. leaving coil ternp *C
Fig. 3-30B
PLAN
340
A Section Of The Project Tab Page When “User Defined Monthly” is Selected
User Defined Monthly Design Conditions form
On this form User defined design conditions for any location can be entered
and/or edited. To assist with inputing data already saved locations can be copied
or load data for a CAMEL location which has design data permanently stored in
the program.
The Buttons on the Tool bar are:
sa
Close - exits this screen
Save User Data - Saves the current data on screen for use in other CAMEL runs.
S3 Delete Data - Deletes the currently selected location and data from the Users
Monthly Design Conditions file
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
31
r
IS HiK) +!©i ?
Load CAMEL
Design Conditions
I ncation
Apply ;
Copy data from: i
glim
I
'iflii
lift
afl.'tl
Daily Range
Latitude
?<,;
i“
.n,
"i5
i ll 1
i I.
1 ■: d
id t,
10.5 10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
10.5
>
?i
10.5
o
Of .O
id./
If]
Critical
8G071
‘
0
,-s
JW
ill 1
:r
___ I i
WMO
Melbourne ■+■ 1CDB +1CWB
4
VI * '
^MELBOURNE REGIONAL OFFICE
Aust. Capital Cities
3
"i r» &
10.5
:•
If
10.5
n
10.5
t..
;;
10.5:
10.5
j
North
Elevation fmj ,112
Winter Design *CDB
Winter Design XRH >SU.O
Fig. 3-30C
User Monthly Design Conditions Form
m Add New Location - clears the current data ready to add data for a new location.
r
»
i
Once the data for this new location is entered it can be saved for future use
and/or Applied (transferred) to the Project Tab Page. If the Apply button is
selected without Saving, the data for this location will only be available for the
current CAMEL project.
©
Validate - Performs a data check turning red if there is any missing mandatory
items. Clicking on the red face will provide a list of the errors.
n Help button for this form
r"
Apply
After the data for a selected location has been edited, clicking this button will
transfer the data to the Project Tab Page.
Copy data fro®: l
V
Copy Data from selection list - allows
selection of an existing user defined location to copy data into the data fields
ready to modify and save as another location
i Copy Data - copies the data for the location selected on the ‘Copy Data from
selection list, into the fields on the User Monthly Design Conditions form.
Load CAMEL
Design Conditions
Aust. Capital Cities
33]MELBOURNE REGIONAL OFFICE
Critical
To assist with inputing data, the user can load data for an existing CAMEL
location for which data is permanently stored in the program. Once a location is
selected, (either comfort or critical) the 3pm CDB, 3pm CWB and Daily Range
values are inserted in the table below by hitting the Copy data button to the right of
the selection list. The individual values can then be modified as required. For
details of the location selection list see 3-30 above.
.T=l Copy Data -Copies (inserts) the 3pm CDB, 3pm CWB and Daily Range values
for the selected CAMEL location into the table below. The individual values can
then be modified as required
The items of input data on this form are:
Location for Design Monthly Conditions
This is a location name to identify the set of monthly design conditions.
WMO
The World Meteorological Number for the particular location. This is optional data.
32
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
3pm CDB
The user defined ambient 3pm design dry bulb temperature for each month.
3pm CWB
I
The user defined ambient 3pm design wet bulb temperature for each month.
Daily Range
The user defined daily range for each month. This is used to generate a daily dry
and wet bulb temperature profile using the corrections from Table 2 of DA9.
Latitude
The latitude of the User defined location.
Winter Design CDB
The user defined 9am winter ambient design dry bulb temperature.
Winter Design RH
Tho user defined 9am winter ambient relative humidity.
3-40 The Map Screen
r..
On this screen a map of Australia or New Zealand is displayed showing all the
locations where climatic data is available for CAMEL. When an Australian location
is selected on the Project Screen, a map of an area of Australia around the
selected location is displayed - The whole of Australia cannot be seen on one
map. Other maps may be added later.
The Mouse Operations
Zooming - Left and right clicking the mouse anywhere on the map (except on a
location name) causes the map to zoom in or out respectively. Alternatively the
Zoom Bar on the control panel can be used
Displaying the Design Conditions - If the cursor is moved to over a green
(before 1990) or red (after 1990) location name, the Critical January or annual
Comfort design dry bulb and wet bulb temperature (depending on the Radio
Button selected) are displayed as a Tool Tip to enable easy comparison with other
locations or comparison of the pre-1990 versus after 1990 data..
Selecting a Location - If the mouse is right clicked on a location name, this
location name is displayed together with the monthly design dry and wet bulb
temperature in the control panel on the left of the screen. The colour of the
location name is changed to blue (NZ red) to indicate that it is the current selected
location. Selecting Apply will then return to the Project Screen with this selected
location.
The map also moves such that the selected location is at the centre of the screen.
Panning - The mouse can be used to pan the map by clicking and dragging the
left button.
I.
L
L
The Control Panel for the Map
On the left of the screen is a control panel with:
• A zoom bar to zoom the viewing window (left and right mouse click will also
zoom).
• On the Australian map a series of check boxes to enable roads, railway lines,
rivers, lakes, mountains (contours), towns, and/or urban areas to be displayed
on the map. On the NZ map two check boxes which allow the weather location
dots and text to be displayed or not.
• On the Australian map two radio buttons to select between the locations
where design conditions are based on climatic data recordings prior to 1990
and after and including 1990.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
33
ipJAUSTSAUA;
ioora
b±i
'I
JLJ&
i
Drp!'«
W
i
Ji ' r
* ■
s
- ■
s
t
©
♦ 1990
after
Qsel'ctecti_____ _ _
[MELBOURNE
R.orj-j
‘sN.yofV \
„X\.
Cored ban:
t« Comfort i* Critical
JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
€
i
DB 1WB |
34.3 20.51
i
©
j
34.3 20.5i
L
r
©
)X
fc''-.
7i:®
Cr,
)
X '\
_
/
«>•'
©;
^'
\
33.7 20.51
29.1
19.1!
24 7 15 6'
18.3 13.4 i
19.3 12.8I
22.3
13.3]
23.5 15.9I
30.8 18.11
NOV 34.3 T9.6(
DEC 34.3 20.5!
u f d 3
P
-!-J U - '
Locations Displayed
k
P
\,
P *\K>V <
i" ASHRAE
e
©
©
P-_
Close | O [ Apph1 [
•S
©
Fig. 3-40A The Map Screen showing Bairnsdale Victoria
® A drop down list for selecting a particular location. On this list typing a letter
finds the next location starting with that letter. When a location is selected the
program scrolls this to the centre of the viewing window. For Australia the list
contains the locations according to whether before or after 1990 has been
selected.
® A check box for Comfort or Critical conditions to be displayed.
® The monthly 3pm dry bulb and wet bulb design temperatures.
• Close - closes the map screen without changing the current location selected
on the Project Screen.
• Help - Help on this screen.
• Apply - closes the map screen changing the current location selected on the
Project Screen to that currently selected in the Map Screen.
• Three check boxes (Australia Only) to display either:Before 1990 the locations where the design conditions are based on
climatic data prior to 1990,
the locations where the design conditions are based on
After 1990
climatic data after and including 1990,
ASHRAE
the locations where ASHRAE have design conditions
available.
The Before and After 1990 monthly design conditions are stored in the
program. If the cursor is left on any location name on the map, the
January (Comfort or Critical) design conditions will be displayed in a tool
tip. Right clicking the mouse will cause the location to be selected in the
selection list where the design conditions for each month can be viewed.
•
34
The ASHRAE design conditions are not available in the program and must be
obtained from ASHRAE (on CD) and entered under the Location “user Defined
Monthly” on the Project Tab page. Once entered these can be stored for future
use to save having to re-enter the data.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
i
f
L...
3-50
The Schedules Tab Page
These are schedules for people, lights and equipment loads (sensible, latent or
steam). They are cross referenced from the internal loads tab page where any
schedule can be applied to any load. A schedule is not required for any load that
is on during all of the plant operating hours. (Refer Fig 3-50A)
In the centre portion of the Tab Page the profiles are entered as percentage of full
load at the various times on a 24 hour clock throughout the day.
The plant operating hours are indicated by the red bar, and in the calculations
CAMEL ignores any values outside this time.
In the top portion of the Tab Page a graphic of the current schedule is displayed.
In the lower portion of the Tab Page profiles can be stored for future use. To do
this the cursor is set on the required schedule in the middle of the Tab Page, the
number of the stored profile (from 1 to 6) is selected from the drop down list and
then the Store Profile button is pressed.
■gi *l xMial Oj ,l.J
. .. .'i-LTI-l. :
Losii fisting Schsd'-te; j
Schedules
.
-i;:.:* I . . n ; .
i-:-
i■ -i;:-.i
i:
f
1:
I
........... Ho ji zl :
MBWI' PfentIH mM
1—I
. 40:100.100 100. I?n 60 100 100 100 100
PEOPLE
• o0 too ioo m loo-loo ico-ioo 100 100 10 10 10 10 10- jo 10 lights
5 5 5 60 100 100 1U0 100 100 100 100 100 40 40' 40- 40 40 40 40 EQUIPMENT
I
4
r
i
gi
l
I
<k
10)
I
1
■i. . .r
PEOPLE
2
-4....... H.....
.r-f-
L,:.
:>
|
1 isstauranl
:□;
PEOPLE
[blank
Fig 3-50A The Schedules Tab Page
To use a stored profile place the cursor on the row where the particular schedule
is to be inserted and then click on one of the six stored profiles in the lower
portion of the Tab Page.
Schedules can also be copied and pasted or deleted using the toolbar buttons.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
35
3-60 The Shading Tab Page
Shading devices comprising any combination of overhang, overhang drop and/or
reveals are entered here and referred to in any zone (in the External Tab Page) by
its scheme title. Shading schemes are applied to any entered external wall
(surface) and/or any window, or group of windows on that surface by reference to
the appropriate shading scheme title. For example a wall can have an overhang
(or shading scheme) as well as a window in that wall having another different
shading scheme. The program calculates the combined effects of both shading
schemes on both the wall and the windows in the wall. Refer also to the figures in
clause 7-90.
Each shading device is treated as a surface with zero thickness. The convention
for shading dimensions is as viewed from the outside looking in.
To help the user get the dimensions of the shades correct, a graphical display is
provided for each shading scheme. It can be rotated in 3D by clicking and
dragging the mouse over a particular graphic. This is not drawn to scale (because
each shading scheme can be applied to different windows) but indicates if for
example a reveal is to the left or to the right of the window edge.
r
Under Preview the user can selectively turn on the display of the:• Overhangs
® Reveals
• Transparent (wire frame) reveals and overhangs or solid, except if the relevant
factor has been entered they are shown hatched.
The colours, as displayed on the Tab Page, of the windows and shades
_ay aj xj^jai ©j ?i
Schedules
FlllJClt
Shading
Windows
Walls
Chillci. Boiler X <1
|
I—— Preview —...........
j p Overhangs
Click column number to display where shading is used
(■
j p Reveals
j W Transparent
r"
i
:| Drag mouse on
i graphic to rotate
| right click to restore
j
f
ir
i
AJ! Dimensions in mm
Scheme Title
OVERHANG Depth
Distance
Lett Side
Right Side
Gap
Factor
DROP Depth
Drop Factor
LEFT REVEAL
Depth
Distance
I UlTlil
RFV
mini
l Hiring
HIMll
HltUi
Hhrin'
i him
Hillhl!
.Minn
-nun
imiun
Oiiuij!:
him
I'll)1!
limn
i mm
mu
:hi)
i
!
.mu
Gap
Top
Bottom
Factor
RIGHT REVEAL
Depth
Distance
i mi
Gap
T op
Bottom
Factor
ROTATIONS
Overhang
Drop
Left Ri’vsmI
mu
Right Ri-vji.iI
;u
i
i
;tm
'in
jii
►
Fig 3-60A
36
The Shading Scheme Tab Page
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
(overhangs and reveals) can be set under ‘Configuration’ on the MAIN Screen
Menu Bar.
A row of windows on a surface can be entered as a series of individual windows
or as a group and thought should be given to the best way of modelling the
shading if overhangs project either side of each individual window (if they are
spaced) or outside each end (if they are continuous).
Note that in this Tab Page the = sign causes the next non blank field to the left to
be copied into the field where the cursor is currently located. Copy and paste can
also be used to copy from one shading scheme (column) to another.
CAMEL provides for up to 99 shading schemes.
Clause 7-90 of this User Guide describes how the shading calculations are
performed in CAMEL.
If the column number for a particular shading scheme is selected with the mouse,
a Shading Useage Form (Fig. 3-60D) appears displaying the AHU, Zone and
Room title together with the External surface number and exposure of each
surface that has this shading scheme on the window or wall.
Following is a description of each item on the Shading Tab Page. Note all
dimensions are in mm.
Scheme Title
A unique shading scheme identifier consisting of any 10 letters or numbers used
to identify the shading scheme. This is cross referenced in the External Tab Page
for each zone where the selected SCHEME is applied to a particular wall, roof or
window. It is advisable to use a meaningful descriptor preferably not associated
with an orientation (e.g. OVERHANGA, REVEAL1, rather than S1, S2 etc.),
especially if there are a large number of shading schemes in a particular job.
OVERHANG
Depth
Gap
Drop Depth
■
i
!
i
;_e:l
r44
§
i
1
«
I
Distance
I
s
i
Right Side
Fig 3-60B Overhang Dimensions
Depth
The depth of the overhang from the edge nearest to the wall or window along the
overhang to the edge furtherest away from the wall or window.
Distance
The distance, parallel to the wall or window, from the top of the wall or window to
the inner edge of the overhang.
L
L
L
Left Side
The distance the rear edge overhang projects past the left side of the surface or
window. If infinite in length enter 99999.
Right Side
The distance the rear edge overhang projects past the right side of the surface or
window. If infinite in length enter 99999.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
37
i
Gap
The perpendicular distance from the plane of the wall or window to the inner edge
of the overhang. Default, blank no gap.
Factor
The transmission factor for the overhang ie. solar gain transmitted divided by the
incident solar gain: 1.0 = totally transparent Default = 0.0 (opaque). This can
only be entered if an overhang depth is entered.
DROP
i
Drop Depth
The distance from the outer edge of the overhang to the bottom edge of the
overhang drop panel. A negative drop turns it into an upstand.
Drop Factor
The transmission factor for the drop panel ie. solar gain transmitted divided by the
incident solar gain: 1.0 = totally transparent Default = 0.0 (opaque). A negative
drop and a negative distance allows for modelling of balconies. (Refer Fig. 7-90C)
Depth
Distance
f
RIGHT
jtt Gap
-ml
>•*
t
■all
Top
[
t
t
1
■
■
i
1
s
um
LEFT
Bottom
Distance
Fig 3-60C Reveal Dimensions
LEFT REVEAL
f"
A Reveal (or Fin) is any projection on the left hand side of the window. Left is
when facing the window from the outside.
Depth
The depth of the reveal from the edge nearest to the wall or window along the
reveal to the edge furtherest away from the wall or window.
Distance
The distance, parallel to the wall or window, between the inner edge of the reveal
and the edge of the wail or window.
Gap
The perpendicular distance from the plane of the wall or window to the inner edge
of the reveal. Default, blank no gap
Top
The distance the reveal projects above the top of the surface or window. If infinite
in length enter 99999. If negative, the reveal will finish below the top of the
window but it must not finish below the bottom of the reveal.
Bottom
The distance the bottom of the reveal is above the bottom of the surface or the
window (or below if negative).
38
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
l
Factor
The transmission factor for the reveal if partially transparent i.e. solar gain
transmitted divided by the incident solar gain. 1.0 = totally transparent Default =
0.0 (opaque). This can only be entered if a reveal depth is entered. [0.0 to 1.0]
RIGHT REVEAL - As for LEFT REVEAL
ROTATIONS
Drop
Angle
Overhang
>TT sj
Left Reveal
Angle^ot
Right Reveal
=%. Angle
lx
Plan View
Side Elevation
a
Overhang
This is the angle of the overhang from the normal to the wall or window positive
upwards rotation, (default 0.0 - horizontal) [-90 to +90]
Drop
This is the angle of the drop to the overhang, positive outwards eg. 90 deg is
parallel to and in line with the overhang, (default 0.0 - at right angles to the
overhang) [-90 to +180]
Left Reveal
This is the angle of the left reveal about the axis formed by the height of the wall
or window to the normal to the wall or window, eg 45 deg is splayed outwards to
the left when looking at the surface (default 0.0 - projecting normal to the external
surface) [-90 to +90]
Right Reveal
This is the angle of the right reveal about the axis formed by the height of the wall
or window to the normal to the wall or window, eg 45 deg is splayed outwards to
the right when looking at the surface (default 0.0 - projecting normal to the
external surface) [-90 to +90]
Usage of Shading
This form appears when the column number for a particular Shading Scheme in
the Shading Screen is selected with the mouse. It displays a list of the external
surface numbers in each room where the selected shading scheme is used on
windows and/or walls.
|
I
muTm
t
L
L.
I
□V
1
• r »
r
«|iUM
JXi iff
■MMiV
y,v! >.
rttut
; i !-*.) ji
i
1 •"!
«,*•; I •; I
*i
1f
NO(‘,r
:■
'I
i :
Ui-.i-i.:
REV
>
s t:
!
[: 3€
i
x
f
1
I !'%|i
/ ■ i ..
•It
.*! f
J:
»
1,*
■
*.»
;:;.v
.V
{
fluir.':
;c
li:
' \t
11
Fig 3-60D Usage of Shading Form
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
39
i
3-70 The Windows Tab Page
Data in the upper pane! on this screen is used in the calculations. Data in the lower panel [below Glass Number) is optional and is only to
assist users with selection of appropriate values in the upper pane!. The Glass Number is also used in BEAVER and is inserted in the
Beaver LOADS data when 'loading' a CAMEL file.
■
l«irm! i
Miii:1
llrirpi! Irniiij
SlJlIl
.-vtjn
l / Hi !
■Mill
mi
V/hjiIi Lim:h|
Ltf|()l]
'Ill'll
rlJllDI!
.'.■linn
' V It'n lii* .* I VI»*‘
8
f. f'A
■ I;
Frame S.Fact
fiiin tlfin
lrit< rri-.l ‘#»i. »i..nj
i»rri.j
u
/
hw
!i /ii
.-'J
0.3-i
ll!».:
i'» b •
1 1/
i l /
NO
1/
Nil
i.v
i
i if
:.'o
YES
Glo ilu
I
.*/nii
.jfiim
fj;
1 I.
{.
‘‘•OR :
..!
b 94
Q.66
ti, if1
/
i I
I >0
1J
■
c
Frame U Value Corr'n
§' «
double click
to toggle
double click
to transfer U
Value or
Shade Factor
to aboye
c
Wmkj
[
1.1.
p Modified Storage Load Factor
Fig 3-70A The Windows (type) Tab Page
On this Tab Page each different window (or skylight) type is entered, such that it
can be cross referenced by its type on any external surface on any zone (in the
External Tab Page). If there are a number of windows that abut each other it is
usually preferable to enter them collectively as a single window. For each window
all of the first seven items must be entered.
Below this is optional input, when the user wishes to use stored information about
different glass types to establish the U value and Shade Factor to be used. The
Glass No is also used in BEAVER. The user can then use this data to help
determine an appropriate U value and Shade Factor to be used in the
calculations. Right clicking the mouse on the Glass No. displays a selection of
“standard” glass types and user defined glass types with properties that are stored
in the program.
i
CAMEL will handle up to 99 window types
Note that in this Tab Page the = sign causes the next non blank field to the left to
be copied into the field where the cursor is currently located.
Copy and paste can also be used to copy from one column to another.
If the column number for a particular window is selected with the mouse, a
Window Useage Form (Fig. 3-70B) appears displaying AHU, Zone and Room title
together with the External surface number and exposure of each surface that
contains this Window
The dew point and altitude (elevation) correction is computed automatically by the
program. (AIRAH Application Manual DA9, Table 5)
r
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page.
Type #
Up to 10 characters to identify the window type eg. SINGL for a single glazed
window. This is cross referenced in the External Tab Page of each zone where
one or a number of any one window type can be specified in a particular wall or if
it is a skylight in a particular roof.
Height#
Height of window (including frame) in mm.
Width #
Width of window (or block of windows) including frame in mm.
40
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
U-value #
Overall summer heat transmission coefficient (W/m2 °C ) - U value of the window
including the frame. U values for the winter heating loads are computed from
the summer values. Typical values from the AIRAH Application Manual DA9,
Table 36 (U-values for Windows and Skylights) are:Air Space U Value
5.89
Single
Double
Double
Double
Double
Horizontal
Horizontal
5
10
15
20-100
5
3.35
3.15
2.97
2.89
4.88
2.84
These values are however, generic clear glass values, and are not representative
of the wide range of glass types that are now available.
Alternatively the U-value for specific glass types can be obtained from the glass
manufacturer but be aware that glass manufacturers generally quote the U-value
based on the (ASHRAE) NFRC winter conditions which are not appropriate for
cooling load calculations, (see below)
Note also that these U values are Centre of Glass values (ie they ignore the
frame) and may need adjustment to allow for the frame. The total window U value
can be obtained by running the LBNL WINDOW 5 or the U Value of a particular
window including the frame can be approximated by applying the adjustment
factors in the tables included in the section below titled Frame U Value Correction
to the Centre of Glass values.
Alternatively, if a Glass No is selected and a Frame U value correction is entered
and then either of the U values displayed below the Glass No is double clicked,
the program multiplies this U value by the entered correction factor to give the
total window U value on row 4 and this value is then used by CAMEL.
These Glass Nos. reference a number of commonly available and user defined
glass types that are stored in the program with the glass manufacturers NFRC Uvalue listed together with a suggested summer U-value for use in CAMEL (and for
compatibility with the ACADS-BSG energy simulation program BEAVER which
also uses these glass types).
These suggested U-values were calculated using the LBL WINDOW 5.2 program
using the following environmental conditions in the AIRAH Application Manual
DA9:
Inside air velocity 1.0 m/s
Outside Convection Coefficient 19.7 W/m2.K corresponding to a wind velocity of
2.5m/s in the table on page 38 of DA9
and the following additional assumed conditions required by the WINDOW 5.2 program:
Inside air and effective room temperature 24 deg C
Effective Room and sky Emissivity 1.00
Outside air temperature 35.0 deg C
Effective sky temperature 35.0 deg C
Direct Solar Radiation 783.0 W/ m2
Note however that these U values are Centre of Glass values (ie they ignore the
frame) and may need adjustment to allow for the frame.
[0.001 to 100.0]
NFRC U-value and Shade Coefficient.
The NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council in Maryland USA) conditions are
reference values used by glass manufacturers for comparing glass types and
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
41
when listing their glass properties. They are also used in the LBL WINDOW 5
program where properties of glasses and windows can be calculated.
There are two sets of NFRC conditions one for summer and one for winter. For
CAMEL the entered U-value and Shade Coefficient are assumed to be at the
conditions at the time of peak load - generally taken as the summer design
conditions. The standard NFRC figures generally quoted by the glass
manufacturers are the winter conditions for the U-value and the summer
conditions for the shade coefficient.
r
l
The main factors that differ from the generally used DA9 values as used in
CAMEL are:Summer Winter
DA9
Outside Temperature °C
Inside Temperature °C
Outside Wind Velocity m/s
Inside Air Velocity m/s
-17.8
32
24
2.8
0.0
21
5.5
0.0
Not Stated
24
2.5
1.0
The most significant variable is the inside wind speed can only be estimated by
the user.
The appropriate U-value and Shade coefficient that should be used depend on
the prevailing conditions at the building site on the particular facade at each hour
of the design day as well as the inside air movement. It is more than possible that
the standard NFRC U-value and Shade coefficient (and indeed those from DA9)
bare little resemblance to the conditions prevailing at the actual window site.
£...
Shade Factor #
Overall shade factor for solar gain through glass. When there are internal
Venetians or curtains on the window, this is the Shade Factor for the glass
multiplied by the Interior Solar Attenuation Factor (refer ASHRAE Fundamentals
2005 p31.47). Typical values of approximate overall solar factor with and without
internal Venetians, extracted from the AIRAH Application Manual DA9 Table 18
are:
No
Inside Blinds
Shade Light Med Dark
Reference Glass (3mm clear)
Plate glass (6mm clear)
0.94
0.56
0.56
0.65
0.65
0.75
0.74
Heat Absorbing Glass
40-48% absorbing
48-56% absorbing
56-70% absorbing
0.80
0.73
0.62
0.56
0.53
0.51
0.62
0.59
0.54
0.72
0.62
0.56
1.00
Actual values of Shade Coefficient for the glass being used should be obtained
from the manufacturer (if possible) or calculated since they can vary greatly for
apparently similar glasses. They are a function of the Glass to Window area and
the type of frame.
If the user selects a Shade Coefficient from the lower panel (under Glass No) on
the Windows Screen, these values are Centre of Glass values and should be
adjusted accordingly via the Frame Shade Factor Correction
Be aware that the NFRC conditions (used by manufacturers and available in the
WINDOW5 program) are reference conditions and are not necessarily the
conditions used for design.(see above)
The allowable range is 0.0 to 1.5
Frame S. Fact Correction
A correction factor to the shade factor for the window frame. If the entered Shade
Factor is based on the Centre of Glass value then a correction factor should be
applied to allow for the type of window frame and the area of the frame. If the
entered Shade Factor includes an allowance for the frame then the Frame Shade
Factor Correction should be entered as 1.0
The WINDOWS program from the LBNL (Lawrence Berkley National
42
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
iw..
L
Laboratories) can be used to calculate the shade coefficient for the window
without the frame (Centre of Glass value) or with the frame. The suggested
Shade Coefficients that are displayed in CAMEL when the Glass Number is
selected are the Centre of Glass values. In CAMEL then the full area of the
window can be entered and the calculated shade coefficient including the
particular frame can be entered with a Sash Correction of 1.0 or alternatively the
centre of glass values can be used and a correction for the frame made via the
Frame Shade Factor Correction.
The storage load factors used in the Carrier method have inbuilt, a correction for
wooden frames assuming that the actual glass area is approximately 85% of the
entered window or sash area. (p38 of DA9). Hence if the glass area is 85% of the
sash area and the frames are wooden or similar low U value, then the Sash
correction is 1.0 (corresponding to a frame to Glass U value ratio of 0.4 for single
glazing and 0.5 to 1.0 for double glazing in the table below).
For other than wooden or low U value frames, the shade Coefficient varies with
the glass to sash area ratio AND the conductivity of the frame such that when the
U value of the frame is much higher than the glass the Shade Coefficient for the
window approaches the Centre of Glass value divided by 0.85. The following
tables (derived from results of the WINDOW5 program for a range of glass
types), provide typical Frame Shade Factor Corrections for the Centre of Glass
values.
% Glass
Area 0.4
95
90
80
70
60
0.6
1.09
1.05
0.93
0.81
0.60
U value of Frame / Centre of Glass U value
1.2
1.0
0.8
1.4
1.6
1.10
1.07
0.96
0.85
0.67
1.11
1.08
0.99
0.90
0.74
1.12
1.10
1.02
0.94
0.80
1.13
1.11
1.05
0.98
0.87
1.14
1.12
1.07
1.03
0.94
1.15
1.14
1.10
1.07
1.00
1.8 2.0
1.16
1.15
1.13
1.11
1.07
1.17
1.17
1.16
1.15
1.14
Table of Typical Frame Shade Factor Corrections for Single Glazed Windows
% Glass
Area
95
90
80
70
60
U value of Frame / Centre of Glass U value
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.5
6.0
1.28
1.26
1.20
1.19
1.17
1.31
1.30
1.26
1.27
1.29
1.13
1.09
0.94
0.82
0.61
1.15
1.11
0.97
0.86
0.67
1.18
1.15
1.03
0.94
0.80
1.21
1.19
1.08
1.02
0.92
1.25
1.22
1.14
1.11
1.05
Table of Typical Frame Shade Factor Corrections for Double Glazed Windows
Typical frame U Values (W/m2C) (from WINDOW5) are:
ASHRAE Wood
ASHRAE Aluminium Flush
ASHRAE Aluminium with break
ASHRAE Aluminium with no break
2.27
3.97
5.68
10.79
In Australia, no break frames are usually used by window frame suppliers so that
the correction factors at the right hand end of the above table usually apply.
[0.0 to 2.0]
Internal Shading #
Used to indicate whether the window has internal blinds or curtains or not. This is
used in determining the storage load factors for the glass. It determines how
much of the solar gain that penetrates the window is a convective load and how
much is absorbed by the building structure and emerges as a delayed heat load.
Refer Table 10 p 30 of DAO. A value is not required for skylights.
F '
Glass Number
This is the glass number from a standard list of glass types or a list of user
defined glass types in CAMEL. Right clicking with the mouse displays the Glass
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
43
Selection form where the user can select either a standard glass number or a
User Defined glass number.(Refer Clause 3-70) With the standard list, the NFRC
winter U value and NFRC summer Shading Coefficient (manufacturers data) and
suggested U values and Shading Coefficients for use in CAMEL are displayed.
Provision is also made for users to add glass types to enable the U value and
Shading Coefficient for these to also be stored.
These standard and user defined glass types are also used by BEAVER the
ACADS-BSG building energy simulation program where more detailed information
about the glass properties is required
f.....
U Value for BEAVER
For the selected Glass Number, this is the NFRC Winter U-Value if the Glass No
has been selected from the Master Glass Types or the user entered U-Value
(entered in BEAVER) if it has been selected from the User Data Glass Types.
Double left clicking the mouse inserts the displayed value multiplied by the frame
U value correction (if entered) into the U-Value field in the upper panel
t.
U Value for CAMEL
For the selected Glass Number, this is a suggested U-Value if the Glass No has
been selected from the Master Glass Types or a user entered U Value if it has
been selected from the User Data Glass Types. Double left clicking the mouse
inserts the displayed value multiplied by the frame U value correction (if entered)
into the U Value field in the upper panel.
Shade Coefficient for BEAVER
For the selected Glass Number, this is the NFRC Summer Shade Coefficient if
the Glass No. has been selected from the Master Glass Types or the user
entered Shade Coefficient (entered in BEAVER) if it has been selected from the
User Data Glass Types. Double left clicking the mouse inserts the displayed
value multiplied by the Interior Solar Attenuation Coefficient into the Shade Factor
field in the upper panel.
Shade Coefficient for CAMEL
For the selected Glass Number, this is a suggested Shade Coefficient if the Glass
No has been selected from the Master Glass Types or a user entered Shade
Coefficient if it has been selected from the User Data Glass Types. Double left
clicking the mouse inserts the displayed value multiplied by the Int Solar Att Coeff.
into the Shade Factor field in the upper panel.
Interior Solar Attenuation Coefficient
Note a value may only be entered if the Internal Shading for this window has been
set to YES. The interior solar attenuation coefficient represents the effect of the
inside shading device only. A value of zero indicates the device is completely
opaque and 1.0 (the default) indicates no shading device is present. It is a
function of the glass type. For further information refer ASHRAE Fundamentals
2005 p31.47. If a value is entered here and a glass number has been entered,
when the right mouse is clicked on either the NFRC winter Shade Coefficient or
the Shade Coefficient for CAMEL a value equal to the selected glass shade
coefficient x the interior solar attenuation coefficient is inserted in the Shade
Factor. [0.0 to 1.0]
Frame U Value Correction
The window U value (on the fourth row) should include the effect of the frame.
The Frame U Value Correction is a correction to the U value (to allow for the
effect of the window frame) when applying the value listed below the Glass
Number.
Once a Glass Number is selected a U Value for BEAVER and a U Value for
CAMEL is displayed. Double clicking the left mouse button on either of these
values will insert the selected U value multiplied by the Frame U Value Correction
(default 1.0) into the field on the fourth row. This value is then used in the
44
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
i
t
calculations by CAMEL,
!
Explanation of Frame U Value Correction
When obtaining data from a glass manufacturer, they will usually quote the winter
U value in accordance with the ASHRAE NFRC reference conditions which is not
necessarily the figure you use for design. What is required for CAMEL is the U
value for summer based on typical design conditions. The glass manufacturers
should be able to give you the centre of glass NFRC summer value but this needs
to be modified to reflect the design conditions (eg. those quoted in DA9) and also
the effect of the frame. To do this you can run the LBNL WINDOW5 program.
Alternatively you can select a Glass Number and then select the corresponding
"suggested U value for CAMEL" (which is based on the AIRAH DA9
environmental conditions) and then enter a frame correction from the table below.
Then if you double click on the U value for CAMEL, the program multiplies this
value by the entered Frame correction and inserts the resultant value under Uvalue on the fourth row. This value is then used in the calculations.
% Glass
Area
95
90
80
70
60
0.4
0.95
0.93
0.86
0.79
0.67
U value of Frame / Centre of Glass U value
1.2
0.8
0.6
1.4
1.0
1.6
0.97
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.77
0.98
0.97
0.95
0.92
0.87
1.00
0.99
0.99
0.98
0.96
1.01
1.01
1.03
1.04
1.06
1.03
1.04
1.08
1.10
1.16
1.04
1.06
1.12
1.17
1.26
1.8
2.0
1.06 1.07
1.08 1.10
1.17 1.21
1.23 1.29
1.35 1.45
Table of Typical U value Correction for Single Glazing
% Glass
Area
95
90
80
70
60
0.5
U value of Frame / Centre of Glass U value
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.98
1.03
1.01
1.01
0.92
1.00
1.06
1.11
1.16
1.17
1.04
1.12
1.31
1.46
1.65
1.08
1.19
1.51
1.75
2.14
1.12
1.25
1.70
2.05
2.62
1.16
1.32
1.90
2.35
3.11
1.20
1.38
2.10
2.64
3.60
Table of Typical U value Corrections for Double Glazing
Hence when the frame U value is equal to the Centre of Glass U value then the
window U value is virtually unaltered for single glazing and only increased for
smaller double glazed windows. However if a frame with a high U value is used
the U value can be up to 45% higher for a single glazed small window and more
than trebled for a double glazed small window with a large frame.
Typical frame U Values (W/m2C) (from WINDOW5) are:
ASHRAE Wood
ASHRAE Aluminium Flush
ASHRAE' Aluminium with break
ASHRAE Aluminium with no break
2.27
3.97
5.68
10.79
In Australia, no break frames are usually used by window frame suppliers so that
the correction factors at the right hand end of the above table usually apply.
Modified Storage Load Factors
Checking this checkbox causes the program to use a modified method for
calculating the solar gain through windows and skylights when shadows from
overhangs, reveals and adjacent buildings pass across the window and/or wall
during the course of the day. The method is described in detail in clause 7-80 of
this User Guide.
!
L
L
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
45
Usage of Windows
|
This form appears when the column number for a particular window in the
Windows Screen is selected with the mouse. It displays the AHU, Zone and
Room title together with the External surface number and exposure of each
surface that has this shading scheme on the window or wall.
a
I i .ii '■ il 1 '.mini-.
li
,zi
Window Type: j Sing
«\t .
I I
:
■
•|.|
r
- * I, !
!
; I
I
1 A
...
■rt
i*>
Moor
I 5 i .•( 'i
t
|
.: .
r
C V/A*
f
!■:. i :
| -•(
i:,7
f"
l
I */.
' s
i:! ■
>•1
■ i
I
Usage of Windows Form
Fig 3-70B
3-80 Glass Selection Form
J
] All
Apply j
Master Data
S
i.
J
223 6mm LE60i on Cleat fS21 / 12mm Air l 6mm Cle
224 6mm LESfli on Green fS2| / 12mm Air / 6mm Cf<
2^5__6mrn LEGQt on Gtey"fS2} / 12mm Aii / 6mtn Clo;
226 6mm tEKOi on BionzelS2) / Uuan flit / 6mm C
.'.V >.m.n 11 I 'Jr i.n Par.. Mur \W\ / I .'inn. Ait i
228 Gmm lEBOi on Arctic Blue IS21 / 12mm Air / Cm
229 Gmm LEBOi on Azuiia f$2| /12mm Air i 6mm
230 Gmm LE6O1 on Eveitjreen [621 / 12mm Air / Bmi
231 Gmm LE54ii on Clear IS21 J 12mm Air / 6mm Cte
Hrf.pn fftn } l^mm A
! i’.inm rr.
7 !/ J Hail) I I
Ajiply !
|
lj J
rS
Ij J.hm:.
2 G.J.
2 GJ.
2 lj iloiin*'
2! G.J
.■ ii.;
ii .i
2!G.James
? 15 damns
J+j xj
1 /!!
I / I
1.79
I f\i
I /'i
1.79
1.73
I./9
1.79
1 /«l
0.45
0.36
0.30
li 1‘,
II {/
II :■:«
ii :;;i
(I .10
l
I eii
I
1 /■,
I /«.
I / ■?
0.42
jL74
f.b
li.M
i /■;
I /•;
n v>
U.4S •
U ■l* .
I:
i
0.29
0.34
0.32
(I ."I
0.'30
0.30
o ;/
Il :*»
}ai
User Data
MOB
w
u i
b08 1 aiin I il ill on!
iJiiiii
506 !»ie<n 6>ntn
505 G 39mm qiey
fW
S 9~"
5 8
m
504_ Clear Gmm_____________
UpfrfipaT»;iear 6m» " '
2
"
■■ •
5H.
501 double >i-2 tko-fl 24
».. •
~2
2
m
3.4
3.4
.56
.56
0 34
0 17
mm
a 94
0.45
HH
Fig 3-80A Glass Selection Form
In this form a standard list of commonly available glass types and a list of user
entered glass types are available for selection for the purpose of establishing an
appropriate value of U value and Shading Factor for input on the Windows
screen. Both lists are also available in BEAVER the ACADS-BSG Building Energy
simulation program. The data files where this data is stored is in a common sub­
directory (refer Clause 2-50). For CAMEL the U value and Shading Coefficient of
the glass is required. For BEAVER additional, more detailed information on the
solar transmission and absorption coefficients at varying angles of incidence is
required this data being entered for the user entered glasses, in BEAVER.
The Master Data
In the upper panel the standard list of glasses are displayed. The specific buttons
on the Tool Bar for this panel are:
46
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
Applf
Apply - inserts the selected glass number and data into the Windows
Tab Page
A selection list by Manufacturer
The data for the standard glasses cannot be edited and comprises:
Glass No.
Glass Description
A description of the glass type
Number of panes
The number of panes in the glass type -1 (single) or 2 (double)
Manufacturer
Glass Manufacturer Name
NFRC (Winter) U value
This is the U value of the glass based on the NFRC (National Fenestration Rating
Council) reference winter conditions. It is input in BEAVER and modified each
hour based on the outdoor wind speed. It is also the value used in the ABCB
Glass Calculator, but is not an appropriate value for cooling load calculations and
is displayed for information only. The NFRC conditions for the winter U value are:
Inside air and effective room temperature 21 deg C
Inside wind speed 0.0 m/s
Effective Room and sky Emissivity 1.00
Outside air and effective sky temperature -18.0 deg C
Direct Solar Radiation 0.0 W/sq.m.
Outside wind speed 5.5 m/s (Convection Coeff 26.0 W/m2.K)
NFRC (Summer) Shade Coefficient
This is the Shade Coefficient of the glass based on the ASFIRAE NFRC summer
conditions. It is input in BEAVER and also the value used in the ABCB Glass
Calculator. The NFRC conditions for the summer Shade Coefficient are:
Inside air and effective room temperature 24 deg C
Inside wind speed 0.0 m/s
Effective Room and sky Emissivity 1.00
Outside air and effective sky temperature 32.0 deg C
Direct Solar Radiation 783.0 W/sq.m.
Outside wind speed 2.8 m/s (Convection Coeff 15.0 W/m2.K)
U value for CAMEL
This is a suggested U value of the glass for use in CAMEL based on wind speeds
similar to those listed in the AIRAFI Application Manual DA9 and assumed typical
ambient and indoor temperatures. The values were calculated using the LBNL
WINDOW5 program with the following environmental conditions:
Inside air and effective room temperature 24 deg C
Fixed combined inside convective coefficient of 8.0 corresponding to an indoor air
velocity of 1.0 m/s
Effective Room and sky Emissivity 1.00
Outside air and effective sky temperature 32.0 deg C
Direct Solar Radiation 783.0 W/sq.m.
Outside Wind Velocity of 2.5 m/s
[
These values are “centre of glass” U values and may need adjusting via the
Frame U value Correction to allow for the effect of the frame.
Shade Coefficient for CAMEL
L
This is a suggested Shade Coefficient of the glass for use in CAMEL based on
wind speeds similar to those listed in the AIRAFI Application Manual DA9 and
assumed typical ambient and indoor temperatures. The values were calculated
using the LBL WINDOWS program with the same environmental conditions as for
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
47
U-value for CAMEL listed above.
These values are “centre of glass” shade coefficients and may need adjusting via
the Frame Shade Factor Correction to allow for the effect of the frame.
The User Data
In the lower panel the user glasses are displayed. The specific buttons on the
Tool Bar for this panel are:
Apply - Apply - inserts the selected glass number and data into the Windows Tab
Page
H
This saves all the current user defined glass types (in the BUWindow.txt file) for
future use in other CAMEL (and BEAVER) projects. The location of this file is in a
separate directory that is accessible by both CAMEL and BEAVER and is
nominated in the Configuration>Systems
Deletes a selected user glass. This can only be done if the particular glass does
not have the additional glass properties for use in BEAVER ie the glasses that
have been entered for use in CAMEL only.
I
I
■] Adds a new glass type
A selection list by Manufacturer
If data for a particular glass type has been entered in BEAVER and is complete,
then only the last two columns can be edited these being the values required by
CAMEL but not BEAVER.
Otherwise the Description, Number of Panes and the Manufacturer can also
be edited with the Description being mandatory and the CAMEL values if entered
will be stored for this and for future CAMEL runs.
r
t..
When a glass type is selected and Applied, the glass number and the last four
properties are inserted in the lower panel in the Windows screen
The data for the user glasses comprises:
Glass No.
Glass Number assigned by the program (starts from 500)
f....
Glass Description
A description of the glass type
Number of panes
The number of panes in the glass type -1 (single) or 2 (double)
[
Manufacturer
Glass Manufacturer Name
Beaver U value
This is the U value of the glass based on the NFRC winter conditions if this is an
existing glass type entered by the user in BEAVER. It is not editable.
L
If the glass type is added in CAMEL as a new glass type it is optional data which
can be entered here but if this window type is to be used in BEAVER then the
user will need to obtain the NFRC U value and other glass properties required by
BEAVER and enter this data in the equivalent form in BEAVER
Beaver Shade Coefficient
This is the Shade Coefficient of the glass based on the NFRC summer conditions
if this is an existing glass type entered by the user in BEAVER. It is not editable.
If the glass type is added in CAMEL as a new glass type it is optional data which
can be entered here but if this window type is to be used in BEAVER then the
user will need to obtain the NFRC Shade Coefficient and other glass properties
48
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
required by BEAVER and enter this data in the equivalent form in BEAVER
User U Value for CAMEL
This is the U Value of the user entered glass for use in CAMEL. It will more than
likely be different to the ASHRAE NFRC Shading Coefficient which is the value
normally supplied by the glass manufacturer (and used in Beaver).
The NFRC conditions are reference conditions as distinct from design conditions
for use in load estimation. The values for CAMEL are typically based on
conditions listed in the AIRAH Application Manual DA9, the main difference
between the NFRC conditions and those listed in DA9 being the inside and
outside wind speed.
User Shade Coefficient for CAMEL
This is the Shade Coefficient of the user entered glass for use in CAMEL.
Although similar, it will more than likely be different to the ASHRAE NFRC
Shading Coefficient which is the value normally supplied by the glass
manufacturer (and used in Beaver).
The NFRC conditions are reference conditions as distinct from design conditions
for use in load estimation. The values for CAMEL are typically based on
conditions listed in the AIRAH Application Manual DA9.
3-90 The Walls Tab Page
In each room each wall (or roof) with its associated windows (or skylights) is
entered as an external surface in the External (Walls and Roofs) Tab Page. The
wall or roof types used in each zone is selected from either a standard list
(referenced as W1, W2 etc for walls or R1, R2 etc for roofs) or by wall type as
entered here in the WALLS Tab Page. The standard list, (included as Appendix
D), is contained in the CAMEL.WAR file supplied with the program. It
corresponds to the list of walls and roofs used in the building energy simulation
computer program BEAVER. Up to 16 wall types can be entered.
If only walls or roofs from this standard list are to be used then:(a) no entries are required in this Tab Page
(b) the users CAMEL input data will be compatible with the BEAVER building
energy estimation program input data.
Note that the BEAVER MASTER.R data must be added to when using
BEAVER if different U values are entered in CAMEL.
W»Hs no* included m the Standard fist are entered here.
To vtevt the list of standard walls press
r:-
To view the list of standard roofs press
r
I
-HHI
JJJjjj
i
'Wa.ll Type
U-Vaiue
1
m
§5U
SisllsSlliiili
Ml
:
■Itt
II■■BIBBmm■
ml
.62
i
17 :
Fig 3-90A The Walls Tab Page
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
49
If the user enters a wall or roof type in this Tab Page the same as one from the
standard list, then the wall or roof entered in this Tab Page is used in preference
to the standard list.
t
The walls and roofs in the standard list can be viewed from this Tab Page by
clicking the appropriate button in the selection box in the upper half of the Tab
Page.
Note that in this Tab Page the = sign causes the next non blank field to the left to
be copied into the field where the cursor is currently located.
Copy and paste can also be used to copy one column to another.
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page:Wall Type #
Up to 5 characters to identify the wall or roof type eg. TRIPB for a triple brick wall.
This is cross referenced in the External (Walls and Roofs) Tab Page of each
room where any of the wall or roof types entered here can be specified in a
particular wall or roof. Note that the wall type is case sensitive ie. W1 is different
to w1. If an identifier of one of the walls (W1 to W130) or roofs (R1 to R59) in the
standard list is used, this will take precedence over the one in the standard list.
U-Value #
Overall summer heat transmission coefficient in W/m2 °C. Typical values are
given in Table 24 to 36 of DA9.
Winter U values for heating are computed from the summer values - see 7-10
Heating and Cooling Loads for more details
Surface density #
Wall or roof surface density (kg/m2). Program assumes upper or lower limit if the
density is specified outside the range in Table 21 p.60 of DA9. Note for roof in
sun or roof in shade, the allowable range is extended down to 10.0 if the Light
Weight Roof ETD’s check box is checked. (See Table 37 in DA9 for densities for
a range of materials.)
t"
Light Weight Roof ETD’s
When this checkbox is checked, the program uses Effective Temperature
Differences (ETD's) developed by ACADS-BSG for sunlit and shaded roofs.
These extend the Carrier data down to surface densities of 10 kg/m2; the Carrier
data only going down to 50 kg/m2 at 40° latitude and 100 kg/ m2 elsewhere. If the
box is unchecked is omitted, the original Carrier data is used.
The method of determining these revised ETD’s is described in detail in clause 770 of this User Guide.
3-100 The Chillers, Boilers and Circuits Tab Page
On this Tab Page the additional heat losses and gains in the piping circuits of the
chiller and boiler are entered. For the Chiller a diversity on the internal loads can
be entered to exclude a portion of these loads when accumulating the cooling
loads for the chiller.
Also circuits can be set up for accumulating loads for a group air handling units. The
connection to each particular circuit is made on the AHU screen.
The items of input are:
Chiller
Pump
The units for the pump heat gains to the chilled water; kW or % of sum of the
AHU cooling loads connected to the chiller.
Value - the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.
50
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
f
L
Chiller---------------
X!
Pump Heal Gain
Pipe Heat Gains
j% ZJ
Value |3
I A*
Value ]3
-Diversity Factors-
Equipment
Latent
Boiler-
Xj
I
▼ 3
Pump Heat Gain
Pipe Heat Losses
X;
1
I
Equipment
Sensible
jO. 85
Lights
0.9
People
/o
Value
Value pf
R efrigerant/Walei Circuit Accumulation
Type
Variable Refrigerant
Condenser Water Loop
I 2 1 Cond Loop
I
3
I 4]
5
■.....6
j.
8>
9:
: 10
]
! 11
: 12
Fig 3-100A The Chillers, Boilers & Circuits Tab Page
Pipe Heat Gains
The units for the pipe heat gains to the chilled water; kW or % of sum of the AHU
cooling loads connected to the chiller.
Value - the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.
Diversity Factors
People Diversity Factor
This is a diversity factor entered as a fraction that is applied to the people when
the accumulated loads for the chiller are determined. The fraction is the fraction
of the people sensible and latent load that is included in the chiller load.
Lights Diversity Factor
This is a diversity factor entered as a fraction that is applied to the people when
the accumulated loads for the chiller are determined. The fraction is the fraction of
the lighting load that is included in the chiller load.
Equipment Sensible Diversity Factor
This is a diversity factor entered as a fraction that is applied to the people when
the accumulated loads for the chiller are determined. The fraction is the fraction of
the equipment sensible load that is included in the chiller load.
Equipment Latent Diversity Factor
I
This is a diversity factor entered as a fraction that is applied to the people when
the accumulated loads for the chiller are determined. The fraction is the fraction of
the equipment latent load that is included in the chiller load.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
51
f
Boiler
Pump
The units for the pump heat gain to hot water; kW or % of the sum of the AHU
heating loads to the boiler.
Value - the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.
Note that the pump heat reduces the required boiler capacity.
r
Pipe Heat Losses
The units for the pipe heat losses from the boiler hot water pipes, kW or % of the
sum of the AHU heating loads connected to the boiler.
Value - the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.
Refrigerant / Water Circuit Accumulation
CAMEL provides for the accumulation of the loads (GTH) for nominated groups of
air handling plants for the purpose of sizing condenser plant, variable refrigerant
flow (VRF) systems, etc. The circuits are set up here with the Title and
accumulation required. The assignment of AHUs to the particular circuit is done
on the AHU screen.
Circuit Description
This is the description of each Circuit
Circuit Type
This is a selection list for the type of circuit. The options available and the AHU
System types that can be connected to each circuit type are:
Condenser Water Loop - all system types except RCHP, VRF Indoor
Units and Evaporative Cooling but on each condenser water loop the
system types must be the same
® Variable Refrigerant - Only VRF indoor units allowed
• Water Loop Heat Pump - RCHP only
• Chilled Water Fan Coil - Single Zone Heating and Cooling
• Blank (no circuit type) - all system types except Evap Cooling
•
All AHUs on a circuit must be the same type except when the circuit type is blank.
This is primarily used when loading CAMEL into BEAVER, the ACADS-BSG
energy simulation program, to determine which system type to use in BEAVER
and how the data is extracted from the CAMEL results.
The Condenser Water Loop is for packaged air conditioning units with water
cooled condensers connected to a common condenser water loop cooled by a
common cooling tower. Note: only the TOTAL cooling GTH is calculated NOT the
total heat rejected to the cooling tower.
The Chilled Water Fan Coil circuit can be used for fan coil units connected to a
chiller with heating coils connected to the boiler or electric. It can also be used for
modelling chilled beams with or without the AHUs connected to a Preconditioner
which preconditions the outside (primary) air. Another use is to split the total
chiller load into a number of sub-circuits each with a separate pump.
No. Off
Number of similar circuits (including this one) to be included in BEAVER data to
calculate the total energy usage. This entry has no effect on CAMEL results.
52
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
L.
3-110 Preconditioners Tab Page
On this Tab Page the details of any outside air preconditioner plants are entered.
These are separate air handlers that precondition the outside air before being
distributed to selected zones.
I
The type of Preconditioner can be:
• Temperature Controlled (Cooling Coil and/or Heating coil) with or without an
outside to exhaust air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit
• Humidity Controlled (Desiccant Wheel) with or without an outside to exhaust
air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit. Refer 7-40
Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity Control Unit for description of how the
HCU is modelled.
• An outside to exhaust air heat exchanger only
(
The Air Handling Units that are connected to the preconditioner can be nominated
on this Tab Page (as from AHU m to n) or individually on each AHU Tab Page.
The condition of the outside air supplied to each connected AHU is then the
leaving conditions for the particular preconditioner as entered on this Tab Page.
Preconditioners can be copied (from one row to another) using the copy and
paste buttons on the toolbar.
...... Precondtfioners-----------Humidity Controlled
Temperature Controlled
Fan
Fresh to Exhaust H E
H
r"
T~
r"
T
r
IF r
r
r
r
;
\
r
E
s
m
Outside
Air
O
J.
Fi
(
ru
DT Fan
S3 fH
S T Fan
Frj?sh to
Cxh^ust
A»
Elxchi'ingt*!
£f
n
n
n
r
r"
L,.rr
I
in
Fi
r~
r
i.
n
m
Temperature Control
£
Return Air from Rooms
DT-Fan
D ss i-cca rit H urn id ity
Pieconditioned
Air to AHUs /
Rooms
De-activation
Ail-
EX
Fig 3-110A The Outside Air Preconditioner Tab Page
The items that are entered on the PRECONDITIONER Tab Page are:Preconditioner Title
An appropriate title comprising letters or numbers, up to 20 characters in length
for each preconditioner plant.
KM
Oil-side
Air
am
Preconditioned
Air to AHUs / Rooms
Temperature Centre
Temperature Controlled
Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature #
The preconditioned plant Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature (°C) when the pre­
conditioner cooling coil is operating. The preconditioner cooling coil is assumed to
extract sensible heat only unless the leaving dry bulb is less than or equal to the
ambient moisture level (g/kg) and 95% RH. The leaving coil condition is then
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
53
I
taken as the entered leaving dry bulb temperature and 95% RH. Hence is only a
leaving dry bulb temperature is required to be entered.
Note that this is the temperature of the air leaving the plant NOT the
preconditioner coil (that is it includes any rise due to a draw through fan).
Allowable range is 0 to 40.
Connected To Chiller
This indicates whether the Temperature Controlled Preconditioner is connected to
the chiller. If not, it is treated as a package unit and the cooling coil load is not
added to the chiller load.
Heating Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature
The preconditioner plant Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature (°C) when the heating
coil is operating. Note that this is the temperature of the air leaving the plant NOT
the preconditioner coil (that is it includes any rise due to a draw through fan).
[Range 10 to 40]
Connected to Boiler
This indicates whether the Temperature Controlled Preconditioner is connected to
the boiler. If not connected to the boiler, it is treated as a packaged unit and the
heating coil load is not added to the boiler load
Outsice A.r
Preconditioned
Air to AI-UJs / Rooms
i:
Exhjyst Air
UfO
De-activation Air
Humidity Controlled
Precool CW/DX
This nominates whether the pre-cooling coil for the desiccant humidity control unit
is a DX (refrigerant) or Chilled Water coil. This is also the flag to indicate that a
desiccant humidity control unit is being installed for this Preconditioner. Refer 7-40
Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity Control Unit for description of how the HCU
is modelled.
f
r
Select
This provides for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre-cooling coil
is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design conditions (entered
on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity control unit. It enables a
re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity and/or the actual
moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a particular
manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled water pre­
cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Note that the methodology for sizing the desiccant humidity control unit is based
on data and information supplied by Munters Pty Ltd which may not apply to other
manufacturers units
L.
DX Capacity kW
The actual capacity of the DX unit heating the de-activation air of the desiccant
wheel and providing cooling and dehumidification of the outside air. This is to
provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the program
estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
This is assumed to remain constant at all outdoor air conditions with the unit
cycling at part load conditions with a lower load than the capacity of the DX Coil.
[Range 0 to 99999]
54
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
i
r
Moist Rem. g/kg
The actual moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel for a selected Humidity
Control Unit at the entered design conditions (as entered on the Project Screen).
This is to provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the
program estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
The entered or estimated value is varied at other outdoor air conditions as a
function of the ambient DB, WB and Specific Humidity and the Specific Humidity
of the air leaving the HCU.
Refer 7-40 Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity Control Unit for description of
how the HCU is modelled. [Range 0 to 10]
Fan Details - all types
Fan kW
f" '
The preconditioner Fan kW. If the fan is blow through the fan kW is added as a
load on the preconditioner plant. If it is draw through the fan load is not added, as
the fan heat increases the temperature of the preconditioned air i.e. the leaving
coil temperature from the preconditioner is the leaving plant (entered by the user)
minus the temperature rise due to the fan kW.
Fan type
The fan kW is added as a load on the preconditioner plant. For a Humidity
controlled unit, the fan is always draw through. With a blow through fan the
temperature rise due to the fan heat is added to the ambient temperature of the
air entering the unit. For a draw through fan the temperature rise due to the fan
heat is>
Temperature controlled, subtracted from the user entered leaving unit
temperature to determine the required coil leaving temp.
Humidity controlled, added to the calculated leaving temperature of the
desiccant wheel
Exhaust Air from Rooms
sltr
Outside
Air
lillitii
illpuJliS
Air K-aExclijnesr
Preconditioned
Air to AHUs / Rooms
Fresh to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger
Temperature and Latent or Enthalpy efficiency
Temperature and Latent or Enthalpy efficiency of an outside air to exhaust air
heat exchanger, expressed as a decimal, where the exhaust air passing through
the heat exchanger, is the sum of the supply air minus return air for each AHU
connected to the preconditioner. It is assumed that the efficiency does not vary
with change in outdoor conditions. Temperature efficiency only may be entered, or
temperature together with latent or enthalpy efficiency.
The fresh to exhaust air heat exchanger is assumed to be at the entry into the
humidity controlled or temperature controlled unit.
When a Fresh to Exhaust Air heat exchanger is included, all the return duct gains
are applied to the return air before portion or ail of it is passed through the heat
exchanger so that a corresponding proportion of these heat gains will be
exhausted
Refer clause 7-30 of the User Guide for a detailed description of how a fresh to
exhaust air heat exchanger is modelled in CAMEL. [0.0 to 1.0]
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
55
I
r
Entering Data - AHU Screens
4
4-10 The AHU, Zones and Rooms Screen
On this screen the detailed AHU, Zone and Room information is entered for each
AHU on a series of Tab Pages.
Mi. X %tJSj f
Iff
j-Cj={ Copy J f“ Global Change § I Show Single j
go Til
Fig 4-10A The main toolbar on the AHU, Zones and Rooms Screen
At the top of each screen is a toolbar with the following functions:
lit®!?
I
□
X
[
Close and return to the MAIN Screen
Go to the Project Screens
Delete - This button deletes the data for the particular row, column or item
where the cursor is currently located. The items that are deleted on each
tab page are:
The entire Air Handling Unit OR when Show All is checked,
AHU
deletes the AHU where the cursor is currently located. When
it is selected a small form appears on screen with the
message “Are you sure you want to delete AHU ‘n’ including
all connected Zones and Rooms”
Deletes the data (column or with Show All the row) where the
External
cursor is located. If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and
any additional windows attached to this surface will be deleted.
If the cursor is on an additional window, only the additional
window will be deleted
Partitions Only the Floor, Ceiling or Partition (column or with Show All,
block) where the cursor is located.
Partitions Only the row (or with Show All, the block - people or lights or
sensible etc) where the cursor is located.
Copies the column of data in show single, or block of data in show all,
where the cursor is, into the clipboard (External and Partitions Tab Pages
only). If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and any additional windows
attached to this surface will be copied. If the cursor is on an additional
window, only the additional window will be copied.
Pastes the data in the clipboard to the column in show single, or block of
data in show all, where the cursor is (External and Partitions Tab Pages
only). The copy and paste from the External and Partitions Tab Pages can
be from one room to another. On the external Tab Page additional paste
options may be selected on the Paste External form which will appear see the end of clause 4-50 External Walls & Roofs Tab Page.
'J
Validation - CAMEL validates all data as it is entered. When there are
errors this smiley face changes to red and if the user clicks on this face, all
current errors on this Tab Page will be displayed in a pop-up form at the
foot of the screen.
Displays a calculator.
Display AHU’s, zones and rooms tree - Refer clause 2-70
56
f
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
[
[
i
I
Copy
This allows the user to copy the data from another AHU or room tab page
into the current AHU or room tab page. When the Copy button is selected,
a dialogue box appears for the user to select the AHU or room to be
copied. Refer Fig 4-1 OB.
mBM
■X*
'Ml
d
AMCCIril HCIIP
L. O
J
; Cancel :
Fig 4-1 OB Copy Dialogue Box
this allows the user to globally change items (except combo
Global Change
boxes and selection boxes) on the AHU, Zone & Room Screens. First the
global change check box is checked and then the cursor is located on the
field to be changed. The right mouse button is next clicked and in the
dialogue box that appears on screen, the number of occurrences of the
current value in the field is displayed. The replacement value is entered and
clicking OK will implement the change. The global change check box clears
after each change is implemented.
Glottal Ch.
jU
■'.'ii-.il.OU. SUi-.liTl
i'rr-.v.: Y<
To: 123)
(fty-dser of occurences: 8)
H
Lancfei
OK
Fig 4-1OC Global Change Dialogue Box
!_ Help
Show All I Show Single
l
Show All / Show Single
If this button is selected the input data for all AHUs on the AHU,s or AHU
Coil Tab Pages and all AHUs and Zones and Rooms on the Zones &
Rooms, External, Partitions and Internal Tab Pages is displayed row by row
in tabular form.
In this mode on the External screen additional surfaces are added
immediately after the cursor position by selecting the Add Surfaces button
which appears when Show All is selected.
On the Internal Tab page, additional People or additional Lights are added
by selecting the Add People or Add Lights button (which appear when
Show All is selected) which insert another line immediately after the cursor
position.
In Show All mode the right Mouse symbol 0 is displayed above the
respective input column that it applies to, and moving the cursor to a field
below the symbol and right clicking, displays specific selection forms to
help the user with inputting data. On the Internal Tab Page, above the
Load column, the mouse only appears when the cursor is on the first
People row and for the Sens row. For People, an Occupancy Selection
form (to AS1668 or BCA Tab D 1.13) appears, whilst for Sensible, a
Sensible Load Calculator appears.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
57
If [ -i
Go To - This is a selection list for the user to quickly go to another
AHU or room (Refer Fig 4-1OD and E)
m
-•
§g
■
I
■§j§inBgiBjBj XIi
2 aym
m
r
:
m
—
■
■
■111
■81111
!
SIMIsMbHHIBU
I.
:■. ■.....■
.’..i.-u
5 AIIU5 VAV
llgiMiiiiigii
|g|
I
:
-'I
Fig 4-1 OD Go to AHU Selection List
»!
Ml
■ •I’l
•- i. '
i
i.
lil.*
ni
I
sTmr'
:
E
l
vrijsj
i
i
!
r
.'..ii'h!,:;
s
’ t
:.. i.
C
. -1 Vi
. ■ M:
»Tfi igflfflftiffii
ti
■ s.-inur. ■
1 \
S : .r: • r Sill- i'.u,:
t
.".ill:
i : . ::
:
■-
!
I
i
I Fir
.! "t I .
j Vvi-S': i ::
I
r”
^rourca
A
■. M I ’■
-kstFfc ,:
I i’.Jh.ii-
■■i.ijlr- 1 !;
t
4;1
. >
j -.a:.;; ■.
t
. s-r
jd
r
L .
i
•W»
Fig 4-1OE Go to Room Selection List
fH;
i|H +
Fig 4-10F The second Toolbar on the AHU, Zones and Rooms Screens.
Below this first toolbar is a second toolbar (refer Fig 4-1 OF) with the following
functions:
A description of the AHU including the number and AHU Title
«>
A pair of buttons to toggle back and forth through the AHU’s
+ Add a new AHU - Adds a new AHU at the end of the current list.
Alternatively AHU’s can be added or deleted in the Summary Screen
When add AHU is selected the dialogue box shown in Fig 4-1OG appears
and the AHU data from an existing AHU can be copied including the zones
and rooms on that AHU if the check box is checked.
r
:
58
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
Mm
jfi?
c«
T
■n
TO
'M
t
m
Ho
ban"
Fig 4-1OG Add AHU Dialogue Box
i\j^-; +! +RA Room .
| ZONE 1 Room Title Gmd Shop4
Fig 4-1 OH Second Toolbar with Extra Functions for Zones and Rooms Tab
Pages
In the Rooms Tab Pages (Zones and Rooms, External, Partitions and Internal)
extra items are added to this second toolbar (unless the Simplified Input for
single zone units only is selected on the Project Tab Page) as follows:
A Description of the Zone/Room including the Zone Number and Room Title
li
A pair of buttons to toggle back and forth through the rooms
Add a new Room and/or Zone - This adds a new room in the current AHU.
If it is the first room in this AHU it will be the first Zone. When additional
rooms are added they can be added to the current zone or added as
additional zones. When the Add button is selected a Form (as shown in Fig
4-101) appears in which the user can select the AHU and Zone Number to
which the room is to be attached, can copy the data from another room and
can enter a new room title.
..
AHU 1
j
$u
_*■ ] Zone ].
>
□
Ccpy froTs
Ho
Hi.Ui'is Fmt’i.rl
:!.
i5'' i": I'.-V. =
■:
?i
OK ]
Fig 4-101 Create Room Dialogue Box
These are now described in detail in the following clauses.
Return Air Room
t
1 +RA Room I
Adds a Return Air Room to the current AHU by opening a dialogue box
see fig 4-1OJ
This is a "room" such as a corridor or foyer (with its own fabric and internal loads),
that is a return air path back to the AHU. When selected a "Create Return Air
Room Form" appears where any other room can be copied into the R.A.Room
and a title given to the R.A.Room. See Fig 4-1 OJ below. The rooms that feed
their return air into the "R.A, Room" are nominated on a "Connected to Ret. Air
Room" checkbox on the Zones and Rooms Tab Page. Note that there can only be
one Return Air Room on each AHU
CAMEL User Guide ©ACADS-BSG
i
59
Crsste Return Air Room for AHU No. 4
Copy data from Room
No
Room Title JR.A. Room)
Cancel 1
?,
OK !
Fig 4-1OJ Create Return Air Room Dialogue Box
This form appears whenever the +RA Room button is selected to create a Return
Air Room either on the Zones and Rooms tab Page or in the "tree".
The user may enter a title for the new R.A. Room and may copy all the data from
any other existing room via a selection list. If copied, all the Zone and Rooms,
External, Partitions and Internal Data are copied into the R.A.Room, except the
Outside Air, the Minimum Supply Air and the Thermostat Location, which are not
allowed to be entered in a R.A.Room.
i..
AHU, Zone and Room Tab Pages
The individual AHU, Zone and Room Tab Pages are:
• AHU
• AHU-Coil
• Zones and Rooms (or Zone for Single Zone Units Input)
• External (walls and roofs in each room)
• Partitions (in each room)
• Internal (loads in each room)
f
4-20 The AHU Tab Page
This and the next Tab Page is where the information about each AHU is entered.
To the right hand side of the main panel a small panel displays the zones and
rooms that have been entered for this AHU. This is not displayed when ‘All Single
Zone/Room Units’ is selected on the Projects Tab Page.
|
The items on the first AHU Tab Page are:AHU Title
An appropriate title comprising letters or numbers, up to 20 characters in length
for the AHU unit.
Number off
Total number of similar AHU’s. This includes to all zones in the AHU.
L
System Type #
A selection of system type from
C V Zone Reheat *
Single Zone H & C
C V Face/Bypass *
VAV No Reheat *
VAV With Reheat *
R C Heat Pump
VRF Indoor Unit
Evap Cooling
60
- Multi-zone Constant Volume with zone reheat.
- Single Zone with Central heating and cooling coil.
- Constant Volume with zone face and bypass dampers.
- Variable Volume with a VAV box serving each zone.
- VAV box with reheat serving each zone.
- Reverse Cycle Heat Pump serving a single zone.
- Indoor Fan Coil unit for a variable refrigerant system.
- Evaporative cooler serving a single zone.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
1
AHU
/:■ LJIt*\VktU; * nif
No Off |4
Title fTyical Floor
H
1
System Type|VAV With Reheat
With
jjf
Resel
Connected to: F Chiller jv Boiler
Circuit !
Type
Room Design
Summer *CDB 24
Winter
1
2
3
R.A. Room
North Typical Floor
East Typical Floor
West Typical Floor
4
Centre Typrca Floor
otr
30 R
TO OTHER ZONES
SUPPLY
|UR'« eOK][ UHU boh]
].g
RETURN
AIR
Conditions - %RH [50
i
%RH (iff
*CDB |20
Operating Times
First i
SOME
i
ZONE
FROH OTHER ZONES
3m
Last
& I-
& j.
AHU Outside Air
[Enter in rooms 77!
Value i
i
Use AS1668 - 2012 Multiple
Compartment Formula?
' Direct To Room
ilcT
Sensible Efficiency J.78
Latent Efficiency |
Enthalpy Efficiency f~~
Humidity Control Unit
Pre-cooling coil j
Fan kW 1
...-.............. Selection..... -..-.......
Desiccant DX Cooling kW
Moisture removal - g/kg
Preconditioner Plant No
Fig 4-20A The AHU Tab Page.
-Air Hundiinij Unit
6
iE3225S2I
Umri Sh«pt
tjmdShop3:;_
Gmd
T j VH FlndporUmt.:;;;
I VRI tnrtoor Unit
1 . VFlf truloor (Jmt
I Vlli trwidni Him
4 i VAV Wifi) ftchcnt
■£S
r
fl
oaioioftivv
1
I
24 50 20 t(3;
.
24 50 2(1
24 r sn: 20;
1 24 r0 20 10
24i' so'- • si}':: 30.’
HE KB
Hi i i lily ' i iii1 tin
|
Tij
r
............. jEWetin iidtnBs
Is) f~ n«*ri i/s
;J—;'4;C_ritefih JOOliir
Tl
TW Enietin
§§§|
-
I 1
T,
1 i
1 (5.
i I ic
100
:£1
cw
1.2
411 7“ jjj
Fig 4-20B The AHU Tab Page with Show All
‘Cooling Systems marked with an asterisk are not available with the Single
Zone/Room Units Input (entered on the Project Tab Page)
This selection determines how the psychrometrics and air quantities are
calculated. For a description of this refer Clause 7-40.
Note that Single Zone H & C, Reverse Cycle Heat Pump and Evaporative Cooling
Systems can only have one zone but can have multiple rooms.
□ With Reset (only available for systems with reheat).
This determines whether the estimate of reheat each hour is to be based on:
•
•
!
With Reset not checked - the design (fixed) leaving dry bulb at the time of
Peak Grand Total Heat, entered or calculated, OR
With Reset checked - the leaving coil temperature required at each hour by
the zone with the maximum load (most demanding space).
□ Indirect (only available for evaporative cooling systems).
Checking this checkbox indicates that the system is an indirect Evaporative
Cooler and further details are entered on the AHU Coil Tab Page (see 4-30).
Connected to
1
L
This indicates whether the AHU is connected to the chiller, the Boiler or a
common water or refrigerant Circuit. Circuits provide for accumulating loads for a
group of air handling units. For example for a condensing unit for VRF or VRV
systems serving a number of fan coil units or a group of AHUs with a common
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
61
water cooled condenser.
The refrigerant or water circuit that can be selected needs to have been defined
on the Chillers and Boilers Screen. Detailed losses etc. for chillers and boilers
are also defined on the Chillers and Boilers Screen.
If connected to Chiller is selected, the AHU cooling coil load is added to the
Chiller load
If connected to Boiler is selected, the AHU heating load is added to the Boiler
load
If connected to a specific Circuit is selected, then the hourly cooling loads are
accumulated on the selected circuit (along with the hourly cooling loads of all
other AHUs connected to this circuit). Right clicking the mouse displays the
Circuits from the Chillers, Boilers & Circuits screen (Refer Fig 3-100A)
All AHUs on a circuit must be the same type and VRF Indoor Units must be
connected to a (VRF) circuit. Evaporative coolers cannot be connected to a
Circuit.
If the circuit type is:
Condenser Water Loop then Connected to Chiller cannot be selected but any
of the AHUs on the circuit can be connected to Boiler. This circuit cannot
have RCHP systems connected.
® Variable Refrigerant then Connected to Boiler/Chiller cannot be selected as
the loads are applied to an outdoor VRF unit and this circuit can only have
Indoor VRF units connected.
Water Loop Heat Pump then Connected to Boiler/Chiller cannot be selected
•
and this circuit can only have RCHPs connected.
Chilled Water Fan Coil then Connected to Chiller is automatically selected
•
and each AHU can be connected to the Boiler. This circuit can only have
Single Zone Heating and Cooling systems connected.
If none of the check boxes are selected, the unit is assumed to be a separate
packaged unit and the cooling and heating loads are not accumulated.
•
Room Design Conditions (Defaults may be set in Project Defaults refer 2-40)
Room Summer Design DB #
Summer room design dry bulb temperature typically 24°C. Applies to all
zones/rooms in this AHU. (Refer to pp. 17 to 20 of DA9). Allowable range is 10.0
to 50.0°C.
Room Summer Design RH #
Summer room design relative humidity typically 50%. Applies to all zones/rooms
in this AHU. (Refer pp.17 to 20 of DA9). Allowable range is 10.0 to 100.0%.
Room Winter Design DB
Winter room design dry bulb temperature °C typically 21 °C. Applies to all
zones/rooms in this AHU. (See page 17 to 20 of DA9). If entered, Winter CDB
must also be entered in the 'Outdoor Design Conditions' on the Project Tab Page.
Allowable range is 10.0 to 50.0°C.
Room Winter Design RH
Winter room design relative humidity typically 30%. Applies to all zones/rooms in
this AHU. (See page 17 to 20 of DA9). If entered, Winter RH% must also be
entered in the 'Outdoor Design Conditions' on the Project Tab Page. This value is
used to calculate the heat required for humidification. Allowable range is 10 to
100%.
Operating Times (Default may be set on the Project Tab Page)
This is the first and last hour of the period that the calculations for each design
day are to be made for this AHU.
From the first and last hour entered, the Hours of operation (12, 16 or 24 hours),
62
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
f.
(
for the purposes of determining the storage load factors for windows are
established by the program. Refer Clause 7-140 for technical details.
If the value is left blank the program uses the default from the Project Tab Page
which is displayed to the right of the input field (Show Single) and above the
column (Show All)
For the Chiller and each entered Circuit, the operating time is taken as the
extremes of the operating times of all AHU that are connected to the chiller or a
particular circuit.
First Last
This is the first and last hour (24 hour clock) of the period that the calculations for
each design day are to be made. [1-24]
AHU Outside air (not applicable to Evap Cooling)
Use AS1668-2012 Multiple Compartment Formula
This indicates whether the room outside air quantities entered as L/S/person or
with any other units for each room are to be converted to an AHU % outside air
using the AS1668-2012 Multiple Compartment formula. If YES is selected, then
outside air quantities are entered at Room level only. If NO is selected then
outside air quantities can be entered at Room or AHU level.
Units
Units for outside air quantity at AHU level which may be selected from:% Supply Air (0.0 to 100)
Fixed L/s (>0)
Enter in Rooms.
If the last item is selected the outside air is entered in the individual rooms. If
either of the first two are selected, then the outside air cannot be entered for
individual rooms, (refer clause 4-40)
Value
Value of the outside air quantity according to the units selected in the outside air
units drop down list. Refer pp.94 and 95 of DA9 and AS 1668.2.
Careful thought should be given to return duct gains when entering a large outside
air proportion, as this may lead to low return air quantities absorbing relatively
high return duct gains, producing unrealistic high return air temperatures.
L
I
Allowable ranges are listed under units above.
This Outside air Panel is not present on this Tab Page when ‘All Single
Zone/Room Units’ is selected, % Supply Air being added to the Outside air
Selection list on the Zone Tab Page.
□ Direct to Room
This check box is checked when the outside air is delivered directly to the room.
In this situation the outside air will normally be conditioned by a separate plant
modelled in CAMEL by connecting the AHU to a Pre-conditioner, normally a
temperature controlled Pre-conditioner but CAMEL does allow it to be a humidity
controlled Pre-conditioner. If the AHU is not connected to a Pre-conditioner then
the direct outside air is injected into the room unconditioned.
The air quantities for each space are entered on the Zones and Rooms Tab
AHU Heating Air Quantities (Evap. Cooling only)
Heating Supply Air (Units and Value)
This is the supply air for the evap cooling system when in heating. The selection
list is for the units of supply air quantity and may be selected from:
Same as Cooling
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
63
p
r
Air Changes / hour [>0 to 25.0]
He*:ing Air Quarrtit!
Supply Airj
Outside Airj
Fixed air quantity in L/s [>0.0]
L/s per m2 of floor area [>Q to 10.0]
If the supply air for heating is left blank then program uses cooling supply air
quantity. If no supply air when heating (eg, for radiant heating) select any units
and enter a value of zero
Heating Outside Air (Units and Value)
This is the outside air for the evap. cooling system when in heating. The selection
list is for the units for outside air quantity and may be selected from:
Same as Cooling
Air Changes / hour [>0 to 25.0]
Fixed air quantity in L/s [>0.0]
L/s per m2 of floor area [>0 to 10.0]
% of Heating Supply Air [>0 to 60.0]
L/s per person [>0 to 20.0]
[
If the outside air for heating is left blank then program uses cooling outside air
quantity. If no outside air when heating select any units and enter a value of zero
i..
------------ ------- H e at Exch anger------ ——r—
Sensible Efficiency j.8
Latent Efficiency
Enthalpy Efficiency
Heat Exchanger (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)
F....
Temperature & Latent or Enthalpy Efficiency
Temperature and Latent or Enthalpy efficiency of an outside air to exhaust air
heat exchanger, expressed as a decimal. It is assumed that exhaust air
temperature is the same as the return air temperature and the efficiency does not
vary with change in outdoor conditions. Both temperature and latent or enthalpy
efficiency or temperature efficiency only may be entered.
In applying all return duct gains the program assumes that all exhaust air (ie.
supply air - return air) occurs from the room except when a outside/exhaust air
heat exchanger is used. If the resultant return air quantity is too low, unrealistic
return duct temperatures can occur.
Refer clause 7-30 of this User Guide for a detailed description of how a outside to
exhaust air heat exchanger is modelled in CAMEL.
The allowable range is 0.0 to 1.0
Desiccant Humidity Control Unit (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)
Desiccant humidity control units are connected before the AHU and pre-process
the outdoor air. The way the desiccant humidity control unit is modelled in CAMEL
is detailed in clause 7-40 Psychrometrics.
The input items are:
Precool CW/DX
This nominates whether the pre-cooling coil for the desiccant humidity control unit
is a DX (refrigerant) or Chilled Water coil. This is also the flag to indicate that a
64
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
1
r
desiccant humidity control unit is being installed for this AHU.
Humidity Control Unit ———
Pre-cooling coil jCW
Fan kW fTlf*""~
f
---------- ------ Selection-------------------- -------
Desiccant DX Cooling kW 4.2
Moisture removal - g/kg 3.1
Fan kW
This is the kW of the fan drawing the air through the pre-cooling coil, DX coil and
the desiccant wheel and it causes an additional temperature rise in the desiccant
dehumidified air.
Selection
This provides for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre-cooling coil
is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design conditions (entered
on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity control unit. It enables a
re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity and/or the actual
moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a particular
manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled water pre­
cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Note that the methodology for sizing the desiccant humidity control unit is based
on data and information supplied by Munters Pty Ltd which may not apply to other
manufacturers units
DX Capacity kW
The actual capacity of the DX unit heating the de-activation air of the desiccant
wheel and providing cooling and dehumidification of the outside air. This is to
provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the program
estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
This is assumed to remain constant at all outdoor air conditions with the unit
cycling at part load conditions with a lower load than the capacity of the DX Coil.
[0 to 99999]
Moist Rem. g/kg
The actual moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel for a selected Humidity
Control Unit at the entered design conditions (as entered on the Project Screen).
This is to provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the
program estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
The entered or estimated value is varied at other outdoor air conditions as a
function of the ambient DB, WB and Specific Humidity and the Specific Humidity
of the air leaving the HCU. [Range 0 to 10]
Preconditioner Plant Number (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)
This allows the user to assign the current AHU to a preconditioner plant entered
on the Preconditioner Tab Page thus the outside air supplied to this AHU will be at
the temperature (DB and WB) specified as the leaving temperatures of the
nominated Preconditioner. Refer also to clause 3-110.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
65
r
4-30 The AHU Coil Tab Page
On this Tab Page details of the AHU Coil is entered. Following is a description of
each item on this tab page:
Psychrometrics
In this panel the alternative means of calculating the psychrometrics (coil details
and air quantities) are entered. Refer to clause 7-40 of this User Guide for further
discussion on how CAMEL calculates the psychrometrics. First a selection is
made from the selection list and then the appropriate fields for data input appear.
I
[
The selection list is between:
• By-pass Factor (Fig 4-30B) in which case a bypass factor must be entered
with or without an ADP. If the ADP is not entered, the room RH in each room
served by this AHU will be a function of the individual room RSHF lines. If
the ADP is entered, then all the room RHs will move up or down depending
on the nominated value.
\
By Pass Factor 0.15
[
Apparatus Dew Point (*C) ,
I
ais
tJ
Supply Fan Type Draw Through
Supply
Unit
Pa
7i
Value
150
Return Unit! JT: Value.
I’mUnx Govvs
X Heat Gain i
% Leakage Gain
External Gain (kW) i
Cooling Safety Factor % r5
Heating Safety Factor % 5
[
-,>x.
,At AHU Peak and Room Peak
Fig 4-30A The AHU Coil Tab Page
66
•
Fixed Leaving Conditions (Fig 4-30C) in which case a leaving dry bulb
temperature must be entered with optionally a fixed wet bulb temperature or
an ADP. If only the dry bulb is entered, the program calculates the required
wet bulb temperature to meet the specified room conditions. Note however,
there will be a spread of RH in individual rooms depending on the slope of
the RSHF line for each room. If the wet bulb or ADP is nominated, all the
room RHs will move up or down accordingly.
•
Fixed Supply Air (Fig 4-30D) in which case a supply air quantity must be
entered. If the supply and quantity is required to be higher or lower than the
dehumidified air quantity using a fixed bypass around the coil, then a bypass
type is entered together with a leaving dry bulb temperature or a leaving dry
bulb and wet bulb temperature or a bypass factor. These latter quantities are
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
used to calculate the dehumidified air quantity through the coil. Note that this
Fixed Air Quantity must be greater than any Minimum Supply Air entered on
the Project or the Zones & Rooms Tab Pages.
The data input items for the appropriate psychrometrics selection are:
Bypass factor #
L.;y
.■VD =i<T .’C:
Fig 4-30B Psychrometrics - Bypass Factor
The cooling coil by-pass factor represents the portion of the air passing through
the coil that is completely unaltered psychometrically. For typical values refer to
Tables 55 and 56, p 124 in DA9. Allowable range is 0.0 to 0.99
Leaving DB # (°C)
The cooling coil leaving dry bulb temperature °C. [ range is 0 to 20°C]
Leaving WB (°C)
The cooling coil leaving wet bulb temperature °C. The allowable range is zero to
20°C and the wet bulb must be lower than the dry bulb.
I„p*f
if!
I i-'i il I • ■I'fimi I uriilihuri
1
Wif; { C; izs
iJo i m ■ >
pL] :
.■'sp v>r. 4-.::; Dev;
Fig 4-30C Psychrometrics - Fixed Leaving Conditions
Apparatus Dew Point (°C)
This allows the user to enter a fixed dew point for the coil. The allowable range is
2 to 28 °C.
L/s#
The required air quantity L/s. Range is >0 to 99999.
If the resultant leaving coil temperature with this nominated supply air quantity is
less than the minimum specified (on the Projects Tab Page - refer Clause 3-20)
the air quantity is increased to satisfy this condition.
Fixed Supply Air
•V&poooBy Pass Typej"
Fig 4-30D Psychrometrics - Fixed Supply Air
The nominated supply air quantity must also be greater than any minimum air
quantity entered on the Projects Tab Page. If the entered supply air quantity
results in a room air quantity in a particular room that is less than any specified
minimum air quantity then the nominated supply air quantity is increased until the
L
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
67
room minimum is satisfied.
If a (fixed) bypass type is nominated and the calculated dehumidified air quantity
is less than the nominated supply air quantity then CAMEL treats the system as a
dump back system, ie. Air is dumped back from the leaving side of the coil back
through the by-pass to the inlet of the coil. A system sometimes used to increase
moisture removal.
Refer pages 122-123 of DA9 for further information on these types of systems.
ByPass Type
This is entered when the calculated dehumidified air is to pass through the coil
and extra air (to increase the air change rate in the room) is bypassed through a
fixed bypass around the coil. Select MIX if the bypassed air is a mixture of
outside and return air or RET if it is all R/A, ie. all O/A passes through the coil.
— Evaporative Cooling----------Evap Cooler Efficiency
Evaporative Cooler Efficiency # (Evap Coolers only)
This item appears on this Tab Page when an evaporative cooler is being
analysed. It is the Efficiency of the Evaporative Cooler entered as a percentage.
Allowable range is 40 to 100%.
Eva floats ve Coaling indirect
|Wet Bulb approach Effectivene ▼ Val.
Indirect Evap Cooler Effectiveness (Indirect Evap Coolers only)
This is the means of expressing the effectiveness of the indirect evaporative
cooler. The choice is between:
Wet Bulb approach - This is a measure of the effectiveness in regard to the
supply air dry bulb temperature (LvgDB) that can be achieved in relation to
the ambient WB as given by:
(1 - (LeavinqDB - AmbientWB)) *100 %
AmbientWB
It is assumed to be independent of Ambient DB temperatures and also
independent of supply air quantity. [80 to 150]
Dew Point Efficiency - this is the
(AmbientDB - Supply air DB) * 100%.
(AmbientDB - Room Dew Point)
This is again assumed to be independent of the ambient dry bulb and supply
air quantity. [50 to 100]
Leaving DB - this is the supply air leaving dry bulb temperature assumed to be
constant at all ambient conditions and independent of air quantity. [0 to 20]
The assumptions listed for each of the above may be invalid and the user may,
after running CAMEL, have to change the entered values based on the ambient
conditions at the time of the peak load.
Fan Gains
Supply Fan Type
Select from blow through or draw through. If draw through, it is treated as a
supply duct gain, if blow though a return duct gain.
Supply Units
The units for the supply fan heat gain, select from
68
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
I
% - Percentage of room sensible heat,
kW - the kilowatts of the fan motor added to the air stream
Pa - Pressure rise of the fan in Pa (equals system pressure drop).
[.
Supply Value
Supply Fan heat according to the Units selected. If the units are % the program
calculates the fan KW as the entered value times the AHU total room sensible heat
divided by 100. Table 53, page 109 to 111of DA9 (and help) lists typical values for a
range of total pressure and temperature difference, room to supply air. If the units are
Pa the program calculates air quantity/1000/ Fan efficiency which is assumed as
70%
Return Units
The units for the return fan heat gain, same as supply units above.
Return Value
Return Fan heat according to the Units selected, same as supply value above
Return Duct Gains (Not applicable to Evap Cooling)
This is the heat gain to return ducts expressed as a percent of room sensible
heat.
In applying return duct gains the program assumes that all exhaust air (ie. supply
air - return air) occurs from the room except when a outside/exhaust air heat
exchanger is used (refer Clause 7-30). If the resultant return air quantity is too
low, eg. In systems with a high percentage of outside air, unrealistic return duct
temperatures can occur. If there is no return air then any entered return duct
gains are ignored.
% Heat Gain
Heat gain to supply duct expressed as a percentage of the total room sensible
heat. Refer DA9 p 111. Allowable range is 0 to ±20%
% Leakage Gain
Heat gain due to duct leakage gain expressed as total room sensible heat. Refer
DA9 p 111. Allowable range is 0 to ±20%
External Gain (kW)
A negative value can be entered to model a cooling effect such as R/A drawn
from around a refrigerated cabinet, in the room. Allowable range is any value.
Cooling Safety factor %
Expressed as a % of room total heat to account for any uncertainty of the internal
and fabric loads. Refer DA9 pp 110-111. Allowable range is 0 to 20%.
Heating Safety Factor %
A percentage increase in the sensible fabric heating load to account for any
uncertainty of these loads. The number has a similar effect to the safety factor
applied to the cooling. Note that there is also a percentage Heat Up capacity for
the Heater or Boiler (on the Project Screen) to allow for the heating up of the
boiler and piping and storage mass of the building.
Room Load Chart Printout
A selection for when the AHU and room load charts are to be calculated and
printed in the results. The selection is between
•
•
•
At the time of the Peak GTH for the AHU and at the time of the peak Sensible
load for each room (Default)
At the time of the Peak GTH for the AHU and at the time of the peak Sensible
zone load for each room
Both at nominated Time and Month
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
69
The AHU load chart is simply the summation of the zone and room loads plus the
outside air loads and the supply fan heat gain
If there is only one room on each zone, then the first two options give the same
result.
Time and Month
Time and Month of the AHU and room load chart printout in the results. Time is
on a 24 hour clock basis. If the CARRIER weather data corrections are used (ie.
not the standard location number or File) JUN, JUL, AUG in the southern
hemisphere (or DEC, JAN, FEB in the northern hemisphere) cannot be entered.
HU
H
1
pjffll
QliS
GmdRCHP L
: Sind RCHP2
I Grnd RCHP3_
i Gmd RCHP4
VAV First
VAV Typical
VAV Top___
malign
IBKKMBi
m
Mi
^mam
%
DT
l)
!)T
DT
DT
DT
it i
! B.P.FacUit U. 15
j B.P.Factoi ■ (1.15
15
0
]jU^actoi
jB.JP. Factor 015
j B-P.Factor 0 15
j BLp'Factqi' 015
1 B.P.Factot 0 15
5j__
ikW i 0.4
Pa
110
X
5_
Z
6
S
Z
Hi
J5j__ijRoom Pk
I
5
5
.5.
5
5
A
3 i 1
4lRnoni Pk
Jjjtoom Pk
4.! Room Pk
4j Room Pk
4]Room Pk
4 j Room Pk
Fig 4-30E The AHU-Coil Tab Page with Show All
4-40
The Zone and Room Tab Page
On this Tab Page general information for each room including floor area, ceiling
height etc. is entered and if there are zones in the AHU and multiple rooms in a
zone, details of how the air is to be distributed to each room. Refer Fig 4-40A. If
‘Show All’ is selected the data for all zones appears in columns see Fig 4-40C.
If ‘All Single Zone/Room Units’ has been selected on the Projects Tab Page, the
Zone panel on the left of Fig 4-40A will not be present and the Room Title defaults
to the AHU Title. Also the outside air is entered on the AHU Tab Page and the
extra items on the toolbar (to the right of the Add New AHU button) described in
clause 4-10 (which are no longer applicable) do not appear.
iAL
AHU - Coil
.....—Zone & Room Description- -- - - Zone ■ -
Zone Number
Number off
rr
Title jornTShopi
1 !
Number off i
Floor Aroa (in*) 190
Air distribution
based on
to
rooms
|load~3
Ceiling Height (mm) i2000
Storage Mass (kg/m£) f
S St Mass calculated j3BB
Infiltration air changes/hr j
Vapour gain (kW)
Outside Air
|l/s per person jn §) Value
(Direct To Hoorn)
Extracted Air from Room
litres/sec iioo
Spill to: | North Typical Floor
Minimum Supply Air Quantity
...Thermostat Location
P Return Air
r Thermostat in This Room
r~ 3va|ue i
Supply Duct Gain_______ __
% Heat Gain h
% Leakage Loss jl
External Gain (kW) |
Fig 4-40A The Zone and Room Tab Page
If All Single Zone/Room Units on the Project Tab Page has been checked, then
some of the items on this Tab Page are not relevant and are omitted from the Tab
Page to simplify the input.
70
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
The items on the Zone Panel are:
Zone Number
The current zone number of the current room.
t
Number off
The number of similar zones. In the calculations the program when accumulating
AHU loads, air quantities, etc., multiplies the zone loads etc. by n where n is
Number off.
Air Distribution to Rooms based on
This allows the user to nominate whether the zone air quantities to rooms are to
be apportioned in each zone according to the individual peak room sensible loads
or floor area.
VAV Turn Down %
The Turn Down in CAMEL is the minimum air quantity delivered by the VAV box
divided by the maximum air quantity expressed as a percentage. However the
VAV box is assumed never to turn down to less than the outside air quantity so if
a value for the turn down is not entered or if the outside air exceeds the minimum
determined by the entered turn down percentage, the outside air quantity is taken
as the minimum. [10 to 100]
Main Input Panel items are:
Title
An appropriate title comprising letters or numbers up to 20 characters in length.
Number off
The number of similar rooms in this zone. In the calculations the program when
determining zone loads etc., multiplies the room loads etc. by m where m is the
Number off.
Floor Area (m2) #
Total room floor area (m2). This is used in determining air change rates and
check figures.
Ceiling Height (mm) #
Room ceiling height in mm. Only used for calculating air change rates and check
figures. Refer pp.94, 95 of DA9. Value entered must be greater than 10.0 mm.
Storage Mass (kg/m2). #
Mass per unit area of floor in kg/m2. This is used to determine storage load
factors. (Refer Table 6, p.26 of DA9). A value must be entered if glass or lighting
loads exist.
The storage mass is determined by summing the total mass of the external walls
and roofs in the zone and the total mass of any partitions, floors, and ceilings
adjacent to unconditioned spaces. If any partitions, floors or ceilings are adjacent
to conditioned spaces or if the floor is carpeted, use half the mass for those
areas. For more details see the notes under Table 10 in DA9.
Provision is made for the user to calculate the storage mass from all the room
components that add mass and to use this calculator, the right mouse is clicked
on the field headed “Calc” in Show All and “St mass calculated” in Show Single.
Any entered value of storage mass is used in preference to the calculated value.
i... .
See Storage Mass Calculator at the end of this clause.
Storage Mass -Calculated
When the mouse is right clicked on this field, the Calculate Storage Mass (see
below) form appears where the user can calculate the storage mass for this room.
Any components such as walls, windows, partitions, etc that have been entered
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
71
for the current room, are automatically inserted in the form when it is selected and
the user can then add other components such as furniture, extra partitions that
don’t contribute to the thermal load, etc.
If a user enters a value in the Storage Mass field above, this is used in preference
to the calculated value. If a storage mass has not been entered in the field above,
then the calculated value is used.
If components contributing to the storage mass are changed, (e.g. an external
surface dimension or material or a partition area or the room area), the
corresponding value in the storage mass calculator is only updated if the user
right clicks the mouse on the “Calc” field. However warning messages are
displayed when any changes that affect the calculation are made.
The Recalculate St Mass button (when in “Show All”) causes all the existing
calculated values of storage mass to be re-calculated.
Infiltration Air Changes/hr
Infiltration due to wind forces of outside air into conditioned zone entered as air
changes/hour. Refer Table 44 pages 94-95 of DA9.
I
[
Vapour Gain (kW)
Latent heat gain in kW due to water vapour transmission through the walls, etc.
Refer Table 43, p.88 of DA9.
Outside air
1
This is only available if Outside air on the AHU Tab Page is set to ‘Enter at
rooms’. The selection list is for the units for outside air quantity which may be
selected from:
Air Changes / hour (>0.0 to 25.0)
Fixed air quantity in L/s (>0.0)
L/s per m2 of floor area (>0.0 to 10.0)
L/s per person (>0.0 to 20.0)
No Outside air (blank)
When All Single Zone/Room Units is checked % supply (>0 to 100) appears on
this selection list in lieu of the outside air entry on the AHU Tab Page.
iu
Value
Value of the outside air quantity according to the units selected in the outside air
units drop down list. Refer pp.94 and 95 of DA9 and AS 1668.
When a profile is entered for people and the units are L/s per person, the air
quantity is based on the maximum number of people in the profile.
Careful thought should be given to return duct gains when entering a large outside
air proportion, as this may lead to low return air quantities absorbing relatively
------- Outside Air to AS1668-2012 Building Category
I
Offices
Occupancy Type
I Office areas
Value
Units l/s Per Person
Cancel
9;
[
10
fipply j'
Fig 4-40B Outside Air Selection
high return duct gains, producing unrealistic high return air temperatures.
Allowable ranges are listed under units above.
When the right mouse symbol to the left of the selection list is clicked, an “Outside
72
[
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
Air (to AS1668-2012 Selection Panel” appears displaying the required outside air
quantity for different occupancy types according to AS 1668 - 2012. First the
Building Category is selected and then in the second selection list the occupancy
type and outside air quantity is selected. In this second selection list the floor area
per person according to AS1668 is also displayed for information.
At the bottom of the panel are three buttons:
Cancel - this closes the selection panel
Help - provides help on this panel
Apply - Inserts the Units and value in the Outside air Fields
.. — Extracted Air from Room litres/sec i-foo
Spill to: • North Typical Floor
"V I
Extracted Air from Room
Litres/sec
r"
This allows for the entry of an air quantity to be extracted from the room. An
example would be a fume exhaust hood in the room. The program assumes that
an amount of room air equal to the outside air quantity entering the AHU is all
exhausted from the rooms in proportion to the supply air quantity. The user
entered extracted air in this situation does not affect the calculations.
When the outside air to the AFIU is pre-treated with a heat exchanger however
either directly (AHU Tab) or via a pre-conditioner with a heat exchanger, the air
exhausted through the heat exchanger will be reduced by the nominated
extracted air and if this results in a significant difference between the incoming
outside air and the outgoing exhaust air, then the efficiency of the heat exchanger
may be reduced.
Note that if the outside air is supplied direct to the rooms on an AHU (nominated
on the AHU Tab), a heat exchanger cannot be added directly to the AHU but a
heat exchanger can be specified on any preconditioner pre-conditioning the direct
outside air.
Spill To:
!
This allows the nominated extracted air quantity to "spill" into another air
conditioned room. If an air quantity is not nominated the program uses by default,
the total outside air (via the supply air through the AHU or “direct” into the room).
The user simply selects the room (from the selection list) into which the exhaust
air is to spill. An example of this is a shop that spills air into the central Mall of a
Shopping Centre. If a room is not nominated the entered extracted air is
exhausted to outside (e.g. an exhaust hood) or to adjacent internal areas in the
building such as duct risers, ceiling spaces, etc.
Extracted air cannot be spilled into another room that has extracted air. Nor can
air be extracted from a room that has air extracted into it.
If a heat exchanger is fitted to the AHU either directly (AHU Tab) or on a
preconditioner serving this AHU, the nominated extracted air may reduce the
exhaust air passing through the heat exchanger and if this results in a significant
difference between the incoming outside air and the outgoing exhaust air, then
the efficiency of the heat exchanger may be reduced.
Minimum Supply Air Quantity
Minimum supply air quantity to be delivered to the room. The minimum supply air
is taken as the larger of the required outside air or the entered minimum supply
air. The options available, with the allowable ranges in parenthesis, are:
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
73
r
Air Changes rate [0.0 to 60.0]
Fixed L/s [>0.0]
L/s per m2 [0.0 to 20.0]
Note that with muiti zone or multi room systems, if the air quantity is increased in
any room because it is less than the minimum, the air quantity in all rooms and
zones on that AHU will be increased because the leaving coil temperature needs
to be increased. The exception to this is with face and bypass systems and VAV
with reheat systems where the increase only applies to the specific zone. For a
detailed explanation see Minimum Air Quantity in clause 7-40.
r
r
r
Supply Duct Gains
Heat gain to supply ducts.
% Heat Gain
Heat gain due to conduction through the ducts. Refer DA9 pp 106-109.
Allowable range is 0 to 20%
% Leakage Loss
Heat gain allowance for air leakage. Refer DA9 pp 109-111. Range is 0 to 20%
External Gain (kW)
Supply duct external heat gain in kW. This item is for any external heat gains
such as solar loads on exposed supply air ducts which can be expressed in kW
rather than a percentage gain. Draw through fan heat gain can also be entered
as a direct kW load, if known, rather than a % of room sensible heat.
[
Return Air Room
Connected to Return Air Room
This connects the current room to the Return Air Room on this AHU such that the
return air from this room returns to the AHU picking up heat from the fabric and
internal loads entered in the R.A.Room
-----Thermostat Location —
f* Return Duct
Room
Thermostat Location
Radio buttons to select whether the thermostat controlling the zone supply air
temperature is located in one of the rooms on this zone or in the return air duct
from the zone. It is only available for single zone systems (Single Zone Heating &
Cooling, RCHP and Evaporative Cooling systems) because in multi zone systems
the thermostat is normally located in the return air stream for the zone.
I
Zone S
u
■Ml vifilr.
■
■I
• Zona & Roam Description
Recalculate St Mass j
m
»
PSHSf
9
■
■
ggsrej
N
I Ciful MiUfil
: i !(m>
> f rflo.
‘hop
giGind;
41G ifrtl. S ’
3 I I fIM)
(jfttJ Itiupl
j 1 nw>n
, t i oao
w~
r
SinfSShapi,
3! A Hijcn
fi
gg
t UM>
i LOAD
AREA'
Alii A
J'j Drain fj,
K
Mf
:351Cei
af«t
~30 : 280Qi
“ab?'.' 2800;
30 2000;
%
11 In.
'£j
I>.j ,t..l I li 'ir
l,|,nll
smm IBBBI
___
gfSS
ST '2800'
•150:
150:
15
350j
350
".54V''pml
28aT"2Sflbi
-lie
■m’:
251
vl.1.51
I/' fi«’i ('<*(s.firi;7.m
!/’: r>» i jwiiun '715:
IT
1135)
T0|
10
"d
o f f1 «*r •»r •
10 f cntfi* ypicaBi
t*j t1 iV'o 1 vji1 j r
lit
l/* pe» persisn
!/• prj pu r.n
Ul
EIIlEiHIliill
r.fl r„vr.t:<- lyji,-.j|
i no
r_
f
r
|
Fig 4-40C The Zone and Room Tab Page - Show all
Recalculate St Mass
74
Recalculate Storage Mass Button
This recalculates the storage mass for all rooms where the storage mass has
previously been calculated. If items that affect the calculation of the storage
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
!
mass, such as external surfaces and windows, partitions and floors, floor area,
etc, have been changed, warning messages are displayed indicating that the
calculated value for particular rooms may need to be recalculated. This can be
done by re-entering the storage mass calculator form for the particular room.
Alternatively by selecting this button calculated values for all rooms that had
previously been calculated are recalculated.
n
Calculate Storage Mass Form
This form provides a means of calculating the storage mass of a room which is
used by CAMEL to estimate the thermal time lag of the heat transmitted into and
out of a thermal space.
At the top of the form is a button “Reset Defaults” which allows the user to rest
some of the defaults on this form. The Reset Defaults Button and Form is detailed
at the end of this topic.
3,-~ge N'a."Reset Defaults
External Surfaces (Walls and Roofs}
JO
Stttf
4jTft
i
|
J.O J0.5 fJeof}
1ft
x
1—
I mini
360
300
msm
2'J
;-
>
■■si
■i:.:
3
mm
?l.
Floors —
0.5
if®-.3
3
Mil
!
i*
II
!
m
i\
\
.HIS
f. -
IIIlgsEII§{
t1 in
unfli'rl.'.i1
ling
id
486
370
■ t
sAA; [ilia's L"omrr-s:r? ; 3n.in vinyl tiles
r, !;Si
./h
atio
+1 X ] © i
005
m
sll.;.... :JfflilnilfillllsISlSill
mwBBKKm WBrnumSmSSmBm
alBB—
- :.rW
\ 'ZM
ins
■
30
i Mi :;i.~s Cor:i’:-il :
i
i.
aIES9BEs
■
20S
—
.v
.u
BB
:»-.o
.ii
3S0G
— Furnitures and Others —
JK,
i s :* i■■
a
i
i :
!
i
-[sr.'s *j
Tool
■ ,w*
£. 1 iGkl U|j
Total Mass
30861
Floor Area
CancelJ
90
Storage Mass I
343
Apply
Fig 4-40D Calculate Storage Mass Form
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
75
The Form is divided into four sections:
External Surfaces (Walls and Roofs)
Floor
Ceilings and Partitions
Furniture and Others
At the bottom of the form is:
Total Mass - The sum of the mass of all items
Floor Area - This is the room floor area as entered on the Zones and Rooms screen
Storage Mass - The Total Mass of all items divided by the room floor area - This value
can be inserted into the Storage Mass field on the Zones and Rooms screen by hitting the
Apply Button.
[
Cancel Button - Closes the form and clears all the extracted and entered data
Help Button - Help on this for screen
Apply Button - If there are no errors on the form (No red faces on all three
sections), selecting Apply will insert this calculated value in the Storage Mass field
on the Zones and Rooms screen
The Tool Bar Buttons are:
Add - Adds another item (floor, partition etc.). In the case of floors or ceilings and partitions
these are added after those that were entered on the Partitions Tab Page.
Delete - Deletes the item where the cursor is located (added items only)
Validate - An indication if there are errors (red face) or not (green face) in the data entered
in this panel. Left clicking the red face provides a list of the errors
[
External Surfaces (Walls and Roofs)
This includes the External surfaces entered on the External Screen.
The listed items are (with items extracted from other screens or generated by the
program) in italics:
Row ID - Not editable, inserted by the program
Surface Number - This is the Surface number of each External Surface entered on the
External Surfaces screen for this room. The surface number is extracted from the
External Surfaces screen and is repeated for each additional window on the
surface.
Exposure - This Is:
•
•
•
SUN etc) for the surface
the surface azimuth angle or orientation (N, NE
"WINDOW" if there is a window in the first column for the surface
The surface azimuth angle followed by (win) if the surface is all window
•
+Wind if it is an extra window on the surface
[
Type - This is the wall or roof type for a surface or the window type for a window
Area (m2) - The calculated net area of the External wall, roof or window
Thickness (mm) - The user entered thickness of the glass if the item is a window. Default
10 mm.
Surface Density (kg/m2) - The surface density of the item. For windows it is assumed to
be 2500 kg/m3 times the glass thickness in meters
Factor - A factor to discount the storage affect of a particular item if the surface of the
material prevents all the heat falling on the surface conducting into the surface.
For example if the surface is covered with a soft material such as carpet or
acoustic lining the factor might be 0.5. For partitions ceilings or floors that have an
air conditioned space on the exterior, the factor should be multiplied by a further
0.5
76
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
i
The default is 1.0 for external walls indicating fully absorbent wall and 0.5 for
internal partitions, floors and ceilings.
Mass - This is the total mass of the item calculated from the Area and surface density
Floors
This includes any Internal floors entered on the Partitions Screen with provision
for the user to add any others that do not affect the heat transfer but add to the
total room mass.
The listed floors are:
•
those entered on the Partitions Screen under Floor for this room
•
when the floor area of any floor on the Partitions Screen is less than the Room
Floor Area on the Zones & Rooms Screen (e.g. when there is no heat
transmission but they add to the storage mass), an additional floor (+Floor) is
generated by the program such that the total floor area of all floors entered for
this room equals the Room Floor Area
• any User entered floors
The items for each floor are:
Row ID - Not editable, inserted by the program
Title - This is the type of floor (Floor, +Floor or User entered floor) Note that the Title
must be unique
Material - For a floor extracted from the Partitions Screen, if a material has been selected
for the U-value, the material is listed (along with its surface density). For a +Floor
or User entered Floor, the user can enter their own material description (and
surface density) or the material (and surface density) can be selected from the
CAMEL list of materials by right clicking the mouse.
Area (m2) - The surface area of the Floor entered on the Partitions screen or calculated
by the program so that the total area of floors matches the value for this room on
the Zones & Rooms Screen. Or entered here by the user for added floors .
Surface Density (kg/m2) - The surface density of the Floor if a material was selected for
the U value or entered here by the user
Factor - A factor to discount the storage affect of the floor if the surface finish prevents all
the heat falling on the surface conducting into the surface (for example if the
surface is covered with a soft material such as carpet or acoustic lining) in which
case the factor might be 0.5. If the floor has an air conditioned space on the
exterior side, the factor should be multiplied by a further 0.5
The default is 0.5.
Mass - This is the total mass of the item calculated by the program from the Area
and surface density.
Ceilings and Partitions
This includes any Internal ceilings or partitions entered on the Partitions Screen
with provision for the user to add any others that do not affect the heat transfer
but add to the total room mass.
The listed items are:
Those entered on the Partitions screen for this Room and any user entered extra
ceilings and partitions (e.g. when there is no heat transmission but they add to the
storage mass):
Row ID - Not editable, inserted by the program
Title - This is the type of any ceiling or partition entered on the Partitions screen ( Ceiling,
P1 to P5) or other than these, a Title entered by the user for any additional
ceilings or partitions that the user wishes to include in the mass calculation
Material - For a ceiling or partition extracted from the Partitions Screen, if a material has
been selected for the U-value, the material is extracted (along with its surface
density). For any User entered Ceilings or Partitions, the user can enter their own
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
77
i
material description (and surface density) or the material (and surface density)
can be selected from the CAMEL list of materials by right clicking the mouse.
""
Area (m2) - The surface area of the Ceiling or Partition entered on the Partitions screen or
entered here by the user for additional ceilings and partitions.
Surface Density (kg/m2) - The surface density of the Ceiling or Partition if a material was
selected for the U value or entered here by the user
!
Factor - A factor to discount the storage affect of the ceiling or partition if the surface
finish prevents all the heat falling on the surface conducting into the surface (for
example if the surface is covered with a soft material such as carpet or acoustic
lining) in which case the factor might be 0.5. If the ceiling or partition has an air
conditioned space on the exterior side, the factor should be multiplied by a further
0.5
The default is 0.5.
Mass - This is the total mass of the item calculated from the Area and surface density.
Furniture and Others
This provides for entry of any other items such as furniture that do not affect the
heat transfer but add to the total room mass.
Copy - this copies the data for “Furniture and Others” from another (selected) room to the
current room.
1
The listed items are:
Row ID - Not editable, inserted by the program
Title - A descriptive title of the Furniture item or other mass being included.
Mass/Unit Floor Area (kg/m2) - The mass per unit room floor area.
Mass - This is the total mass of the item ie, Floor area x Mass per unit Floor Area, where
the Floor Area is as entered on the Zones and Rooms screen. Alternatively if the
Mass/Unit Floor Area is not entered the total mass of the item can be entered
directly.
Reset Defaults
—--------------J Reset Defaults Button
The defaults on this form are initially set for each new project with the values from
the Project Defaults Form which is accessed via File>Project Defaults on the Main
screen. This button allows the user to re-set these defaults for this project (run of
CAMEL) only. If values are changed at any time, the storage mass for all rooms
will be recalculated using these changed values.
Re.-et Default Pararr
[
Esternal Surfaces —
Glass Thickness (mm)
10
Factor Walls & Windows
0.5
“''
Ftoors
Surface Density kg/m2
10
I
i .9 ■
Factor Roofs
0.5
-|240
Factor
0.5
0
0.5
0 25
r'
CsiifewD i Parifthia
Factor
Cancel
_____{
fI
OK :i
Fig 4-40E Reset Defaults (for The Storage Mass Calculator) Form
78
I
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
Reset Default Parameters Form
This Form rests the defaults on the Storage Mass Calculator Form for all rooms in
the current project. The items for which defaults can be set are:
i
Glass Thickness (for Windows in the External Surfaces)
i
The Factor to be applied to Walls and Windows (in the External Surfaces)
The Factor to be applied to Roofs (in the External Surfaces)
The Surface Density and Factor for Floors
The Factor to be applied to Partitions
4-50 External (Walls & Roofs) Tab Page
External (Floor Area 5*3)
Add Surface
Add Window
Drag mouse on graphic to rotate; right click to restore to defaults
Draw p”
Exposure
W
Height (mm)
3200
3200
3000
Width (mm)
i I'ilU
3000
..wion
§) Shad Sch
lllirmii
Mill
% to R/A
Wall / Root
I
Type
3
v/11
i;
Absorptivity
a
wmmmmm
Wind/Sky
Type
Sing
Q
Number
1
Direction V/H
Shad Sch
am
:
V
\[
:i v
Dist between
i mm
Min
V-offset (mm)
llllill
300
H-offset (mm)
I null
0000
Ad) Shading
Distance (m)
Height (m)
Width (m)
jJ"
Left Shift (m)
Depth (m)
f
:.::j W Overhang V L Reveal R Reveal
3*1
JLJ f~ {OilEi Zoom jJ_|... ......... .
jlSurface
t
4-50A The External Tab Page With A Surface with Two Different Window Types
On this Tab Page external walls (and roofs) with their windows (and skylights) are
entered as a series of separate surfaces (columns), a separate surface (column)
being required if the section of wall has a different orientation, is of different
construction or has a different percentage of it’s heat gain to a ceiling return air
plenum or ceiling space.
Each surface can only include one wall type and any number of one or more
window types. Both the external surface, including the window(s), and the
window(s) themselves can have shading schemes. The program calculates the
shading effect of each shading surface at each hour on the wall (or roof) and each
window (or skylight) ie. the shadow from all shading schemes is determined on all
components comprising the external surface (refer clause 7-90 for further
details). Shading devices on one external surface however, have no influence on
any other external surface.
1
t
L
The External Tab Page has a graphic display which displays the particular surface
where the cursor is located. When in the upper part of the Tab Page it will display
the wail, windows and their shades (reveals and overhangs). When in the lower
part of the Tab Page a plan and elevation of any adjacent shading is displayed.
This graphic can be turned on or off by checking the DRAW box at the top left of
the Tab Page. The graphic can be rotated by clicking and dragging with the
mouse: right clicking will take it to the default position. The default position is set
in the configuration - colours. (Refer clause 2-50)
Note that in this Tab Page in Show Single mode the = sign causes the next non
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
79
blank field to the left in the current row to be copied into the field where the cursor
is currently located while in Show All mode the = sign copies the field above.
Note that if the surface is all window, then the surface Height, Width, Shading
Scheme, % to R/A, Wall/Roof Type and Absorptivity are not entered.
When the ‘Show All’ is clicked the external surfaces for all rooms are shown in
columns as shown in Fig 4-50B.
EXTERNAL
•External
.
■
0
Arid Window
Add SiiiUicc
BOH
1
glplljjl
—
Kg
;iW8t.
4 GmdnnHM
1 (>!«»••' 'Hmp
I far rid Shop 1
1 bend &hop4
:|WeB'
, WtlG
1 V/tlG
li
i N«»itiivn n.i
TW86
t
7
Gin.IRnHP?
VAV f ii.-!
:
,J
:
..'
.. {
Lcjjt IbT Moor
J Wo»l 1ST Hoot
ft
4 Cer.tKi 1ST f lo‘)t
it loyur
! Nntlli Typicol
Oft
t F.i.t Typreol Floor
3 W«.l l vpK*« t
11
32u0i
(
;|
mmi'.
.7|:
.
I
;7|sifjg:
H.
;7|:
Jj:;
3;
'IWtiG
|W8S
•IW4J
7? ‘ •
1W4J
iiW43
?W4d
j W43
1
4 C«nli« Ippieul
/lV. ■
:;v<3
'W4T
(i VAV Typr-Ltl
■ to totsSe
n tick a
B
1 C>rrnl fitiOfil
I tiiml RCUP I
s
@
0
4
pp
1-
iMm
?:l5m
m
RE
■(
ill??
n
I
j
fv L r,’f//e£t Tv R Reveal
r oufts
Fig 4-50B The External Tab Page - Show All
Copy and Paste can also be used to copy from one column to another.
Deletes the data (column or with Show All the row) where the cursor is
located. If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and any additional
windows attached to this surface will be deleted. If the cursor is on an
additional window, only the additional window will be deleted
N the
Copy Surface or Additional Window- Copies the data (column) where
cursor is located. If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and any
additional windows attached to this surface will be copied. If the cursor is
on an additional window, only the additional window will be copied
Paste Surface or Additional Window - Paste the surface currently in
the clipboard to where the cursor is located on the External screen as
nominated on the Paste External Form (see fig. 4-50J) detailed at the end
of this sub-chapter.
Add-Saifafee;:-.| In either mode an extra surface is added to an existing room by clicking
the Add Surface’ button (Column in Show Single or Row in Show All).
[ Add Window
This button adds a new additional window to the current surface. When
the additional window is added the “+ Wind” is inserted for the Azimuth
and only window data (from Window Type to H-offset) can be entered in
this column.
Draw 0 Draw - a checkbox that turns the graphic on or off (when a single space is
displayed) to allow the user to see more columns (up to 9) at a time
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page:Exposure #
For walls (with or without windows) enter:- N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW or
an azimuth angle (±360°) (refer Fig. 4-50C)
The angle from building north (0°) to the outward normal to the surface, with
clockwise rotation positive. The azimuth angle for a north facing wall in both the
southern hemisphere and the northern hemisphere is 0°
80
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
’
!
.
s
r‘t
/
1 L
i
4
■
.*
SE
.
i
.1; .'Ij.'i :.u. l.’i*;
l*S; ■ :05;;
>E ~i*:0: s:5
'* ODj
$
»
|
-
4
•
,
;ls
5
■ iT*
5.
P'.'M
Fig. 4-50C Exposure Selection Form
If a rotation angle has been entered (on the Project Tab Page), the building
rotation angle is added to the azimuth angle entered here to give the true azimuth
angle as indicated by the north pointer. Refer Fig 4-50C.
For roofs (with or without skylights) enter: -H
for a shaded horizontal roof, followed by the azimuth angle of the
roof imagining it is standing upright with any overhang at the top.
for horizontal a roof in sun all the time
-SUN
- SHADE for horizontal a roof in shade all the time
- SPRAY for horizontal a sprayed roof
- WATER for horizontal a water covered roof
Note: CAMEL only models horizontal roofs.
Note : Clicking the Right Mouse Button pops up a selection form (fig. 4-50C), from
which any of the above can be selected using the mouse. Also if the selection for
a roof is made through this selection box and it is the first roof in this zone, the
program determines the roof dimensions (height and width) as the square root of
the entered floor area.
I
Height (mm)# (N/A if surface is all window)
Height of the external surface in mm or for a roof with shading it is the dimension
parallel to the direction of exposure. If the wall is all window, leave blank.
i
Width (mm)# (N/A if surface is all window)
Width of the external surface in mm or for a roof with shading it is the dimension
perpendicular to the selected orientation. If the wail is all window, leave blank.
Shading Scheme (N/A if surface is all window)
Cross reference to a shading scheme entered in the Shading Tab Page that is to
be applied to this external surface. This shading scheme shades the whole
surface including any windows in the surface. It cannot be entered for roofs
unless the H format is used.
I
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
§i
81
Clicking the Right Mouse Button pops up a selection list from which the user can
select a previously entered Shading scheme, or can edit or enter a new shading
scheme (Refer fig. 4-50A). This is achieved by clicking the Edit button on the
selection box upon which the user will be dropped into the Shading Tab Page.
r
Shading scheme dimensions (Distance, Right side, Left side, etc.) are taken from
the outside of the surface and shading scheme, reveals and overhangs on roofs
project vertically.
% to Return Air (N/A if surface is all window)
Percentage of the total surface load (including any window load in this surface) to
be treated as a return duct gain. Note if window loads are not to be included, the
surface can be broken into 2 surfaces, one with the wall above the false ceiling
and one (with windows) below the false ceiling line. However remember that
shading devices on one external surface do not have any effect on any other
external surface. (The allowable range is 0 to 100% and the default is 0).
m
mmSSm
m ■HPhH
—
8
t:
L i- fViH
[S. Dei.
240
2.8
12.8
.62
225i 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, Wrnm plasterboard
2.25?
230) 110 brick, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.522
d.-ValUc
SPEC
ROOF
W15
W5
I
[
1
I
AnoJi? i I
. !,■ -■.:!
Fig 4-50E The Pop-up Selection List for Wall/Roof Type
H
, i
■'V
<T
(M
h
v>
1
L fI
r,
i•
-■'C
v Lice*.
;
.
..
;•
.
■
:?.C
T~.
Fiat©
f;
i'
1
T-1
i
rm'■t
■X;
WMi\
i
Ml 2 x 110 double brick
15m plaster
M2 2 k 110 double brick
lOnn plasterboard
113 11D brick, Birgap,
Ml 110 brief, Rot ;
................ lasterboard
gFg
asterboard
brick, Ref airgap,
H7 110 brick, Birgap, 110 brick
15m plaster
M8 110 brick, Birgap, 110 brick,
IB 110 brick, Birgap, 90 Ul concrete block
15m plaster
block,
Mlfl 110 brick, Birgap, 90 LH concrete
Mil 110 brick, Birgap, 90 fll concrete block
plasterblock,
15m
MM ujr.cn:to
1112 110 brick. Bifiiap. 90
U Volue ............. ;..... fS^WmSBF™'*”
.--.i
Jill
jjjfjjj
—*
m
mBWm
ROOF
!**
Surface Burts
■■■
ifl
■1
■SB
mm
EQ
m
mwt
I
i 2.0
Fig 4-50F The Full Wall/Roof Pop-up selection
82
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
l
r
Wall/Roof
Type # (N/A if surface is all window)
Either a type from the Walls Tab Page or from the standard list of walls and roofs
can be entered directly or alternatively selected from a list accessed by right
clicking the mouse. First a list of all previously referenced walls appears together
with those entered in the Walls Tab Page (fig. 4-50E). If the Show All button on
this list is clicked, access to the standard list is provided (fig 4-50F).
s
A standard wall or roof is selected by selecting the appropriate type (Double brick,
Hollow concrete block, etc.) then:
For walls:
A drop down list allows selection of
all walls for the selected wall type
•
all single skin walls for the selected wall type
•
all double skin walls for the selected wall type
•
If the last item is selected then a series of radio buttons appears from which
the user can further restrict the displayed list by insulation type.
For roofs
Either click the ‘Show All’ check box to obtain a full listing for the selected
roof type, or select from ‘no insulation’, 'R1.5', ‘R2.01 or ‘R2.5 insulation’ to
obtain a restricted list.
The thermal resistance, conductivities and the densities used in compiling
the standard list are listed in Appendix D.
When the standard walls/roofs are called up from the external Tab Page, the
program also displays the user entered walls/roofs so that the user can select
from either, or if required, edit the user entered walls.
Absorptivity # (N/A if surface is all window)
The absorptivity of wall or roof. Typical values are listed on p.58 of DA9. If the
wall is all glass leave this field blank.
Note that allowance should be made for surfaces being dirty or tarnished.
Window /Skylight
Type
Window/Skylight type identifier from the Windows Tab Page. Skylights cannot be
entered on SPRAY or WATER covered roofs.
Clicking the right mouse button pops up a list from which the user can select a
window type or if required edit an existing or add a new window type.
Number of windows (# if window type entered)
The number of windows or skylights in this external surface.
Direction V/H
This is the direction in which the windows are to be spaced when more than one
window type. V indicates windows are spaced vertically, H horizontally
Shading Scheme
Cross reference to a shading scheme entered in the Shading Tab Page that is to
be applied to this window. Shading schemes for skylights can only be entered if
the roof EXPOSE uses the H format. Shading scheme dimensions are taken
from the outside of each window.
Dist Between
Distance between the windows or skylights if there are more than one (mm). If
they abut then this field is left blank.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
83
V-offset (mm)
The distance from the bottom of the surface to the lower edge of the window or
skylight (mm).
H-offset (mm)
The distance from the left side of the surface to the left edge of the left most
window or skylight (mm).
Note that if there is no shading on the wall or window the window does not need to
be located in the wall ie. Distance and V and H-Offsets need not be entered
Add Surface j Add Window ■
Draw W
0 Exposure
i1
v/
Height (mm)
320U
3200
Width (mm)
5000
0 Shad Sch
Ohnq
10000
Ohng
R
0
0 >
M /
S /
U /
R /
% to R/A
Waff / Roof
Type
Absorptivity
/
/
£
*
C
W8S
E
Wind / 3'iy
Type
\\
\\
\\\
\
\\\
\\
PLAN
SsrmM
'.Mil
Humber
1
Direction V/H
I;
§) Shad Sch
Dist between
V-offset (mm)
2200
H-offset (mm)
r
ELEVATION
i
Adj Shadinc
Distance (m)
in
Height (m)
in h
; >i
Width (m)
iu
Left Shift (m)
20
;|
1
;$
Depth (m)
: fi
<
►I
Fig 4-50G The External Tab Page with Adjacent Shading Surface.
f
! i
Adjacent shading
|
This is the details of shading from adjacent buildings, etc. Note the units here are
all metres not millimetres.
«
&
WIDTH
A
DEPTH
I
i i
■DISTANCE HEIGHT
LEFT SHIFT
i-ve)
4
Fig 4-50H Shading from an Adjacent Building
i
%
Distance #
The distance between the surface & the adjacent building or shading surface (m)
Height#
The height to the top of the adjacent building or shading surface measured from
the bottom of the surface being shaded (m).
Width #
The width of the adjacent building or shading surface (m).
84
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
■!
Left Shift
The distance the shading surface projects past the left end of the surface being
shaded (negative if the adjacent building is within the left hand end of the shaded
surface (m).
Depth
The depth of the adjacent building or shading surface (m). The depth can be
negative in which case the side walls of the adjacent building form a U shaped
building. (Refer Fig 4-501)
'\Adist
/>"| i.' jAHITE\ '
ill
A&ECTH'
(-ve}\
AWIdE
r ■
Adjacent Shading
Fig 4-501 Shading from a courtyard (Adjacent Building with negative depth equal
to distance)
gftiJ
Copy Data From-------------- ;------------- -AMU 1, Zone 1„ Grad Shopl, Surface
To
Mew Surface 5 on AHU 1, Zone 1, Grnd Shopl
Overwrite
(• Insert New
S' including ail esstra windows
Cancel
OK
Fig 4-50J Paste External Form
Paste External Form
On this form the action required when the Paste button ®1 is selected is
detailed. The actions available depends on whether a surface has been copied
into the clipboard or whether an Additional window has been copied:
If a Surface has been copied into the clipboard, the items on the form are:
Copy Data from - AHU N, Zone Z “Room Title” Surface S which
identifies the data currently in the clipboard
To - Surface s on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” if the Overwrite radio
button (below) is selected
To - New Surface on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” if the Insert New radio
button (below) is selected
O Overwrite O Insert New - a selection as to whether the surface in the
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
85
clipboard is to overwrite the surface where the cursor is located or
to Insert the copied surface to a new (additional)surface.
[ ] Include all extra windows - if checked pastes all the extra windows on
the copied surface. If unchecked only copies the surface without
the extra windows
If an Additional window has been copied into the clipboard, the items on the
form are:
i
[
Copy Data from - AHU N, Zone Z “Room Title” Surface S, Window S +
Wn which identifies the data currently in the clipboard
To - Window s + Wn on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” Surface s. if the
Overwrite radio button (below) is selected
To - New Extra Window on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” Surface s. if the
radio button (below) is selected
I
O Overwrite O Insert New - a selection as to whether the additional
window in the clipboard is to overwrite the additional window
where the cursor is or to Insert the copied additional window to a
new additional window on the current surface.
[ ] Include all extra windows - disabled (greyed out); not applicable
4-60 The Partitions Tab Page
[
On this Tab Page details of internal floors, ceilings and partitions that are next to
unconditioned spaces or spaces at a different temperature are entered. This
includes floors above car parks rooms below an unconditioned plant room but
NOT rooms below a roof (which should be entered as an External Surface (see
clause 4-50).
f
Note that in this Tab Page in show single mode the = sign causes the next non
blank field to the left to be copied into the field where the cursor is currently
located while in the show all mode the + sign copied the field above.
If ‘Show All’ is selected the data for all rooms appears in columns as shown in Fig
4-60B.
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page.
.
Area (m*)
ft UVaiue{W/m*.K)
Cool Flag |
mm
■n
—i
I
k:
A
?,
[
Fig 4-60A The Partitions Tab Page
Area (m2) #
The area of the floor, ceiling or partition (m2).
U Value (W/m2.K) #
The summer U Value of the partition, floor or ceiling (W/m2K).
Right clicking the mouse brings up a list extracted from Table 26-28, 33 & 34, pp.
65-71 of DA9. Refer fig. 4-60C.
Winter U values for heating are computed from the summer values - see 7-10
Heating and Cooling Loads for more details
f
86
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[______ AHU____
Coil
r internal
PARTIltONS
Interne! rloor, Csihng ono Puritans
mSSSSS^m
1 GinriRCWM
2 GmdnCHP?
3 Grncl RCHP3
.4 Gintl fil’HP 4
5 VAV Fryjl
23 2.3 P
23 l" 2.3 rP
23: 2.3. P
23! 2.3 ;P
1 Gmd Shopl
I Coffee Shop
GrndShcpS
l
1 Gmd Shop4
1 North 1ST Floor
2 Cast JOT Float
3 Fact 1ST Hoot
4 Centre 1ST Rods
1 North 2ND Ran;
2 Kail 2ND Root
3 West 2ND Hoot
4 Centre 2ND Root
C VAV Second
8
.9
-■:■■■■- r jP^r-p^psifC1mmmmm
§
Ceiling
5 P
5 P
!» P
l.
18
5j!
\i\
'•
18
18
■■
I
1
2.4 P
2.4 P
? 4 P
2.4 P
2.4 A
jj
■i u
\ f»1.2
1
•»
*»
'»
5 P
!> V
5 P
5.P
.5.
2 A
,* A
»• I*
b|
.<
2 A
2 A
?!■
?l
•: 2
b,l>
y
»\? 4 P
2"
2'
I
if.
9.8
I'
ii 51.2
II;
2 4 A
Fig 4-60B The Partitions Tab Page - Show All
Select U-value Form
This form allows for the selection of a U-Value for partitions. At the top of the
form there are three buttons:
Close and return to the Partitions Tab Page
Li Help
Apply
After a selection has been made, clicking this button will transfer the
selected U-value into the U-value field on the Partitions Tab Page.
Below this are four radio buttons to control the extent of items in the selection list
Floors and Ceilings
Partitions 1 to 5
All - for all items
Concrete - for concrete floors
Timber - for timber floors
Chipboard - for chipboard floors.
All - for all items
No Finish - bare construction
Rendered or Plastered one side
Rendered or Plastered both sides
JSJSKSH
I1
Tixbo
I*.
I
i
1
SttfSESSi!
%
\, s ”VJ i i
nil
.?
3§
x e t ;'£fit i ‘is»:
!
r:-r-
wOncio
s
78 17\\ ii
; :J iVl* I
,|
a
:-V: i i-
: • i
n V:
s
l
i
*. f
• wl.
r
lii
•f
■.:
■\rr
i.
.i. -i ■.!*'*
L . .
in
i ti
‘i
i-; s;w*
s
Fig. 4-60C U-Value selection form for Partitions
Then below this depending on the radio button selection typical U-values are
displayed in a selection list with a description of each partition construction.
Cool Flag
(C,P, or A) for the type of temperature difference across the partition when a
cooling load is being calculated
CPA-
Constant temperature on the outside of the partition
for proportion of temperature difference between outside air and the
current space
for temperature to be added (subtracted if negative) to the outside
temperature. The temperature difference is then the outside
i
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
87
f
temperature plus the added temperature minus the room temperature.
Clicking the Right Mouse Button pops up a selection list as shown in Fig.4-60D.
__r_2°c
Ambient
Air Temp.
o 36
Q
!
&
UJ
1
VC
I30
A2.0
UJ
a.
C25.5
P 24
1.5°C
J
Temp
i
6pm
Noon
TIME
6am
f
f
Fig 4-60D C,P or A Options for COOL and HEAT Flag and Value
Value
The value corresponding to the flag above when the program is determining the
cooling load. The allowable ranges are:
-20 to 50
Oto 1
-20 to 20
C
P
A
HEAT Flag & Value
As for COOL Flag & Value. Applied when a heating load is being calculated.
4-70 The Internal Tab Page
x
R
pjij
People "
; -i
;■
.. < i
I *. J
E
\ Moo; Are.-./l'fii-Oi,
Add
I!
.iHi
s!j
Iff
l)l
a
I •
10
j M
»■
i
l:
I
».• »
2.
0 POioi-. lioLrl
1
I
pa
£
I*
Lights .
Add
ij-
I
II
t
1 •
11 •
i * •
iTj
I
!
pi
0 V.'.jll . hr
JEmIwS/j
I
:p
:'!.r r-oio
.
1
• I I. ■ • '1 {", "l11" I ■
:
sa
i
■ i .
p >■
Sens 11
Latent
Steam
Fig 4-70A
f.
i:
I 1%
!'
i-t . i l *.
i • :
i
i:
i
f
i: -*l i i
'/ ’■ -
1-'
1 ■’
The Internal Tab Page With Schedule Selection Box
All internal people, lights and equipment loads are entered in the Internal Tab
Page. If an internal load varies with time, a schedule from the Schedules Tab
Page can be assigned to the load.
88
|
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
t
Up to five people entries and five light entries can be made in the Internal Screen
for each room to cater for example for different people activities or different light
types in the one room. Additional people or lights are added by clicking the Add
buttons. Note that if CAMEL data is being loaded into BEAVER to calculate the
building energy consumption, BEAVER only allows one line of people and lights.
INTERNAL
interna! Heat Loads
Add People
sa
HHHHHRHHi
31
MM ■ JBBDBiiin
*.
Add l.iqhts
****WBW
m
iBi
I
Bnid
Shopl
1
Cofice
Shop
t
1
1
GindShop3
Gmd Shopl
Nudh 151 Root
4 tirnrj ft CUP 4
h VAV first
;1Q
? r.isd 151 Flaoi
3 Wt*sl 1SI Rom
4 Centre 1ST Moor
I
North
[WM
■''WM
18
1«»
WM
1b
S;| WAn*
.i jjW/m2
Floor
? Fttt Yyp.c«jl (low
3 Wctl typical Roor
4 Centre Typical F loo
Fig 4-70B
10
'jW/nj8
Typical
Fk
10
iiW/nf
IWW 15
Ra<
ILT
1b
if.
15
1b
.
,"2'
i
.1
I
rLE
-z.
rn■
m
?
(IF
zi
f-LL
2
a
I
m:
nz
.2:
m
J
nr
3/
W/m*
l\WM
5 Foyer
l> VAV Typical
2
' i;WrW ' To'
i‘W/nf 18
1 Gmd nrnp I
2 Gir.ci HCHP2
3 tjrnrJ RCUP3
HI
1
SB ■
■
m WrriSiam'i
i
ri.n .|
.
%
ri(. j -.
nc !•>.
nc 1
?
The Internal Tab Page - Show All
Any of the internal loads can have a % to return air and this proportion of the load
is then added to the return air load the remainder only being a room load.
Any of the internal loads can have a nominated % for heating and this proportion
of the entered load is then included when calculating the Winter Heating Load. By
default (blank) no (0) % of the internal loads are included when calculating the
Winter Heating Load.
Note that in this Tab Page the = sign causes the next non blank field above to be
copied down into the field where the cursor is currently located.
If ‘Show All’ is selected the data for all rooms appears in columns as shown in Fig
4-70B.
Following is a description of the items on this Tab Page.
People
Units #
Number of people, Floor area per person or people per 10 square metres.
Load #
Maximum number of people, floor area (m2) per person or persons per 10m2 (for
floor area entered on the Zone & Rooms Tab page) occupying zone. Entered
value must be greater than zero. When the mouse is Right clicked & on the Load
field an Occupancy Selection panel appears displaying suggested values from
AS1668 or Table D1.13 from the BCA
The mouse symbol only appears when the cursor is on the Load column for the
first of the five People rows.
Occupancy
■ BCa idbOi.ii
I
J
A;:- ' ri.T Oi'vx:-.,
r
::
LMat*e!
rrr
Apply
Fig 4-70C Occupancy Selection Panel
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
89
This panel displays the required people occupancy types according to either
AS1668 - 2012 or BCA Table D1.13. First the Building Category is selected and
then in the second drop down list the occupancy type and floor area per person
are selected.
i.
At the bottom of the panel are three buttons:
Close - this closes the selection panel
Help - provides help on this panel
Apply - Inserts the Units and Value (under Load) on the first People line.
Note that the right mouse symbol only appears when the cursor is located on
Load and only for the first People row.
Schedule Number
The number of a schedule from the Schedules Tab Page. If left blank, the
maximum number of people are all assumed present during all hours of plant
operation. If the right mouse button is clicked, a selection list as shown in Fig 470A will appear and the user can select a schedule or by clicking Edit drop into
the Schedules Tab Page and edit an existing schedule or add a new schedule.
The schedule title in the next column is displayed when the number is selected.
* .Llivily
■
§isS8
f
L
t:.y v.'f.rk
C 3 - Seated, standing
<" 5 - Walking, seated
rt 6 - Standing, walking slowly
Hod.V'C.'.'.
<" B -Light he net? work
c 9 - Moderate dancing
10 - Walking 1.5 m/s
r Vi -Heayy work
m
V HI
I*
f
§11
■Bill
Office, Hotels
Dept,, Retail Store
Airport T ermmai
Bank
i\ It h h k
llil®
■
:■; £■!
m
f
r
Factory, Ught Work
Hails, Ballrooms
1
1
JJ
l.
Fig 4-70D The People Activity Selection List
% of Return
This is the percentage of the people load that is to be considered as a return duct
gain - highly unlikely with people. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
% for Heating
This is the percentage sensible heat load from People loads that are to be
included when calculating the Winter Heating Load which will be reduced by the
entered percentage times the load. For example if the total people load is 10
people and a percentage of 60% is entered then the winter heating load will be
reduced by the sensible heat load of 6 people. If left blank none of the people
load will be included.
Activity #
A number between 1 and 11 corresponding to the row number in Table 45 p.98 of
DA9. From this the program extracts the sensible and latent heat from people
90
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
(metabolic rate). Clicking on the right mouse button will cause the list from DA9
to be displayed in the selection box illustrated in Fig.4-70D
Lights
Units #
Kilowatts or Watts per m2 of floor area.
Load #
Load from lights (including ballast, etc.) in kW or Watts per m2.
As for people
Schedule Number
% of Return
This is the percentage of the lighting load that is to be considered as a return duct
gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
% for Heating
This is the percentage of the Lighting load that is to be included when calculating
the Winter Heating Load which will be reduced by the entered percentage times
the load. For example if the lighting load is 12 watts/m2 and a percentage of 60%
is entered then the winter heating load will be reduced by 0.6x12 w/nrr If left
blank none of the Lighting load will be included.
Light Type#
The type of lights. This is used in determining the storage load factors for the
lights. Clicking on the right mouse button will cause the selection box illustrated in
Fig.4-70E to appear. Note this does not allow for ballast load (the user should
include any ballast load in the total lighting load).
r .1; ■,
5 * * ! luci: I'soi'u!
.Mi If. ir
ft
it ■
O ->rii!
1 •»r ,* > i i
i !|
; ■ i.:
r 'i
is) "
, ';'i:;';ili-.';> = Vi!fl
.''Sii .rii
Fig 4-70E The Light Type Selection List
Sensible Equipment
Units #
Kilowatts or Watts per m2 of floor area.
Load #
Load from sensible equipment in kW or Watts per m2. Entered value can be
positive or negative to cater for a cooling effect in the space. (Refer Table 46-52,
pp.99 to 107 of DA9).
L
L
Right clicking the Mouse when on the Sensible Load field (the right mouse symbol
I
is displayed above the Load column), a Sensible Load Calculation Panel
appears, to allow the user to calculate and store a list of the components that
make up the Sensible Load in the room. A description is entered, the units (kW or
W/m2) are selected and a value is entered. The units entered may be a mixture of
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
91
kW and W/m2 and when the apply button is clicked the total is applied to the
sensible load in the units selected beside that column.
■■
■■
..
■„
..
mmmm
BSbI
7
'SMBS
•55
m
a
Computefs
Photocopier
■
1
ill
Kilowatts
Kilowatts
1.5
Apply
Fig 4-70F Sensible Load Calculation Panel
r
At the bottom of the panel are four buttons:
Cancel - closes the panel without inserting any information in the Sensible
Load field
Clear - this clears all items in the calculation panel
Help - provides help on this panel
Apply - Calculates the total kW Sensible Load from the entered values and
inserts the value under ‘Load’ for Sensible. If the Units under Sensible
have previously been selected as \A//m2, then the value is calculated in
these units rather than kW.
r
Note that the right mouse symbol only appears when the cursor is located on Load.
Schedule Number
As for people
% of Return
This is the percentage of the sensible equipment load that is to be considered as
a return duct gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
% for Heating
This is the percentage of the Sensible load that is to be included when calculating
the Winter Heating Load which will be reduced by the entered percentage times
the load. If left blank none of the sensible load will be included.
Latent Equipment
Units #
Kilowatts or Watts per m2 of floor area.
Load #
Load from latent equipment in kW or Watts per m2. Entered load can be positive
or negative. (Refer Table 46-52, pp.99 to 107 of DA9).
6:...
Schedule Number
As for people
% of Return
This is the percentage of the latent equipment load that is to be considered as a
return duct gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
Steam
Units #
Grams/second or Watts per m 2 of floor area.
92
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
L,
r"'!
Load #
Steam load in zone in grams/second or Watts per m 2. Entered value must be
greater than zero. Refer p.104 of DA9.
Schedule Number
As for people
% of Return
This is the percentage of the steam load that is to be considered as a return duct
gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
93
r
5 Calculating, Viewing and Printing
Results
r
['
5-10 Calculate
This causes the calculations to be performed. The data however must first be
saved to a data file selected by the user. If there are no errors, the program will
proceed with the calculations with a progress bar indicating how the calculations
are proceeding. When completed the results are displayed.
5-20 The VIEW Screens
When the calculations are completed (or if there are errors) the program writes the
results out to a series of output (ASCII text) files, with the same name as the data
file, but with extensions.
r
I
OUT - Main Results
ASY - AHU Summaries
ZSS - Zones and Rooms
TLO - Load Tables
TAQ -Air Quantity Tables
AIR - Outside Air Summary
SLC - Room Load Charts
TDR - Room Temperatures
REI - Input Errors
REH - Zone Reheat
TOA - Outside Air Loads
PSY - Psychrometrics
f-
The program then drops the user into a Screen, where the results can be viewed
and/or printed under a series of Tab Pages.
!
Project (refer Clause 5-30)
AHU’s (refer Clause 5-40)
Zones and Rooms (refer Clause 5-50)
Load Charts (refer Clause 5-60)
Printing (refer Clause 5-70)
Tables (refer Clause 5-80)
On the first four tab pages, check boxes allow selection of the specific results
required for viewing or printing.
The Printing Tab Page contains all the currently selected specific output in the first
four tab pages ready for printing. From here a Print Preview is available to allow the
selected results to be reviewed before printing.
I
..
The Tables pages allows the user to view load, air quantities, temperatures and
reheat tables (time and month) at AHU, zone and room level depending on the air
handling system type.
A series of radio buttons allows a selection between Chiller(s), Circuit(s), AHU(s),
Zone(s), Room(s) or Preconditioner(s).
94
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
i
1
File Templates Font Save Text Format Search Graph Psychrometrics Help
.* Visw
g? T '
I emplate
Print Selection
E
▼.} I Compare
Fig 5-20A The VIEW Screens Menu and Tool Bar
Menu Bar
The items on the Menu Bar of the View Screens are:
File
Open - Opens a set of results files. When this is selected a selection box for
the user to select the main output (.OUT) file is displayed. When a selection is
made, this loads in all the results files for this project.
r
Close - Closes the current set of results files
Templates - Displays the template form
Font
Fonts (including bold, italic, etc.) can be selected separately for the headings,
sub-headings etc. but these must be mono spaced fonts including Terminal,
Courier and Courier New, because of the format of the results.
The fonts that are available to you depend on the fonts you have loaded under
WINDOWS on your machine. It is therefore a matter of trial and error to obtain
the right combination on the particular machine on which you are running
CAMEL.
Main Heading - Main Page Headers
Headings - Major sub-heading on a page of results
Sub-Headings - Minor sub-heading on a page of results
Table Headings
Body Text - The text in the tables etc.
Save Text Format - Saves the font settings
Search
Find - Finds in the currently displayed results, the string that is entered in the
Find dialogue box that appears on screen (Refer Fig 5-20B)
x
String to find: (Maximum!
i" Match £ase ■ r* Op
Cancel j
Down :
Fig 5-20B The Find Dialogue Box
t
Graph- Produces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity T ables (Refer clause 5-100)
Psychrometrics - Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
Help
Tool Bar
The items on the Toolbar are:
rtJ
Close - Closes the current set of results files
*"u
Open - Opens a set of results files
H Templates - Displays the Templates Form
IIjIiiI
Produces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity Tables (Refer clause 5-100)
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
95
Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
t
9
I
Exports Loads and Air Quantity Tables to Excel (Tables Tab Page only)
Help
[
View or Print Selection - A radio button to toggle between ‘viewing’ on screen
where only one selection at a time is allowed and ‘print selection’ which stores the
selections that are checked and dumps these results to the Print file ready for the
user to print. Note that if a Template is chosen, the selections are predefined
(see Templates below).
T emplate
l
Template Selection List List - provides for the
selection of a template with predefined selections on the Project, AHU,
Zone and Room and Load Charts Tab Pages.
J Compare
Compare results - This check box allows the user to compare the
[
results for two runs. When it is checked an open file button appears to open
the second file and the screen is split with a splitter bar.
•"ii
GM
[
Open file - allows a second file to be opened for comparison of results.
When the second file is selected it is displayed in the lower half of a split
screen with a vertical scroll bar on the right hand side.
Note that selected parts of the results can be copied to the clipboard by
clicking and dragging and then right clicking the mouse
Templates
[
This displays a form which allows the user to predefine the selected results that
are to be printed in the form of a series of templates. For example, for the coil
details, a user may define a template called 'Coil Details’ and simply check the
AHU Summary check box under Project. Another template called ‘Project Details’
could have all the items under Project checked.
jyni|iy
mMMm
mm
1111
froUit
AHU o
9'-.
Fptjis
!; PI.'1 iTi.To
m
- --
F; W'lbofesA'
Pu
#1rt'jfTTBwgSngToaSCtBk
[
UidCh.r!:.
Zona: & Room:
l~ Cooling Check Figure;
[ Heai-Vii)
!" All AHU1;
, I"' AiiAHU’:
I
. f Healing Psychrcmetrics and Load Chart P
■ i“ All AHU1'.I Corr,riv;r:l:
L,
x
Save Ac Hevi Templars ;
i F" Al-IU Summary-Cooling
|
I
■ i~ Input Data find Zone; and Rcorn;)
f" Ll.A.Iamr
(" Froirct Ij -ta
Fig 5-20C The Templates Form
The items on the Toolbar of the Templates form are:
Closes the Template form without saving
t
L) Clears all the checked check boxes
IZJHelp
T emplate
!
3 A drop down selection list of all currently stored
templates - selection from the list enables the user to change the selections for
each Tab Page in the selected template.
96
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
f
I”
Updates the current template with the selections displayed.
Save As New Template
- The current selections can be
saved as a new template by entering a Template name in the Save as a New
Template field and then left clicking the Save button.
To define the template, make the selections required using the checkboxes and
save as a new template or update the current template as required.
5-30 Project Results Tab Page
On this Tab Page the overall project results are presented via a series of check
boxes as follows:
Project Details - The details of this run of CAMEL including the job title outdoor design
conditions, location, etc. (Refer Fig 5-30A).
Project
Zones & Hoems
Lojd Charts
T~ AHU Summary - Cooling
jy Project Detail;
Printing
F* Chiller, Boiler & Circuits V OATemperatures
AHU/Zones/Rooms Configuration f"* Coding Check Figures & Heating l^j
P Comments
Tables
I Input Project Data
P Window Shading Effectiveness
BEAVER Workshop
Office and Retail Building
Melbourne CBD
INPUT FILS H&MS ~C:/CAMSLS110/DATA/iOFFICE_R2TAIL_NSLB DIRECT AIR-4P.DAT
OUTPUT FITS UAHS ~C:/CXH2L5110/DATA/10FFICSJtSTAIL_M2LB DIRECT AIR-4P.OUT
CALCULATION BUILD NUMBER 5.11.0AN
OUTDOOR DESIGN CONDITIONS with ACADS HEATHER DATA FILS (Kay 2015) for
NSU
Location €8072
HOHRA
9.5
Latitude -35.0 DEG
1UTH) Daily Range
Building Rotation 20.0
103.0 in (from file)
Elevation
WINTER OUTDOOR DESIGN
5.S CDS 80.0 RH
2424.0 m2
TOTAL FLOOR AREA IS
2054.0 m2
FLOOR AREA SERVED BY CHILLER IS
FLOOR AREA SERVED BY CIRCUITS
3€0.0 m2
Shops VPS
0.0 m2'
cond water
FLOOR AREA SI(SUED BY PRE-CONDITIONER UNITS
3S0.0 m2
Precon 1
Fig 5-30A Project Details
AHU/ZONE/ROOM CONFIGURATION
CONNECTIONS----- >
RCGK
CIRC CIRC
OTHER
NO CH BO PRE CODL HEAT RA ITF34S
<--■
NO
AHU
TITLE
1
2
3
4
5
Grnd Shop!
Coffee Shop
Grnd Shop3
Grnd Shop4
Tyical Floor
HOTS: D3
SOME ROd-i
NO TITLE
1 Grnd Shopl
1 Cs :ee Shop
1 Grnd Shop3
1 Grnd Shop4
RA R.A. Room
1 North Typical Floor
2 East Typical Floor
3 Nest Typical Floor
4 Centre Typics
room temperature control; HCU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Y
1
1
1
1
ior
HCU humidity control; RA - return
RA
Y
,r room
PRE CONDITIONER PLANT DETAILS - INPUT DATA
NO
1 Precon 1
TITLE
CODL
LEAVING
DB
WB
HEAT CCOL HEAT <------ HCU--------> <------H/E------- >
LVG COIL COIL BATED
PREC € EFFICIENCY
iW TYP DB CHIL BOIL g/Jtg CNTL CHIL SEN LAT EHTH
13.0
1.0 3T
FAN
HD
Fig 5-30B Typical AHU / Zones / Rooms Configuration
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
97
AHU/Zones/Rooms Configuration - This provides a list of the AHU, Zones and
Rooms in the current project and any preconditioners specified. It also displays
the connections to Chillers, Boilers, Preconditioners and Circuits. If any
Preconditioners are entered, an additional table is printed for these listing the
input values for each.
I
f
AHU Summary - Cooling - This comprises two tables. The first is a summary of the
air quantities, coil capacity and psychrometrics for each AHU including any
preconditioners specified. (Refer Fig 5-30C)
|
t
K,
On this page, an Excel button appears and when this is selected the AHU
Summary Cooling Results are exported to Excel
The second is a table of Supplementary Data that is listed for each AHU, if the
Zen*-} S. Poem**
AKUs
Project
vOLf
f? [AHU Sumtn-aty • CooiW
1 Project Details
P AHU^ones/Rooms Configuration P Cooling Check Figures fa Heating
Printing
I 030 Charts
1“ Chiller, Boiiet fa Circuits P O.A. Temperatures
P Comments
Tables
P Input Project Data
f Window Shading Effectiveness
AHU SUMMARY-COOLING
At Tiss or Peak Grand Total Heat- (GTH)
TITLE
NO.
OFF
S/A
1/s
OUT/AIR
%
1/s
CTH
JsW
t.
f
I
GT'SH COIL ENT COIL LVG PRECON
a;W CDB CWB CEB CVS
HO.
t
3.5€
0 0.0
€73
1
1 Grnd Shopl
100 17
7.60
1
8 Coffee Shop
591
0 0.0
5.73
Grnd Sh.ap3
431
1
75 13
6.63
586
1
Grnd Shop4
0 0.0
€0.2
3364
4
Tyieal Floor
PRE-CONDITIONERS WITH TEMPERATURE CONTROL
14.1
350 100
Precon 1
1
3.06 24.2 17.i 14.2 13.2
6.47
3 16.4 13.2 12.3
5.20
0 17.0 13.9 12.9
£ 16.S 13.3 12.9
6.15
51.6 24.6 17.3 13.4 12.4
1
1
1
1
3.57 33.5 23.5 13.0 12.5
1 EF .07
f
AHU SUMMARY COOLING SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
Note 1: at time of peak AHU adjusted sensible heat
2: increased air quantity or reduced leaving coil CDB are alternatives
Title
Grnd Shopl
Coffee Shop
Grnd Shop3
Grnd Shop4
lyical Floor
Time
Peak
GTH
Adj Tins©
Sens Peak
kW Adj Sens
Peak adj. sens,
3pm Apr
Peak adj. sens,
1pm Apr
Peak a.dj. sens,
1pm Apr
Peak adj. sens,
2pm Apr
3pm Mar 43.8 3pm Oct 43.0
Adj
Sens
<— REVISED
GTH AQ
kW 1/s
Lvg
—>
Biff
f
it CDB CDB
occurs at seme time as peak GIH
occurs at same time as peak GIH
occurs at same time as peak GTH
occurs at same time as peak GTH
0.1
3383 0.5 13.4
54.3
[
Fig 5-30C Typical AHU Summary - Cooling
time of the Peak Adjusted Sensible heat is not the same as the time of the Peak
Grand Total Heat. In CAMEL the AHU coil selection is carried out at the time of
the Peak Grand Total heat. Often the peak Adjusted Sensible Heat occurs at a
different time which means that although the coil is sized for the maximum total
heat there may not be sufficient air to handle this higher sensible load. An
example would be if the total load (GTH) occurs at 3pm February with a GTH of
40kW and an adjustable Sensible Heat of say 30 kW and at another time (say at
1pm in February) the Adjusted Sensible Heat is 31.6kW and the GTH is only
38.6kW. The table displays the required air quantity (and % increase) or the
necessary drop in the leaving coil temperature to match the higher sensible load.
l
i.
If a Desiccant Humidity Control Unit is included on any Air Handling Unit or
Preconditioner Unit, 2 more tables are displayed:
The Desiccant Humidity Control Unit Summary which lists:
• the air quantity
• the design WB temperature and %RH (as entered on the Project Tab Page)
and the corresponding dry bulb temperature and specific humidity (g/kg)
• the specific humidity (g/kg) leaving the HCU at design conditions
• The User entered Fan kW
• CH or DX indicating whether the pre-cooling coil is Chilled Water or DX
98
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
t
[
f
i.
The Desiccant Humidity Control Units Supplementary Data which lists:
The moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel at design conditions. This
is either estimated by the program or entered by the user (normally on a re-run
after selecting a particular sized unit).
the air quantity
the time of the peak load, the design cooling load and entering and leaving coil
conditions for the pre-cooling coil at the time of it’s peak load.
the time of the peak load, the design cooling load and entering and leaving coil
conditions on the DX compressor serving the desiccant wheel at the time of it’s
peak load. The total heat (GTH) capacity is either estimated by the program or
entered by the user (normally on a re-run after selecting a particular sized
unit).
the peak combined load of the pre-cooling coil, the DX coil and the AHU
cooling coil at the time of the combined load peak. This, if the supply and
outside air quantities are the same, should normally be higher than load when
an HCU unit is not used because of the heat from the HCU fan and the heating
of the desiccant wheel during the drying process.
AHU Cooling Check Figures & Heating - This provides check figures, other
miscellaneous details, the heating load, and the supply and return fan kW for
each AHU. (Refer Fig 5-30D).
ifii On this page, an Excel button appears and when this is selected the AHU
Heating & Check Figures are exported to Excel.
Project
AHUs
P" AHU Summary - Cooling
t * Proiect Details
It iijf.h «rt..
/oiks S 3iKin:
H
M
P O.A.Temperatures
P" Chiief, Boiler & Circuits
Figures « Heating
AHU/Zones/Rooms Configuration ^ ;Cooiing Checi
Tables
Tnnt'iio
P" Comments
P Input Project Data
r Window Shading Effectiveness
AHU SUMMARY - COOLING CHECK FIGURES and HEATING
TITLE
Enid Shop!
Coffee Shop
Grnd 3hcp3
Grnd Shop4
Tyicel Floor
Whole Building
%
O/A
FLOOR W/
AREA
m2
CH/ 1/s/
Hr m2
0.0
17
0.0
13
0.0
1.0
90.0 35
90.0 84
30.0 _ 64
30.0 74
516.0 117
2424.0 121
9.7
S.4
6.2
8.4
9.6
5.5
SHF
HEATING
S/A O/A xW
FAN k'vl
SUP
RET
7
.34
673
0.00 4.38
0.14 BT
.35
831
100 4.12
0.13 3T
4.5 .31
431
0.00 3.54
0.09 DX
6.5 .32
586
75.0 4.32
0.12 DT
0 2
DX
7.5 .86
1S50
0.00 :
7.3 (at building peak time: 3pm Mar)
Fig 5-30D Typical AHU Heating & Cooling Check Figures
Chillers, Boilers & Circuits - (Refer Fig 5-30E) This displays:
The total chiller capacity including connected AHU, and preconditioner chilled
water coil loads, pump and pipe losses and corrections for diversified people,
lights, and equipment loads.
The total boiler capacity including connected AHU coil loads, pump gains,
pipe losses and the provision for warm up based on the Winter Warm up %
entered on the Project Tab Page.
For each Circuit, for cooling, the Peak GTH, the GTSensible at the time of
the peak GTH, the Time of the Peak GTH and the ambient temperature at
the time of the Peak. For Heating the GTH and ambient Wet Bulb
Temperature.
t.......;
For VR Outdoor units the average room WB during cooling and the average
room DB during cooling.
L
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
99
AllUs
Project
;;
|5* IQhfUer^ BoiieLc: Circuit;
P 0.A.Temperatures
P AHU Summary ■ Cooling
P Project Details
T ablus
Load Charts
Zones & Rooms
r Comments
P AH U/Zones/Flooms Configuration P Cooling Check Figures & Heating
P Input Project Data
f
PRIMARY PLANT RESULTS (Excludes unitary plant)
i:
CHILLER PLANT
Operating hours Sam to 5 pm
AIR HANDLING LOAD
PROVISION FOR CHILLER POI1P (S) (
PROVISION FOR CHILLER PIPE GAINS (
3pm Mar=
3%)
3%)
294
8.82
8.82
312
CHILLER GRAND TOTAL HEAT (kW)
f
BOILER PLANT
AIR HANDLING LOAD
PROVISION FOR BOILER PUMP(S)
2%)
PROVISION FOR BOILER PIPE LOSSES (
( 10%) =
PROVISION FOR BOILER EXCESS CAPACITY
102
0.00
2.03
10.2
114
BOILER GRAND TOTAL HEAT (kW)
CIRCUITS
__________ _ Cooling _______________ _ __ Heating
GTH tab Room
GTH GTSens Peak tab Room
DB avWB kH WB avDB
kW kW Time
Ho
Ho Type Off Description
1 VRF
2 OJL
Legend:
40.0
20.9
1 VRF 1
1 Cond Loop
CWL
VRF
TJLHF
29.0
19.1
3pm Mar 33.7 15.6
3pm Mar 33.7
15.7
12.8
2.2
2.2
Condenser Hater Loop
Variable Refrigerant Flow
Water Loop Heat Pump
f
Fig 5-30E Typical Chiller, Boilers and Circuits Results
;*,«, :• •
/fines $ kiMjms
r aHU Sunrimif,' • Lcokng
P .-iHU.'Zon-:
Coi-lrycrcji'cn P CooingOvy..k Fiaurc?: bHc-utinn
f
20.0
I iiari (h<ii
] CM!ei: l. fjotai:
P
a
j
OATempoi^fc:
P r'fOjcc,;
INPUT DATA COMMENT
mu % JUCUG01 RCHP, U( tel NORTH Ground
£$0 FLOOR, CEILING OR ROOF
mu 2 ISHVGOR mm( Z 1, Bn 1 ERST Ground
Era FLOOR, CEILING OR ROOF
mU 3 SHVGQ3 RCHP, Z 1, 8m 1 WIST Ground
m FLOOR, CEILING OR ROOF
me, 2 1, 1m X CENTRE Ground
mu 4 muGm s zo3
NO FLOOR, CEILING OR ROOF
Fig 5-30F Typical Comments
Comments - This lists all the comments and non fatal errors in the results for this
project. (Refer Fig 5-30F). For a list of the comments that can appear in this list
with further explanations refer Clause 6-40.
O.A. Temperatures - This lists the cooling outdoor design temperatures used by the
program either for the location selected or if the user has entered the 3pm design
conditions the calculated values by the entered yearly and daily range. Note that
in the latter case CAMEL does not calculate values for the winter months
(because the yearly range corrections in DA9 do not include corrections for these
months). Refer fig. 5-30G.
100
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
!
Project
!..
i
r"
i u>>(! CImit*
A1.IJ'
I K'./^.t L'-vl
i AHLI Surf.-riiy • Cco!irv;j
P .''.HU/Zcr-r ./rJo'r--.:. Ci:«,ri3o:ch*::,» P D'.-Gpi Chii-:!' Fipifr/1Herhg
r UiSloK-t So!-j(.-
WSM
P CCif'Wrn---
r Input P-Y.TCtC'iia
H
COOLING OUTDOOR DESIGN TEMPERATURES (C)
<BB - DRY BULB m - m? BULB)
jan fe® mm ipr mr jbn
6AH DB
m
7AH DB
¥B
8AH DB
¥B
9AH DB
WB
10AH DB
¥8
11AH DB
¥B
N00H DB
¥B
1PH DB
¥B
2PH DB
¥3
3PH DB
¥B
4PH DB
¥B
27.0 27.0
IS.2 18.2
27.1 27.1
18.2 18.2
27.1 27.1
IS.2 18.2
28.1 28.1
18.6 18.6
29.2 29.2
18.9 18.9
30.2 30.2
19.3 19.3
31.2 31.2
19.6 19.6
32.3 32.3
19.9 19.9
33.3 33.3
20.2 20.2
34.3 34.3
20.5 20.5
33.3 33.3
20.2 20.2
£€.4
18.2
26.5
IS.2
26.5
18.2
27.5
18.6
28.6
18.9
29.6
19.3
30.6
19.6
31.7
19,3
32.7
20.2
33.7
20.5
32.7
20.2
21.8
16.7
21.9
16.7
21.9
16.7
22.9
17.1
24.0
17.4
25.0
17.8
26.0
1S.1
27.1
IS.5
28.1
18.S
29.1
19.1
28.1
18.8
17.4 11.0
12.9 10.4
17.S 11.1
12.9 10.4
17.5 11.1
12.9 10.4
18.5 12.1
13.3 10.9
19.6 13.2
13.7 11.4
20.6 14.2
14.1 11.8
21.6 15.2
14.5 12.2
22.7 16.3
14.9 12.6
23.7 17.3
IS.3 13.0
24.7 18.3
15.7 13.4
23.7 17.3
15.3 13.0
JLY m& SEP OCT NOV BEC
12.0 1S.0 16.2 23-5 27.0 27.0
9.8 10.3 13.2 15.6 17.3 18.2
12.1 15.1 16.3 23.6 27.1 27.1
9.8 10.4 13.2 15.7 17.3 18.2
12.1 15.1 16.3 23.6 27.1 27.1
9.8 10.4 13.2 15.7 17.3 18.2
13.1 16.1 17.3 24.6 28.1 28.1
10.3 10.8 13.6 16.0 17.6 18.6
14.2 17.2 18.4 25.7 29.2 29.2
10.7 11.3 14.0 16.4 18.0 18.9
15.2 18.2 19.4 26.7 30.2 30.2
11.2 11.7 14.4 16.8 18.3 19.3
16.2 19.2 20.4 27.7 31.2 31.2
11.6 12.1 14.8 17.1 18.7 19.6
17.3 20.3 21.S 28.S 32.3 32.3
12.0 12.6 15.2 17.5 19.0 19.9
18.3 21.3 22.5 29.8 33.3 33.3
12.5 13.0 15.6 17.8 19.3 20.2
19.3 22.3 23.5 30.8 34.3 34.3
12.9 13.4 15.9 18-2 19.7 20.5
18.3 21.3 22.5 29.8 33.3 33.3
12.5 13.0 15.6 17.8 19.3 20.2
-«i si
Fig 5-30G Typical O.A. Temperatures
Window Shading Effectiveness
The program calculates the effectiveness of the shading on each window as:
1 - (the sum of the solar loads through the window with shading)
(the sum of the solar loads through the window with no shading)
over 24 hours for the three summer months (Dec, Jan, Feb in the Southern
Hemisphere and June, July, Aug in the Northern Hemisphere) expressed as a
percentage. The program also calculates the equivalent depth of an overhang at
the top of the windows (with an extension to the left and right the same as the
overhang depth) that gives the same effectiveness as the entered shading on
each surface.
For further details refer to the Window Shading Effectiveness at the end of clause
3-20.
Project
P Project Details
AllUft
Zones & Rooms
P AHU Summary - Cooling
P AHU/Zones/Rooms Configuration P Cooling Check Figures & Heating
Lodd Chan*
Printing
P Chiller. Boiler & Circuits P OATernperatures
Tables
P Input Project Data
(v7 {'MndotN.;hadjng Eftedivene?''.!
P Comments
WINDOW SHADING EFFECTIVENESS
(for the summer months Dec, Jan and Feb)
ZG1IE ROOM
HO TITLE
HO
AHU
TITLE
1
Grnd RCHP 1
1
2
Grnd RCHP2
Grnd RCHP3
Grnd RCHP 4
1
1
1
VAV First
1
4
2
3
Grnd Shopl
Grnd Shopl
Coffee Shop
Grnd Shop3
Grnd Shop4
Grnd Shop4
Worth 1ST Floor
Worth 1ST Floor
Worth 1ST Floor
East 1ST Floor
¥est 1ST Floor
SURF AZI SHAD-DEVICE EFF EQUIV
HO DEG ADJ SURF WIND % QMHAHG
1 20 N
IC
2 290 INC
1 20 N
IC
1 20 N
IC
1 20 N
IC
2 110 INC
1 20
2 110 INC
3 290
1 110 INC
1 290
INC
INC
INC
INC
INC
INC
INC
INC INC
INC INC
INC INC
INC INC 43
79
68
79
79
79
96
79
62
43
69
759
563
770
759
759
1500
738
1395
638
1647
638
Note: INC
- adjacent shading(ADJ), surface shading(SURF) or window shading(¥IND)
included in shading efficiency calculation
EXC - adjacent shading excluded from shading efficiency calculation
Fig 5-30H Window Shading Effectiveness and Equivalent Overhang
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
101
I
Input Project Data - This lists the part of the data input file associated with the Project
Screens:- Project, Schedules, Shading, Windows, Walls, Chiller & Boiler and
Preconditioners.
5-40 AHU Results Tab Page
!
This Tab Page provides check boxes for calling up the cooling and heating loads
psychrometric details and check figures for each AHU selectively.
%i-
n
• * . s * V. r,
I. YSl.lAV-.i
(.r
; "i.n.v;o ; ’
iUitltrUa S &Q
5 SJftfS WT NO EEHEM’ t
6 mm 7 TOF + Reheat ,;|
7 RHUS CV + Reheat
8 RHUS lace 6 Bypass !
AHU 2 AHUG02 RCHP
I
i
Ho. Off -
Type ~ R.C. Heat; Pump
Connected to ~ Chiller Ho
Floor Area 196 m2 Volume
Boiler Ho
~ 529.2 m3
1
1
Average Ceiling Height. -2700. mm
j'
AHU COOLING LOAD SUMMARY
MAXIMUM COOLING LOAD IS 16.7 kWAT 9AM JAN
OUTDOOR AIR IS BSTBBED IH BOOHS BTTHOUr AS1668 CAlCCfiATIQH
HOTS: The room average outdoor air is used. Some rooms will be under supplied
GTSH
GTLH
S.H. FACTOR
SUPPLY AIR
OUTDOOR AIR
BEHUHID AIR
AIR ch/hr
i
1/sMZ
1/s/kU
¥/m2
?f i
1S.3RU
1.36kW
0.92
1140 1/s (N)
196 1/s
1140 1/s
7.8
5.8
68.3
85
AVERAGE P.00H AIR
OUTDOOR AIR
CBB
cm
24.0
28.1
50.0%RK
18.6
9.3
9.5
12.9
17.4
17.2
13.2
8.9
3.9
9.3
9.3
8.9
COIL DE¥ POINT
12.2
13.9
COIL LEAVING AIR
COIL BATTERING AIR 25.0
24.4
RETURN AIR
AVERAGE ROOH ENT.14.5
0.14
BYPASS FACTOR
g/kg
,i
•i
NOTE : <N) HEAHS HOHIHATED VALUE USED
Fig 5-40A Typical AHU Cooling Psychrometrics
Below the toolbar is the checkbox panel. On the left hand side of this panel is the
AHU selection list. A selection can be made here by left clicking (single
selection), Cntrl left clicking (multiple selection) and Shift left click (selection from
the single selection down to the current cursor position).
/ones Rooms
: :IT .
i " toojriQPc.'chiO'ifi’Ti'::1 I'l.'UGOl RCHP
■ i HUGOS RCHP
me
«* RHlfG04 S
5 WCU5 TO/ HO BEK221T
6 Wmi mV + Reheat
7 mars cv + Reheat.
8 RHU9 Race &
I o.jfj Chrifts
[
f'riiitiiii)
r Heating Piychro'vctncE sna Load IChat
input Data |sv:I2o: end Fioomii
f Oufc-'J-z- Aif
AHU 2 AHUG02 RCHP
Type ~ R.C. Heaz Pump
Ho. Off -
1
Boiler Ho
Connected to ~ Chiller Ho
Floor Area ~
196 m2 Volume **
529.2 m3 Average Ceiling Height ~27QQ. mm
:\m COOLING LOAD CHART AT MAXIMUM LOAD 9AM JAN
/ CCUHULRTEB ZONE/RGQH 3U3JUSTHB HEAT
13885
1247
ADJUSTED ROOH SENSIBLE
ADJUSTED ROOH LATEST
ADJUSTED TOTAL HEAT *
15132
•,THER GRINS
196
OUTDOOR AIR SENSIBLE
136
OUTDOOR AIR LATENT
RETURN DUCT HEAT GAIN AND LEAKAGE LOSS
RETURN DUCT FROH ROOH SENSIBLE
4.1
0.2
X. 21 2.97 *
1.01 *
TOTAL OTHER GAINS *
COOLING GRBNB TOTAL HEAT *
COOLING GRAND TOTAL SENSIBLE HEAT »
COOLIHG GRAND TOTAL LATENT HEAT «
972
108
130
343
1554
16686
15331
1355
Fig 5-40B Typical AHU Cooling Load Chart
102
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
L
i
-■p CooSng P^yckm^mz: ' / ■: p
':
P Inpii' D^srV*riclZ-?n»? a.-i j FSc-crn?!
niSaaili
I llllll'/li I M ■■.<!•
t
Pi mtmn
AHU’s
.....
i AHUUO« KLKP
4 UTC04 S Sana H&C "|
5 JkHVS V»V NO BEHEftT )
6 &HV? WtV + Relieafe j
1 IHIfg or + Eahe&fc I
8 RHVS Eace & Bypass jj
AHU 2 AHUG02 RCHP
Type «* R.C. Heat- Pxmp
Connected to * Chiller No
196 m2 Volume
Floor Area •*
No. Off - i
No
Boiler
S29.2 m3
Average Ceiling Height -^2700. mm
AHU HEATING LOAD CHART & SUMMARY
!BASED ON COOLING A/0)
FABRIC LOAD
OUTDOOR AIR 196. 1/s x 16. SO CDB * 1.21
IOTW, saw mins loss <excl. kbmibiwikr)
SUPPLY AIR
OUTDOOR AIR
1140 1/s
196 1/s
VMZ
W/a.3
44
16.2
4.68 kW
3.91 kW
8.59 m
20.0 CDB
ROOK AIR
OUTDOOR AIR
3.S CDB
RETURN AIR
20.0 CDB
COIL LEAVING AIR 23.4 CDB
COIL ENTERING AIR 17.2 CDB
Fig 5-40C Typical AHU Heating Psychrometrics and Load Chart
The check boxes on this Tab Page are:
Cooling Psychrometrics - This displays the maximum cooling load, the air quantities,
the detailed psychrometrics and check figures etc. for the selected AHU’s. (Refer
Fig 5-40A).
Cooling Load Chart - This is the cooling load chart for the AHU coil ie. the sum of the
zone/room sensible and latent heats plus the outdoor air and return duct gains for
the selected AHU’(s). The Room load charts which detail the loads through
walls, windows, etc. in each room, are in the Load Charts Tab Page. (Fig 5-40B).
The item labeled Total of % RA to Room is the sum of all the % to R/A loads entered in
the External Tab Page and the Internal Tab Page for all rooms on this AHU. The
remainder of the load for each external wall or roof and each internal load is included into
the Room Load Charts, with the percentage shown in a column headed ROOM.
Heating Psychrometrics and Load Chart - This displays the winter heating load chart
for the AHU heating Coil for the selected AHU’(s) including the sum of the
zone/room fabric heating loads (including infiltration less any"% Heating" for
people, lights and equipment entered on the Internal Tab Page) plus the outdoor
air sensible load as well as the heating psychrometrics. (Refer Fig 5-40C) A
provision for extra capacity for warm up is shown (calculated as detailed in clause
7-150) unless the coil is connected to the boiler in which case the extra capacity is
only added to the boiler.
!
Outside Air - This displays the details of the entered outside air (units and values) (as
stipulated on the AHU Coil or Zones and Room Tab Pages) and corresponding
value in I/s or % of S/A for each AHU, zone and room together with the
calculated AHU and room outside air values and percentages of supply air.
These calculated quantities include the AS1668-2012 multiple compartment
calculations if requested (on the AHU Tab Page) (Refer fig. 5-40D). Also listed is
any amount of outdoor air that is injected directly into the room rather than
through the AHU. The floor area and number of people are also listed for
checking purposes.
Extracted and Spill Air Summary
This table which follows on from the Outside Air Summary Table, displays for
each selected AHU(s) and each of the zones and rooms on the selected AHU(s):
L
•
•
•
The AHU and Zone number, and the AHU, zone and room title.
The extracted air quantity
The AHU number and Room title to where the extracted air is spilled to
•
Spill Into L/s - the total air quantity spilled from other rooms into the current
room. In calculating the spill into value, account is taken of the number off
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
103
spaces, so, for example if 100 I/s is spilled from a single space into a space
with 4 off, the spill in will be 25 I/s
1 cod Charts
AHUs
Tables
Printing
i Cooling Psychrometrics
I Heating Psychrornetrics and Load Chart C~ input Data (inciZones and Rooms)
F Cooling Load Chart
JV Outside Air Summary
I
r
OUTSIDE AIR SUMMARY
AHU ZONE
NO NO
1
2
5
TITLE
OUTDOOR AIR
FLOOR NO.
ENTERED
TOTAL: S/A
AREA OF
PERS. :UNIT VALUE
1/s
% : 1/s
Grad Shopl
1 Sznd Shcpi
30
30
10.0:
10.0: AP
Coffee Shop
1 Coffee Shoo
50
30
20.0: LS
£0.0:
Tyical Floor
R-A. Room
1 North Typical Floor
2 ZONE
Typical
Floor
3 ?Ie: Typical Floor
4 Centre Typica Floor
516
50
55.6:
4.0: R.A.RCOM
10.0
6.6: LP
10.8:
10.0
5.4: LP
S.4: LP
10.0
28.8: LS 100.0
108
54
238
10.0
15 :
100 IS :
OUTDOOR AIR
AHU
DIRECT:
3
1/s
1/s
678:
678:
100 17 :
;
591: 17
531: 17
3864:
66
54
100
4
8
8
4
10
:
:
:
;
:
0
0
1570: 0
1233: 0
646: 0
1217: 0
1033: 0
0
0
100:
100;
100
100
0
0
328:
0
0
0
0
0
108:
54:
54:
100:
Legend: LP(l/3/per3cn), LM(l/m2), AC (A. C./hr) u LS(l/2)
EXTRACTED AND SPILL AIR SUMMARY
(axr the time
AHU ZONE
NO NO
;he AHU peek)
2
Coffee Shop
1 Co: lee Shop
5
Tyical Floor
SA R-A. Room
1 North Typical Floor
2 ZONE
East Typical Floor
3 Nest Typical Fleer
4 Centre Typica Floor
Note 1.
Note 2.
EXTRACTED AIR
SPILL TO
AHU RCCM TITLE
TITLE
1/s
S
5 Centre Typica Floor :
50
5 Centre Typica Floor
I
[
SPILL:
INTO :
1/a
58:
<M) the air available is less than the input value
(D) the room O/A Ips has been used as the spill air default
Fig 5-40D Typical Outside Air Summary and Extracted and Spill Air Summary
Input Data (incl Zones and Rooms) - displays the input data file for the AHU, Zones
and Rooms by each AHU.
5-50
r
Zones and Rooms Results Tab Page
!
[
:a i
On this page, an Excel button appears and when this is selected the
selected Results are exported to Excel
fisSW'I
Below the toolbar is the checkbox panel. On the left hand side of this panel is the
AHU selection list. A selection can be made here by left ciicking (single
selection), Cntrl left clicking (multiple selection) and Shift left click (selection from
single selection down to current cursor position).
The results in each table include a line for each AHU, each zone (if there is more
than one) in each AHU and each room (if there is more than one) in each zone.
The checkboxes on this Tab Page are:
Cooling Results
This is a table containing for each selected AHU:
• The adjusted sensible and latent (room sensible or latent plus supply duct
gains) at the respective peak load times (listed under cooling check figures) of
104
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
L
I
Zones & Rooms
LOo'J Chart?
P Cooling Check Figures
W Cooling Results
f~ Heating Results & Check Figures
Mi
f
l~ Combined Results
B
.. ,------------
ZONES AND ROOMS COOLING RESULTS
4 Orad l>h©i*4
iexcluding Ouzside Air sad Recurn DucC -Sains)
i!§
AHU SON
NO HO
TITLE
HQ. ADJUSTED
O?? SENS LAT
VAV AHU
RES/A TURN O/A HEAT
1/s BKH% 1/s k'rf
RCCM COt ID
DB DB %
MIN MAX RH
#
kW
1
Grad Shop-1
1
7.SI Q.50
€78
0
24.0
50
2
Coffee Shop
1
7.€6
1.26
591
100
24.0
50
3
Crad Shop3
1
5.20
0.53
431
0
24.0
50
4
Grad Shop4
1
7.13
0.63
5S6
75
24 . Q
50
4 48.8
1 3.18
1 IS.3
1 16.3
2 8.1
1 15.4
i 13.0
8.3
0.2
1.1
2.2
1
0.20
3.28
*> 3864
0
24.0
50
5
Tyica.1 Floor
RA A.A. Room
1 Kozrh Typical Floor
2 ZONE
’Icar
Ease Typical
.oo:
3 West Typical
4 Centre Typica Fleer
kW
’0
S3
646
.033
35
40
35
0 2.2c 24.0
. 1 48
0 S. 35
0
24.0 24.1 48
0
80 24.0 24.1 43
0 4.3:
24.0 24.1 51
Note 1~ The reesi S/A is proportion of the sene air quantity at zone peak
Note 2~ The ROOM MIN/KAX is a rough estimate of the room temperature variation.
Note 3~ The ROOM maximum sensible heat may be greater than the AHU sensible heat.
Fig 5-50A Typical Zones and Rooms Cooling Results
the AHU, zone and room., ie the zone and room loads excluding outside air and
return duct gains.
• Supply and Outside air quantities. For constant volume systems, the zone air
quantity is that required at the time of the peak zone Grand Total Heat and
the AHU air quantity is the sum of the zone air quantities. For VAV systems
the zone air quantity is that required at the time of the Peak Adjusted Room
Sensible Heat and the AHU air quantity is the sum of the air quantities
required at the time of the peak AHU Adjusted Sensible Heat.
For each zone, the zone peak air quantity is apportioned to each room by the
ratio of either the room peak loads or floor area (as selected by the user).
i ...
For example in a VAV system: - assume the peak load for a zone serving two
rooms occurs at noon and the first room’s peak load occurs at 10AM whilst
the peak load occurs for the second at 3PM. Assume now that the air quantity
for the zone at the time of its peak is 10001/s and the proportions for each
room based on the ratio of the room peak loads are 550 I/s for room 1 and
450 I/s for room 2. Assume now at the time of the peak load for room 1
(10AM) the zone air quantity based on the zone load at this time is 800 I/s.
The air quantity to room 1 will be (550/1000 x 800 ) 440 I/s and room 1 will
be under supplied with air Similarly if the zone air quantity at the time of the 2nd
room peak is 700 I/s the air quantity to room 2 would be 450/1500 x 700 = 315
I/s. For a Constant Volume system the air quantities will be fixed at all times
at 550 and 450 I/s but since the proportion of the loads varies inevitably,
although the average room temperature will be held at design conditions, the
individual rooms will deviate, one higher, the other lower. This is what
happens when thermally dissimilar rooms are connected to one zone.
The result is that the temperatures will not be maintained at the entered room
temperature and this can be viewed in the Tables or under Graph under
Room temperatures
VAV Turn Down % - The minimum turn down ratio for each Mixing Boxes
(zone) in a VAV system. The turn down is based on the turn down % entered
(on the zones and rooms tab) or the default value (40%) only those hours
calculated by CAMEL (ie. the hottest day in each month) assuming the box will
not turn down less than the specified minimum supply air quantity or the
specified outside air for the particular zone.
• This is an estimate of the amount of reheat required depending on whether
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
105
The way in which the reheat is calculated each hour for each zone is as
follows:
r
Without reset:
Add the zone total room sensible heat divided by (1.2 times the zone air
quantity) to the leaving coil temperature to determine the average room
temperature for this zone without reheat (T1). The reheat is then the
zone supply air quantity multiplied by 1.2 times the difference between the
entered room design temperature and temperature T1.
r
r
“with Reset” was selected on the AHU Screen or not
With reset:
For each zone, determine (using the calculated zone supply air) which
zone requires the lowest leaving coil temperature. Then determine the
reheat in each zone as above using this revised leaving coil temperature.
Note that this “estimate” of reheat may not be the maximum required. Room
loads at other times could easily give higher values, e.g. if all the internal loads
in one particular room are off and all the people leave, when other rooms are
on full cooling. In theory then the reheat capacity required could then be the
total room internal load.
An estimate of the Maximum and Minimum room dry bulb. The zone or room
temperatures will differ from the AHU temperature when for example a
number of rooms are served by a single cooling coil (single zone Heating and
Cooling). This estimate of temperature is based on the room load at specified
room conditions and the design Air Quantity without any adjustment because
of the change in room sensible load due to the change in room temperature.
The room RH (at the time of the peak load of the AHU).
•
•
[
t
[
Cooling Check Figures
i
r
r Heating Results & Check Figures
AHU1 Grad Shopl
2 Coffee Shop
2 Grad Shor>3
Tables
I'nr.t ivi
Load Charts
Zones & Rooms
Project
P Cooling Results
jv' [CoQiinp_Check Figures
aJ
r* Combined Results
ZONES AND ROOMS COOLING CHECK FIGURES
! (uses adjusted sensible for i/s/kN and SI/si2>
j AHU ZONE
1 HO NO
4
5
1
|
TITLE
Grad Shop4
Tyical Floor
RA SL.A. Scorn
1 North Typical Floor
2 ZONE
East Typical Floor
3 Nest Typical Floor
4 Centre Typica Floor
1/e/ TIME OF
MIN 1/s/
FLOOR VOL
m2 kW PEAK Vf/rc2 MUL
AREA m3 CH/hr CH/hr
252
516
50
66
108
1445 9.6
140
185 30.6
302
151 15.4
1S1 23.0
SOS 4.S
‘.38
6.5
S . 4
90
82.2 2PM APR
4.6
7.5
79.2 3PM MAR 95
10.7
23.S
79.2 11AM APR
5.4
11.6
1.6
12.0
22.5
3.S
79.2
79.2
AQ
79 1.00
300 1.00
SAM JAN 151
5PM OCT 234 1.00
3PM JAN 4S 1.00
Note 1~ Values are at peak times except room CH/Hr and l/s/m2 i3 at zone peek.
1 Note 2~ The zone air quantities are distributed to the rooms in the ratio of
the room floor areas or in the ratio of the room peak sensible loads.
Note 3~ Air change rates with an asterisk have reached either the user entered
minimum, (airchange, l/s/m2 or 1/s) or outdoor air, whichever is the greater.
Note 4~ AQ 2£UL greater than unity indicates that the design air quantities
have been increased to satisfy room minimums. The room with the
it efiect.
largest AQ MUL has the
\
8
Fig 5-50B Typical Zones and Rooms Cooling Check Figures.
This is a table of check figures for the cooling load calculations. It also includes
the floor area, the room volume and a column headed AQ MUL(tiplier).
The A.Q.MUL is an indication of the relative extent that the dehumidified air
quantity had to be increased to satisfy the minimum specified. If it is 1.0 there is
no correction required for this room, zone or air handling unit however the air
quantities for this specific room, zone or the air handling unit may have needed to
be increased to satisfy increases required by other rooms or zones on this air
handling unit. The room with the highest A.Q. Multiplier is the one that had the
106
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
L
I
most impact. For further details see 7-40 Minimum Air Quantity Calculation.
Heating Results and Check Figures
F~ Cooling Results
AHUi
Zones & Rooms
M
f“ Cooling Check Figures
jv* Heating Results & Check Figures
LOtiJ 0\<r1s
Pfir.Mig
<L
P Combined Results
AHU
1 Gmd Shopl
2 Coffee Shop
ZONES AND ROOMS HEATING RESULTS AND CHECK FIGURES
(excluding Outside Air except as noted)
AHU ZONE
NO HO
TITLE
Grnd 3hcp4
5
Tyical Floor
AA R.A. Room
1 North Typical Floor
2 ZONE
East Typical Floor
3 'rlest Typical .
4 Centre Typica
'lC!
NO. FABRIC
OFF kW
AHU
S/A. 0/A ROOM TOTAL
1/s
1/s CDB %R3 kW W/ra3 W/m2
1
2.58
586
75
20.0
30
3.86 10.3 28.7
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
22. Q
0.77
3.23
6.34
3.17
3.35
2.67
1850
0
20.0
IS.2
20.0
30
22.0 15.2 42.7
sso
226
.S'
12
20.Q
20.0
20.0
Note 1~ Supply air for the zones is the ninuinusi supply air quantity
Note 2~ Outdoor air for rooms is the same ratio as for the heating S/P. to O/A..
Note
TOTAL kN includes outdoor sensible air load,
Note 4~ Check
figures are based cn
k a.
8.23 44.9 126
€.34 21.0 53.7
3.17 21.0 53.7
3.35 26.1 73.2
2.67 3.31 3.26
for
VAV
systems.
Fig 5-50C Typical Zones and Rooms Heating Results & Check Figures
This is a table containing for each selected AHU:
•
•
The AHU, zone and room Fabric (heating) kW.
The supply air quantity for heating. For a constant air volume system this is
equal to the cooling air quantity while for a VAV system it is the minimum air
quantity for each zone with the room air apportioned as for cooling.
® The estimated room dry bulb temperature. The room dry bulb will invariably
differ from the zone design temperature (shown in the table on the AHU line)
due to the differing proportion of outside air and heating load.
® The Total (heating) kW i.e. the Fabric kW plus the outside air heating load
apportioned on the basis of the heating supply air quantity. The value for the
zone is the coil capacity required when the reheat coil is to be used for winter
heating rather than a central heating coil.
• A series of heating check figures - Air Changes per hour, watts/cub.m. and
watts/ sq.m.
Combined Results
:_
In this table, for the selected AHU, the more significant results for each AHU,
Zones and Rooms are listed. The quantities listed include:
• The floor area
• The AHU cooling Grand Total Heat and W/m2
For each AHU, Zone and Room:
• The cooling adjusted Sensible heat and W/m2.
• The Supply Air and OutsideAir quantities (I/s) and l/s/m2
• For the AHU the percentage of Outside Air and leaving cooling coil dry bulb
temperature
• For each AHU, zone and room, the number of people
• For each AHU, zone and room, the heating load (kW) and W/m2
Selected parts of the results can be copied by clicking and dragging and then right
clicking the mouse
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
\
107
St!
P Cooling Results
P Heating Results & Check Figures
AHU
1 Grnd Shopl
2 Coffee Shop
r
Printing
Zones & Rooms
sg
f** Coding Check Figures
M ~Combj-iedRe-u}j-j
ZONES AND ROOMS COMBINED RESULTS
>
<--
-CQOLIHG-----------------------------------------------SUPPLY AIR <----- OUTSIDE AIR------> Lvg
%of Coil HEATING
per pel*
per
kW N/ra2
m2 PERS S.A CBB
1/s ra2 1/s
FLOOR Ho
GTH ADJ SENS
AHU ZOH BOCti AREA of
«? M/m2
M2 PEOP iM V?/m2
NO NO No
Grad Shop4
10 S.S8 74
90.0
4
5
RA
1
2
3
4
7.13
Tyical Floor
55 SO.2 117
Sic
4
50.0
?
SS.O
103 11
£
i 54.0
S
54.0
2 33 23
75
586 6.52
79
48.S 95 3SS4 7.49
3.IB
1570 23.8
13.8 300
1293 12.0
15.3 151
S.i€ 151
S4S 12.Q
.5
15.4 284 1217
45 1033 2.53
13.0
0.S3 7.5
5.9
32SD 0.S4
13 13.8
4.32
46
8 13.4
22.0
43
I
f
8.29 126
S . 34 S9
59
3.17
73
3.95
3
2.67
S£U 1.00 10.0
-108D 1.00 10.0
54D 1.00 10.0
54D 1.00 10.0
10QD 0.35 3.5
Hc-te ~ D artex outside air quantity indicates direct tc room
Fig 5-50D Typical Zones and Rooms Combined Results
5-60
Room Load Charts Tab Page
Below the toolbar is the checkbox panel. On the left hand side of this panel is the
Room selection list. A selection can be made here by left clicking (single
selection), Cntrl left clicking (multiple selection) and Shift left click (selection from
single selection down to current cursor position).
gf
/onus f» Ruuins
m
JA1IIU I
t 1 MWZ Topical Nox < n
II
F.
3 x axtrs Tj,-i?icax m&t g
4 1 RHU4 'Topical Cent* '
i ■
i'ST.
'jtjiJ Ch'i.'f ,
|
.r f'it.j RcSeiafion
AHU 1 AHU1 Typical East, Z1,Rm1 AHU1 Typical East
3PM MAR
ROOM COOLING LOAD CHART AT
(SUB POSITION - ALTITUDE = 36.4 A2IHUTH =301.6)
SOLAR GAIN GLASS (350 kg/m2. Modified storage load factors used)
men. grin smn m® stor shade room
No TYPE SUN EXPOSE
0.0
#1 NINl ON
20.0
90%
388 1.17 1.11 .329 0.60
mTTS
80
SOLAR. AND TRANSMISSION GAINS WALLS AND ROOFS (Using light wt roof data)
SEES T-BIEE WDLVE ROOM
No TYPE SUN EXPOSE S.BENS DBS
#1 B1
ON
0.0 (422 0.70)
TRANSMISSION GAftl EXCEPT WALLS
No TYPE ITEM
11.5
20.0
2.86
90% *
493
UREA T-BIFS? UVRLUE ROOM
8.3
4.1
S.90
2.30
10.0
70.
100% =
100% *
SAFETY FACTOR 5.0% =
700
1600
175
SUPPLY DUCT HEAT GAIN AND LEAKAGE LOSS
ROOM SENSIBLE MEAT «
1.0%
3611
37
SUPPLY DUCT HEAT GAIN AND LEAKAGE LOSS
ROOM SENSIBLE HEAT =
1.0%
3671
37
#1 NINi GLASS
PARTITION 1
INTERNAL HEAT GAIN
PEOPLE (ACTIV = 4)
LIGHTS (FLE 3S0 kg/m25
6.0
23.0
90%
1
I
I
3708
100%
60.
10.0
SAFETY FACTOR 5.0%
600
30
ROOM LATENT HRKT
630
HDJUSTED ROOM LATENT MEAT ™
[
264
220
SBJVSTEB ROOM SENSIBLE HEAT
LATENT HEAT GAIN
PEOPLE (ACTIV * 4)
I
630
Fig 5-60A Typical Room Cooling Load Chart
108
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L,
The check boxes on this Tab Page are:
f.
Cooling Load Chart (refer Fig 5-60A)
This is the detailed cooling load chart for the selected rooms. It includes the
solar, conduction, internal etc. loads with details of the user input items, and
values such as storage load factors extracted from tables stored in the program
so that the user can check in detail each load in the load chart. It does not include
outside air loads, supply duct gains etc. which are AHU coil loads. The load chart
includes room sensible, room latent, etc. sub-totals and the room total sensible
and latent loads and the grand total heat for the room. It does not include outside
air and return duct gains. These are added in the AHU Cooling Load Chart (refer
fig. 5-40B)
The following items of the cooling load chart require further description:
Solar Gain Glass
The value printed in brackets after this heading is the storage mass in kg/m2 used
in determining storage effects.
The # number at the beginning of each line is the external surface number. The
dew point correction factor included on each line is calculated by the program.
Solar and Transmission gains - Walls and Roof
The # number at the beginning of each line is the external surface number.
Lights
The two values printed in brackets after lights are the light type and the storage
mass in kg/m2 used in determining the storage effects.
Mixed and Return Air By-pass Adjustment
When a return air by-pass (RET) or a mixed air bypass (MIX) is nominated the
transfer of load to the leaving side of the apparatus by the by-pass air is shown in
the load chart as Return or Mixed air bypass adjustment.
Heating Load Chart (refer Fig 5-60B)
This displays the winter heating room load chart ie. the fabric load plus infiltration load
for the selected room(s). If a “% for Heating” has been entered for any of the internal
loads, then these percentage loads are deducted, thereby reducing the total heating
load. If the total heating load is, as a consequence, negative, then there is no net
winter heating load. Note the total heating load chart (which includes the O/A load) for
the AHU serving this zone is shown on the AHU Tab page. (Refer Fig 5-40C)
i§
22
i* ]
■HI
■ I!
2
i i
l£
ior
r.C'i‘
:
i
2 x jure
T ical
fc
3 1 3IMV3 Topical \fesfc
4 1 J0fU4 Topical Centr
AHU 1AHU1 Typical East, Z1, Rm 1 AHU1 Typical East
ROOM HEATING LOAD CHART
TYPE
expose msa t-biee mmum
mrts
DJAkL
0.0
21.0
13.*? Z, S3 =
857
GLASS
0.0
6.0
13.7
S. 43 =
SZ9
23.0
0-0
2.30 «
0
r
PARTITION 1
ROOM SENSIBLE HEItT ~
138 6
Fig 5-60B Typical Room Heating Load Chart
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
109
Data Reiteration (refer Fig 5-60C)
This is a detailed list of all input data that is not included in the room load charts.
c
!
. *
m.
“At
5
r
r
i;.-. ir-i.
r;.it
4 X CENTRE Graxmd
5 X NORTH First Fir
2 ERST First Fir
3 WEST First Fir
4 CENTRE First Fir
€ X NORTH Second Fir
2 ERST Second Fir.
3 WEST Second Fir.
4 CENTRE Second Fir.
7 X NORTH Third Fir.
2 ERST Third Fir.
3 WEST Third Fir.
4 CENTRE Third Fir.
8 X NORTH Fourth Fir.
2 ERST Fourth Fir.
3 WEST Fourth Fir.
4 CENTRE Fourth Fir.
r,\\\ i n
i
SUM Ai’,7 Ul' i. fi Ij.’i r.
INTERNS!. LOSES
1. Mill 1 iiOivTH liir.iHiil
i.1
11 [r.k:blll.Mo/:lJiMIA!'.r
NO OF PEOPLE
LIGHTS (KW)
APPLIANCES SENS (KW>
6SH 7RH 8RM 9?iM XORH 1XRM NOON 1PM
0.0
0.3
0.0
0.0
0.3
0.0
7.7
1.7
0.0
19.2
2.9
0.6
19.2
2.9
1.0
19.2
2.9
1.0
11.S 11.5
2.9 2.9
1.0 1.0
except for adjacent shading)
EXTERNAL SURFACES (Bimaartsiosts in
(ELEMENT SIZE FOP SHADING IS 0.080 m2)
(2ER0 SURFACE EXPOSURE IS NORTH)
SURFACE NUMBER
SURFACE EXPOSURE
SURFACE HEIGHT
SURFACE WIDTH
NALL TYPE
WINDOW TYPE
WINDOW HEIGHT
WINDOW WIDTH
WINDOW NUMBER OFF
SURFACE SHADING
OVERHANG DEPTH
l,
■
WS
02
01
03
I:
04
0.0
90.0 270.0
0.0
3200
3200
500
2700
8000
8000
24000 24000
¥5
WS
WS
SBRNZ
2700
24000
1.0
1
1000
STANDARD SURFACE TYPES
110 brick, Airgap,
Volume
Floor Area 192.0 ia.2
i
;: i i'i •;
: ».. i »*»..
li-
Rl.S
•518. 4 m3
batscs,
lOan plasterboard
Average Ceiling Height 2700. ma
[
Fig 5-60C Typical Data Reiteration for Room
5-70
Printing Results Tab Page
In this Tab Page the selected results can be viewed before printing and page
breaks can be inserted. All items that are checked on the four Tab Pages to the
left of this one are automatically loaded into the Printing Tab Page together with a
CAMEL banner page on the first screen.
[
Note that selected parts of the results can be copied to the clipboard by
clicking and dragging and then right clicking the mouse
The Menu Bar
The items on the Menu Bar of the Printing Tab Pages are:
File
Open - Opens a set of results files. When this is selected a selection box for
the user to select the main output (.OUT) file is displayed. When a
selection is made, this loads in all the results files for this project.
Close - Closes the current set of results files
L
[
Font
Sets fonts for the headings, text, etc.
Search
Find - Finds in the currently displayed results, the string that is entered in the
Find dialogue box that appears on screen
Find Next F3 - Finds the next occurrence of the string
I
1,
r
Help
L,
110
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
File 7c--
' Font Save Text Format Search Graph Psychrometrics
Help
aisiz n
Zones Si Roor-'S
Project
Custom Page Break p" Lines pet page
Load Charts
L
Printing
pr
Fig. 5-70A The Printing Tab Page ToolBar
The Tool Bar
The items on the Toolbar are:
ifijTj
'■tttI Close - Closes the current set of results files
& Open - Opens a set of results files
Print - opens a Print Preview Screen where the layout of the compiled results
file can be previewed, printed or exported to Word or to a HTML fie.
JL Help
Below the Toolbar are two additional items for controlling the results file printout:
0
This is a slidebar that controls the left margin on the page.
Custom Page Break] 0
Checking this check box causes Page Breaks to be
inserted at intervals as defined by the Lines per Page or at specific locations
defined by the user. If Page Breaks at specific locations only are required,
the number of lines per page is set to blank.
Lines per page
controls the number of lines per page for custom
m Thispage
breaks.
The user can enter their own specific Page Breaks or delete existing Page Breaks
by locating the cursor on the desired line or existing page break and then right
clicking the mouse. Note however that if you return to the Project, AHU,
Zones and Rooms or Load Charts Tab Pages and make new selections, all
user defined specific page breaks will be lost once you make any new
selections of the results.
Print Preview
lill]
Fafon We if. | JMSWwd.RTF
3
Id
Fig. 5-70B The Print Preview Toolbars
On this Screen the user can preview the Results before sending to the printer.
Items on the First Toolbar
ltd Close and return to the Printing Tab Page
-ZJ Help
Export file to:
MS Word .RTF
3
Provides for exporting the Results File
to an MS Word RTF format or Internet HTML format file. If the file is
exported to MS Word RTF, the program Word is opened and the file is
loaded ready for the user to edit or add other text (such as a report), etc.
Items on the Second Toolbar - for Print Previewing
FiTil 217 FIliH Page control ie. which page(s) to be displayed
CSD Zoom the current page implemented by successive clicking with the
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
111
i
left mouse.
S
Zoom Page - A selection from:
Whole Page - displays full page on screen
Page Width - full screen width for current page.
Two Pages (on Screen)
Multi Page - from n to last, where n is the current page set in Page
Control above 150%, 100%, 75%, 50% or 25%
Note that double left clicking the mouse zooms in on the selected page and
double right clicking the mouse zooms out on the selected page
[
!
Send to Printer - this sends the file to the printer, opening the WINDOWS
Printer dialogue box and enabling the user to print the whole file, the current
page, or set other printing options.
5-80 Table Results Tab Page
Ffe
Mist A B-J Si'li
P* Compete
Tcb’ec
Ch*e?
Type
-HU
[
* 3T‘,h-J
Circuit
•
Tables
Zones & Rooms
Project
:
[
Font Save Text Format Search Graph Psychrometrics Help
G T Sens
r
Ahu 1 Grnd RCHP1
G.T.Lat
^
Zone
Adj.Sens
;
Room
Arfj.Lat
Grand Total heat (kW)
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun. JuX Aug Sep Oot Hov Dec
SAtQ
: Precon
• OASera
OAUt
AHU
2 Gr rui KHW2
3 Grnd RCHP 3
4 Grnd RCHP 4
9am
10am
Liam
Noon
1pm
2pm
4pm
5pm
8.7
8.5
S.2
9.9
9.5
9.0
10.7
10.1
9.7
11.3
10.7
10.3
12.1
11.5
11.2
13.0
12.6
12.3
14.8
13.9
13.6
14.4
14.9
14.4
12.6
14.0
14.6
Maximum value is -
6.4
7.9
8.8
9.4
10.3
11.9
12.6
11.0
9.6
0.3
0.0
3.1
1.9
1.6
4.7
2.8
2.7
5.7
3.5
3.4
6.4
4.8
5.0
8.0
6.4
6.1
9.3
5.9
9.2
4.6
4.S
7.6
3.3
3.3
6.S
14.9 kW at 4pm Feb
1.6
3.1
1.0
4.7
5.4
7.0
6.2
4.8
5.9
3.2
6.8
1.1
7.4
5.1
8.0
5.8
8.8
6.5
9.9
7.7
6.3 7.9 9.7 11.6
11.9
8.6
10.5
7.2
7.5
8.3
8.9
9.6
10.4
11.6
12.8
13.9
13.4
8.0
8.9
9.5
10.1
11.0
12.1
13.3
14.0
14.2
[
[
Fig 5-80A Table Results Showing Typical Table of GTH for an AHU
This Tab Page provides for displaying and printing any of the tables of results.
The tables comprise loads, air quantities, room temperatures and reheat
quantities. Selection is made by selecting the Table and Type required via a
series of radio buttons on the left of the display and then selecting the Chiller,
Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner as appropriate from the selection list
below. Only one table can be viewed and printed at a time and the printing is
independent of the Print Results Tab Page ie. selected tables are not dumped to
the Print Results file. The Tables can however be exported to Excel.
The items on the Menu Bar are:
File
Open - Opens a set of results files. When this is selected a selection box for
the user to select the main output (.OUT) file is displayed. When a
selection is made, this loads in all the results files for this project.
Close - Closes the current set of results files
Font
[
[
- Sets fonts for the headings, text, etc.
Save Text Format - Saves the font settings
Search
Find - Finds in the currently displayed results, the string that is entered in the
Find dialogue box that appears on screen (Refer Fig 5-20B)
Graph - Produces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity Tables (Refer clause 5-100)
Psychrometrics - Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
Help
112
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
|
L
l
The items on the Toolbar are:
Close - Closes the current set of results files
QK
J Open - Opens a set of results files
Print - Prints the table currently displayed.
llllli
JProduces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity Tables (Refer clause 5-100)
i Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
This exports the current table(s) on screen into Microsoft Excel
9
Li-J Help
To the left of the display is three panels
t
Tables - a selection from
Chiller -Tables for Chiller
Circuits - Tables of cooling GTH for any Circuits entered
AHU - Tables for the Air Handling Units
Zone - Tables for all the Zones
Rooms - Tables for all the Rooms
HCU - Tables for the Desiccant Humidity Control Units
Precon
Humidity - Tables for the Humidity Controlled Pre-conditioners
Temp - Tables for the Temperature Controlled Pre-conditioners
Type
The type of table is also required and this is selected on the Type panel
- Cooling G.T.Heat
- Cooling G.T.Heat for selected circuit
- Cooling coil for selected AHU:
G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat,
the Sum of the Room Adjustable Sensible and Latent heats,
the Supply Air quantities (VAV systems only) and
the Outside Air Sensible and Latent Heat
Zone
- the Sum of the Room Adjustable Sensible and Latent heats for the
selected Zone,
- Reheat values (kW) (Reheat systems only)
The values for reheat will depend on whether the leaving cooling coil
temperature is reset (nominated on the AHU screen to the right of the
System Type). With no reset, reheat will be required whenever the
cooling capacity exceeds the cooling load. With reset, reheat will only be
required if the required air quantity is less than the specified minimum or
the outside air quantity, whichever is the greater.
Room - the Room Adjustable Sensible and Latent heats for the selected Room.
- the Supply Air quantities (VAV systems only)
- the Room temperature
- the Room Relative humidity
HCU (connected to a single HCU)
CW Precooling Coil
- G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat of the selected HCU.
DX Coil
- G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat of the selected HCU.
- (AHU+HCU), the combined Grand Total Heat of the selected HCU
(Desiccant and Pre-cooling coils) and the cooling coil of the AHU
connected to this HCU.
- the moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel in the selected HCU.
- the leaving specific humidity of the selected HCU (g/kg)
- the percentage of time in each hour that the selected HCU is operating. If
this is less than 100% then the HCU is cycling and if it is zero the
desiccant wheel in the HCU is not operating.
Precon
Humid - Humidity Controlled Preconditioners
Same tables as those for a HCU connected to a single HCU except that for
AHU+HCU the values are for the combined Grand Total Heat of the
Chiller
Circuit
AHU
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
113
selected Preconditioner (Desiccant and Pre-cooling coils) and the cooling
coils of ALL the AHUs connected to this Preconditioner.
Temp - Temperature Controlled Preconditioners
G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat of the cooling coil in the
selected temperature controlled preconditioner.
5-90 Errors
If there are errors when the calculation program attempts to read the input file or if
there are errors in the calculations that cause the program to abort, a list of the
errors is displayed on the Printing Tab Page, (refer Fig. 5-90A). The list details the
AHU, Zones and Rooms in the Project with a description of each error that has
been encountered or the message DATA CHECK OK if there has been no errors
on a particular AHU, zone or room. The list can be printed with or without page
breaks as for the normal results.
For a detailed list of the ERRORS and comments on the errors refer Chapter 4.0
1
1
!
Pnrstmg
[
1
M Ur? .' r-Ef P3££|5Q
JOB TITLE - TEST DATA FOR WORKSHOPS - $ STOREY BUILD
- DATA CHICK OK
- DATA CHECK OK
PROJECT DATA CHILLERS & BOILERS
AHU NUMBER i
1
I
ERROR} AHU COIL SCREEN
MIX OR RET WITHOUT LV&, BF OR DEW PT
AHU NUMBER |
ZONE NUMBER }
Z
SUMMER CDB OUTSIDE RANGE OF S TO SO
HIM. LVG TEMP. WITHIN 1 DEG OF ROOM
SUMMER RH OUTSIDE RANGE 10% TO 1001
SUMMER DRY BULB AND/OR RH NOT ENTERED
SUMMER DRY BULB AND/OR RH NOT ENTERED
ERROR! AHU SCREEN
ERROR} AHU COIL SCREEN
ERROR! AHU SCREEN
ERROR! AHU SCREEN
ERROR! AHU SCREEN
t
r
Fig 5-90A Errors Displayed
5-100 Graphing the Load and Air Quantity Tables
This screen provides for graphing of the Tabular results from CAMEL.
The Graph Screen is accessed from the menu or tool bar on the MAIN Screen. In
this Screen the required graphs are set up, annotated, viewed and printed. On
entering the GRAPH Screen, CAMEL opens the “current project” but any other
project may be opened.
In the GRAPH Screen:
f
[
The menu bar and tool bar contains:
1C
(
Close - closes the GRAPH Screen
Open - Allows the user to open a another set of project table
LNHelp
I
Save - Save the graph colours
[
114
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
To the left of the display is five panels
Tables - a selection from
I
- Tables for Chiller
- Tables for Circuits
- Tables for the Air Handling Units
- Tables for all the Zones
- Tables for all the Rooms
- Tables for the Preconditioners
Chiller
Circuits
AHU
Zone
Rooms
Precon
Type - a selection from:
GTHeat
GTSens
GTLat
AdjSens
- Grand total heat (Chiller, AHU or Preconditioners)
- Grand total sensible heat (AHU only)
- Grand total latent heat (AHU only)
- Room sensible heats. This is the sensible load without outside air
and return duct gains. (AHU, Zone or Room)
AdjLat
- Room latent heat. This is the latent load without outside air and
return duct gains. (AHU, Zone or Room)
- Supply Air quantities (VAV systems only)
SAirQ
OASens
- Outside Sensible Heat (AHU only)
- Outside Latent Heat (AHU only)
OALat
Temp
- Room temperatures (Room only)
Reheat (Reheat systems only)
With Reset - Estimated Reheat quantities when the leaving coil temperature is
reset to that required for the room with the highest percentage load.
No Reset - Estimated Reheat quantities when the leaving coil temperature is
maintained constant at all times.
1 sties
; UiiKer
Type
* G » He-’
* Circuit
*
«
*
MU
:
Zone
’
Boom
G.T.Sens
Grand Total Heat JAN
G.T.Lal
150
Adj.Sens
*
i Brecon
Un-'
■Jm
kY'atb
Adj.Lat
SAirQ
135!
OASens
!
QAIat
120 -I
105-
-1\
V
M 90 -i.
IviBf
Typical
IvaV Top
g-
X
Montn
n/
75-
-5
Feb
Mai
!Api
,May
|Jun
Jul
,Aug
Sep
o
SO-
}j
45 -
« l
I
m
-q
l
Oct
{Nov
[Dec
/
30 -
15 l
I
:
0
1
g GrndRCHP
2
3
4
5
7
9
10
11
12
13 U 15
Time (hour)
Grrrd RCHP2 Gmd RCHP3 ^ Grnd RChP jjg YAY First %
16
17
A
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
O
Fig. 5-100A Typical CAMEL Graph showing Zone Loads v Time.
Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner - This is a selection list for the AHU(s),
Zone(s), Room(s) or Preconditioner(s).
To compare values between different Circuits, AHUs, Zones, Rooms or
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
115
Preconditioner(s), the user selects the AHUs, Zones, Rooms or Preconditioners
required and a particular (single) Month.
If a single Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner is selected then any
number of months can be selected.
Multiple Selection
To select more than one Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner from the list
• if they are in sequence hold the mouse down and move over selection.
• if they are scattered select holding Ctrl key down.
Month - This allows the user to select either one or a number of months. If a single Circuit, AHU,
Zone, Room or Precon is selected then any number of months can be selected. If more than one is
selected, only one month can be used.
Units - This allows the user to select the units for the values plotted on the graph.
The units available are:
With air quantities - L/s or L/s/m2 of floor area.
With heat loads -Watts or W/m2 of floor area. Per m2 is useful when one zone
is significantly larger in area (and hence presumably loads and air quantities)
than another. It normalises the chart on the basis of area.
•
•
On the graph itself a toolbar allows the user to set up the style of graph, the graph
legends, etc. and to print the graph.
The buttons on the toolbar are:
E? Import Chart
MlExport Chart
ss|Copy to the clipboard as a bitmap. This allows the user to export the chart
into another document e.g. a report being prepared on a word processor.
JJCopy the data to the clipboard as text.
Mi
Print - prints the chart
l I * Select graph type
tM Change colours on graph
oggles to 3D
y Rotates the chart in 3D
a]Zoom allows magnification by selecting the area on the chart with the mouse
y Toggles vertical grid lines on the chart
y Toggles horizontal grid lines on the chart
y Allows the user to edit the chart titles
piFonts - sets font for selected items
y Tools - pop up allows user to edit and change the legend
^.1 Graph options - pop up allows user to change the shape colour and size of
points, show values on the chart, scale the axis and much more.
The legend - This by default appears at the base of the chart but can be moved
to any other position or made floating by dragging and dropping. If the legend is
floating it does not get printed when the chart is printed.
116
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
I
5-110 Viewing Shadows on Walls and Roofs
"j^j Swfece Hof'■
Bootn; {NORTH Ground
I
\
<
<
Xi
m
-x
'
/
&
t
\
>y\
>
„
5*
VS ”>
0,o To
s
«v
<$6<
&
*> <
ooc
-V
W0\
0»
IY
->
:WVs\;
•v
o<>
-Y
>x
I
*'
>CK Y
•<X
<V
<3
KXX
%
0$
v
><
<Y C'Cx
S
tation
''Y V V<\
V
s
v
6<
v>
Out
y
y
xV;
Py
p§§?
5oy
Xy
►
'■r
Otsp'-v
Oblique |~~
✓
V
Yo!o^fa/’$fyi@'s
j Latitude ’.
t'oioUfS
Shadow Style
Solid
<*' Outline <•
Attitude ' -,
Month j MAR
■ ■
bine |14
Azimuth si;
il
F?
i
■’■‘I
HJn
W «■ L-.. r Year
'
J,) I ii ■
x]
Fig. 5-110A Typical Shadows from an overhang and an adjacent building on an External Surface.
In this screen, the user can view the shadow patterns from shading devices on
any selected external surface entered in the External Tab Page. The shadows
from the shading devices and adjacent shading can be animated so they traverse
the selected wall or roof. The screen display is driven by a control panel at the
bottom of the screen (refer Figure 5-110A) whilst the particular surface and room
are selected from drop down lists at the top of the screen. The functions are: On the tool bar:
■HEx
Close - exits this screen
Print - prints the current screen
fli
Save - saves the current colours and styles
H- Copy chart to clipboard
m Save chart as a bitmap - file name entered on form.
Room
- drop down list for selecting the Room
Surface No - drop down list for selecting the surface No. of the Room
On the Control Panel:
Display - this controls what is displayed
L
L
• Oblique - This switches between a front elevation and an oblique projection
to enable the overhangs and reveals to be viewed. It also shows adjacent
shading objects in oblique projection.
Shading devices - This allows the shading devices overhangs, reveals and/or
adjacent shading, and their shadows to be selectively turned on or off.
•
•
Overhangs
Reveals
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
117
r
• Adjacent
Colours and Styles - this allows the user to select the colours of:
1
Walls, Windows, Shades and Shadows and the:
Shadow Style - This switches the shadow on the wall or roof between
outline (wire frame), Solid or Hatched.
• Overhangs Hatched - The overhangs can be shown hatched or just
outlined (reveals are always shown in wire frame). If an overhang or drop
factor applies then the overhang or drop will be hatched differently (more
open) to indicate that it is partially transparent.
•
|
i .
South/North Hemisphere
•
•
•
•
Latitude - Displays the project latitude
Altitude - solar altitude at time displayed
Azimuth - solar azimuth at time displayed
Month and Time - This allows the user to select a month and time at which
the shadow pattern is to be displayed. The time can be selected using the
scroll bar immediately below. Either Time or Month can be made to cycle
using the animate button the value of the other option being as selected.
Zoom - Zooms in and out
i
f
Animate •
•
Day / Year
Speed - changes speed of animation
By selecting Day, the shadow patterns will be cycled throughout the hours of the
day for the selected month and while this is running the month can be altered by
clicking on the month (to bring up the list) and then using the up and down arrow
keys. By selecting Year, the shadow patterns will be cycled through the months at
the nominated time.
5-120 Psychrometric Charts
This provides a plot of the cooling process on a psychrometric chart for each
AHU.
The items on the Menu Bar are:
Exit - exits this screen
Open - Pop up dialogue box for selection of .PSY (CAMEL psychrometric)
file to be plotted
Help - Help on this Screen
[
i
f
The items on the Tool Bar at the top of the screen are:
B Close - exits this screen
118
i
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
s
r
f
Cto:-:- Op'j.n He:?
Ana i ahus vav
l!f: j i
AHUG01 RCHP
SAMPLE DATA SET 1 - 5 STOREAHUG02 RCHP
AHUG03 RCHP
Room -AHUS VAV
AHUG04 S Zone H&C
iIiaMg|S3*iS
Time and Month-12 AUG
AHU7 VAV + Reheat
AHUS CV + Reheat
AHUS Face t Bypass
2f/
/z
r~*
y
z -~p
15Z
m«Tr,»|„,-rrn
ADP
x
Z>£
A
£,
:»<
10
33337
Z
y
0
z
>4Z z
z
Z-
X
9®
>
IZ
z
y
zl
z
7
31
/
ij
Z
t5
apz
TX
y
y
x"
~ •--' fly
Jm£
3rt
<r
<r"
^33
17
7
ite*!
s
77
Z
/
SSr--
T>< z
z
z
/
// z
z
tz
~-s<Z
Z-.
ZA
>Z
:Z'
sir Ent7=5
z
z
/
"177
/
7
s
>
/
Z
IS
/
/
'7
«£
A
f
7
"yC,
/
/
7
mz
a
71
>7
/
/*• -7
Xl
/
><
483
/
Zak
',xZ
Jjrgjl
M
,-A
*■
Fig 5-120A Typical Psychrometric Chart Screen
a3 Print - prints the current screen
ii Save Colours - saves the current colours
a) Save picture as a bitmap - file name entered on form
0 i Copy Chart to the Clipboard - copies the chart to the clipboard as a bitmap,
so that it can be pasted into another application eg. Into a report. The
bitmap contains only the portion shown on the screen.
m Data Points - Displays the numerical values of the points on the
psychrometric chart in a floating window.
■f
Help
north ty|iir<il
m
AHU selection drop down list - enables
the user to select which AHU is required for the psychrometrics. The up
and down arrow keys provides a convenient way of stepping through the zones.
The items on the Tool Bar under the chart are:
□
□
a
Grid Colour - change the colour of all the psychrometric grid lines.
ZJ Label Colour - change the colour of all labels
0
m
s
s
@
Background Colour - change the colour of the background
Dry Bulb - toggles dry bulb lines on and off
Wet Bulb - toggles wet bulb lines on and off
Moisture - toggles the moisture content lines on and off
RH - toggles RH lines on and off
Data - toggles the psychrometric process lines on and off
Labels - toggles the graph labels on and off
out EH
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
0ln
Zoom - zooms in and out.
119
6 Data Checking and Error Messages
6-10 Data Checking
[
The data entry part of CAMEL performs a range of data checks including range
checks on individual items and consistency checks between items on the same
and in some cases different screens.
When the calculations are performed similar data checks are also carried out.
These were in the original FORTRAN CAMEL program (now called CAMCALC)
but have been left in as a safety feature. In addition other error messages can be
generated during the calculations.
I
f"
All errors produced by CAMCALC are listed in the file .REI which is displayed
(refer clause 5-90) after CAMCALC is run.
6-20 Error Messages
The calculation part of the program (CAMCALC) produces two types of error
messages. These are:
• Fatal errors which prevent the calculations from proceeding. These are
usually due to errors in the input data.
o Non-fatal errors which do not cause the run to terminate, but indicate that the
program has had to adjust some items of input or that the results produced
should be treated cautiously.
I
S
[
6-30 Errors that cause the Calculations to Fail - (Fatal Errors)
Provided users eliminate all the errors picked up with the frowning red faces in the
data entry phase, then they will not normally be required to familiarise themselves
with the fatal errors that occur in the calculation phase.
The fatal errors produced by CAMCALC, except in a few special cases, are each
prefixed with the words INPUT DATA ERROR followed by the name of the screen
or the field which caused the error and the details of the error. Where the error
does not relate to a specific item, a more detailed description of the error is
printed. The fatal errors are of three types:
Specific item Checks
Individual numeric items entered are checked to ensure that they lie within the
range allowed. If the value lies outside the allowable range a specific error
message is printed similar to the following:
[
INPUT DATA ERROR -AHU SCREEN: SUMMER CDB OUTSIDE RANGE OF
10.0 TO 50.0
Cross Checks
A similar type of error message is printed if an item that is required because of
another entered item is omitted, e.g. if a window type is entered in the External
Tab Page but the window type is omitted in the WINDOWS Tab Page.
Run Time Errors
These errors occur during the calculations and produce quite specific error
messages.
120
i
I
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
All of the fatal errors explicitly explain the nature of the error such that the user
should be able to easily identify the problem if they do occur.
The Specific Item and Cross Check errors should only occur in CAMCALC if the
red smiley face errors in CAMEL are ignored and if any of these errors appear
when viewing the results file the user should check the zone summary screen for
any red faces.
6-40 Errors or Comments that do not Cause Calculations to
Fail - (Non-Fatal Errors)
Most of these are regarded as being unlikely to have a major affect on the
program results or are a warning to the user that there is something unusual.
Some however are very important as they indicate that the program could not find
a solution based on the input data provided. They are listed immediately under
the particular zone heading on the comments page.
r" -
The following comments occur when the results are either invalid or very likely
invalid and the results are for data checking only.
THE 'FOGGING' APPARATUS NOMINATED RESULTS IN A LEAVING CONDITION
WITH A RELATIVE HUMIDITY GREATER THAN 100% AT THE REVISED ENTERING
CONDITIONS. THE OUTPUT IS FOR DATA CHECKING ONLY. ***
***THE PROGRAM ASSUMES THAT PLANT PERFORMANCE CAN BE
APPROXIMATED BY ASSUMING THAT LEAVING %RH DETERMINED FOR THE
NOMINATED CAPACITY IS MAINTAINED CONSTANT OVER A LIMITED RANGE.
THE PLANT NOMINATED RESULTS IN THESE LIMITS BEING EXCEEDED AND
HENCE RESULTS ARE LIKELY TO BE INVALID*** (Refer Clause 7-60).
THE PROGRAM WAS UNABLE TO DETERMINE A SOLUTION FOR THIS
NOMINATED FRACTION OF OUTSIDE AIR. THIS DOES NOT MEAN A SOLUTION
DOES NOT EXIST. THE OUTPUT PRODUCED IS FOR DATA CHECKING.***
***TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED ROOM DRY BULB TEMPERATURE THE
APPARATUS REQUIRES AN ADDITIONAL x% GRAND TOTAL SENSIBLE HEAT
CAPACITY. THE OUTPUT PRODUCED, WHICH ASSUMES THIS ADDITIONAL
GRAND TOTAL SENSIBLE HEAT CAPACITY IS AVAILABLE, IS FOR DATA
CHECKING PURPOSES AND TO ENABLE BETTER PLANT SELECTION TO BE
MADE FOR A RE-RUN OF THIS PROGRAM.
(Refer Clause 7-60).
INPUT DATA COMMENT: ALL COOLING LOADS WERE NEGATIVE OR ZERO, LOAD
CHART IS PRINTED FOR INPUT DATA CHECKING ONLY.
Other errors occur during the running of the program which do not make the
results invalid and the messages are printed under Comments in the “Project”
Results. The following lists these messages and describes the action taken by
the program to continue with the calculations. These messages should be read
very carefully by the user when they appear.
*** THE DEHUMIDIFIED AIR IS GREATER THAN THE SUPPLY AIR QUANTITY.
FOR A MIXED BYPASS SYSTEM, DUMPBACK IS NOT ALLOWED WITH ADP OR
LEAVING COIL CONDITION FIXED. SUPPLY AIR HAS BEEN INCREASED TO
AVOID DUMPBACK. ***
*** THE DEHUMIDIFIED AIR IS GREATER THAN THE SUPPLY AIR QUANTITY.
FOR A RETURN BYPASS SYSTEM, DUMPBACK IS NOT ALLOWED. SUPPLY AIR
HAS BEEN INCREASED TO AVOID DUMPBACK.***
INPUT DATA COMMENT: AT LEAST ONE WALL HAS THE SAME LABEL AS THE
STD TYPE. STD TYPE WITH THE SAME LABEL HAS BEEN IGNORED.
INPUT DATA COMMENT: BY-PASS FACTOR HIGH, IN THE RANGE 0.6 TO 1.0
YOU MUST HAVE HOLES IN YOUR COIL.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
121
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: OUTSIDE AIR QUANTITY AND RETURN DUCT GAINS
ENTERED MAY LEAD TO UNREALISTIC RETURN AIR CONDITIONS. RETURN
GAINS ARE INCLUDED IN THE LOAD BUT IGNORED IN THE PSYCHROMETRICS.
With low return air quantity, return duct gains will have a significant effect on the
temperature rise in the return air duct.
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: INSUFFICIENT INFORMATION TO DO
PSYCHROMETRICS. CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON MINIMUM LEAVING COIL
DRY BULB.
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: LEFT AND/OR RIGHT REVEAL IS ABOVE OR BELOW
WINDOW. This is a check for the user as it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
. INPUT DATA COMMENT: LOCATION OF ADJACENT SHADING DOES NOT MAKE
'L' SHAPED BLDG. This is a check for the user as it is possibly (but not necessarily)
an error.
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: NO ROOF, CEILING OR FLOOR ENTERED FOR THIS
ZONE. This is a check for the user as it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: OVERHANG IS BELOW WINDOW. This is a check for the
user as it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
t
t
L
- INPUT DATA COMMENT: OVERHANGS OVERLAP. This is a check for the user as
it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: RETURN DUCT GAINS HAVE BEEN ENTERED WITH AN
ALL OUTSIDE AIR PLANT: PROGRAM IGNORES RDHG, RDLG AND RDEG. In
an all outside air plant, there is no return air and hence no return duct gains.
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: ROOF SURFACE DENSITY ENTERED IS OUTSIDE
RANGE, PROGRAM ASSUMES VALUE OF LOWER OR UPPER RANGE LIMIT. For
roof in sun or in shade and with the Light Weight Roof ETD’s check box on the
WALLS Tab Page checked, the range of surface density is 10 to 300 kg/m2. For roof
in sun or in shade without the Light Weight Roof ETD’s check box checked and for all
water covered or sprayed roofs the range is 100 to 300 kg/m2. For values entered
outside these ranges the program assumes the limiting value.
•
•
INPUT DATA COMMENT: ROOM DESIGN TEMPERATURE IS OUTSIDE RANGE
OF DATA FOR HEAT GAIN FROM PEOPLE: PROGRAM ASSUMES VALUE OF 20
OR 28. When room design dry bulb is outside range of values in Table 45 of Design
Manual - DA9 program assumes value of 20°C or 28°C for calculation of heat gains
from people.
INPUT DATA COMMENT: STORAGE MASS ENTERED IS OUTSIDE RANGE OF
150 TO 700 kg/m2 PROGRAM ASSUMES A VALUE OF 150 OR 700. In
determining thermal storage effects for windows and/or lights the program extracts
values from Tables 6 to 11 in the Design Manual - DA9 for storage mass values
within the range of 150 to 700 kg/m2. For values entered outside this range program
assumes limiting values.
. INPUT DATA COMMENT: SUPPLY AIR IS LESS THAN ENTERED OUTSIDE AIR.
HENCE S/AIR SET EQUAL TO F/AIR AND BYPASS FACTOR IGNORED.
•
122
INPUT DATA COMMENT: WALL SURFACE DENSITY ENTERED IS OUTSIDE
RANGE OF 100 to 700 kg/m2; PROGRAM ASSUMES VALUE OF 100 OR 700. In
determining equivalent temperature difference for walls the program extracts values
from Table 21 in the Design Manual - DA9 for mass of wall per unit area values within
the range 100 to 700 kg/m2. For values outside this range program assumes limiting
values.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
i,..
I
7 Technical Description
In this section the technicalities of some of the special features of the program are
described. The methods used for determining heating and cooling loads and the
associated psychrometrics are as described in the Application Manual DA9
however numerous extensions have been made to the methods and they are
described in the clauses below.
7-10 Heating and Cooling Loads
The cooling load is calculated for each hour of a design day in each month.
Only one heating load is calculated for specified outdoor and indoor design
conditions with internal and solar loads being ignored.
To simplify the input data required and consequently make the program easier to
use, winter 'U' values are calculated from the entered summer 'U' values. The
summer 'U' values are corrected for internal and external film coefficients, the film
coefficients being as stated in the Application Manual - DA9. (Table 24 to 36)
Winter U values for heating are calculated as follows (R = 1 / U value):
The R value for winter = the R value for summer
minus the outside summer film R value minus the inside summer film R value
plus the outside winter film R value plus the inside winter film R value
where (from DA9):
the outside summer film R value is 0.044 (3.5m/s wind speed)
the outside winter film R value is 0.03 (7.0m/s wind speed)
the inside summer film R value for vertical surfaces is 0.12 (still air)
the inside winter film R value for vertical surfaces is 0.12 (still air)
the inside summer film R value for horizontal surfaces (heat flow down) is
0.162 (still air)
the inside winter film R value for horizontal surfaces (heat flow up) is 0.107
(still air)
For Floors and Ceilings on the Partitions Tab Page the R value is adjusted for the
change from heat flow up to down and visa-a-versa and for vertical Partitions
there is no change.
The winter 'U' values so determined are accurate except when the summer 'U'
values input by the user are for components which:
•
•
•
contain an air gap;
contain reflective sheeting;
are neither horizontal nor vertical e.g. pitched roof.
The error introduced by the approximations for these components is generally
small.
The method used is generally conservative and if necessary manual adjustments
can be made to the heating load output.
7-20 Outside air Quantity and Conditions
Outside air quantity can be specified as:
•
•
•
•
a fixed quantity; or
an air change rate; or
as a fraction of supply air.
as an air quantity per person.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
123
• as an air quantity per square metre of floor area.
When specified as a fraction, a fixed air quantity is determined as a fraction of the
supply air quantity at the time and month of peak cooling load. This fixed air
quantity is then used for all other times and months of cooling load calculation and
for the heating load calculation.
The outside air conditions used in the load analysis are the outdoor wet and dry
buib temperature unless an outside to exhaust air heat exchanger is nominated.
When a heat exchanger is nominated the modified outside air conditions are used
in the load analysis.
if Use AS 1668-2012 Multiple Compartment Formula on the AHU Tab Page is set
to YES the program does an initial run based on the entered outside air in each
room and then calculates the required percentage outside air for the AHU using
the following formula:
M
1
eqn 7-20a
1 + R-rc
f
r
[
f
r
Where:
R = Qf / Qs
Qf = Eqf ie. the sum of the initially calculated outside (fresh) air quantities.
Qs = Sqs ie. the sum of the initially calculated supply air quantities to each
room/zone (l_/s)
Qf = the initially calculated individual room/zone outside air quantity (L/s)
Qs = the initially calculated individual room/zone supply air quantity (L/s)
rc = the highest ratio of outside (fresh) to supply air (qf / qs )
The required outside air quantity to satisfy AS 1668-2012 is then:
Qf = M . Qf
And the % outside air is then
P =Qf/Qs*100
The calculations are then repeated with this AHU percentage outside air.
7-30 Outside to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger
The user has the option of nominating a outside to exhaust air heat exchanger.
The heat exchanger efficiencies nominated are assumed to be constant for the
varying ambient and exhaust air conditions.
The conditions of the air into the plant are computed using the following
equations:
tj — to ~ Tlt(to tr)
eqn. 7-30a
where:
ti = temp, of inlet air to plant °C
t0 = outdoor air temperature °C
tr = return air temperature °C
rit = Temperature efficiency of heat exchanger
hj — h0 - T}e(ho - hr)
eqn. 7-30b
where:
h, = enthalpy of air to plant kW
h0 = enthalpy of outdoor air kW
hr = enthalpy of return air kW
rje = enthalpy efficiency of heat exchanger
The heat exchanger can be nominated for any of the processes except
124
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
r
evaporative cooling. When the heat exchanger is nominated the exhaust air is
assumed to be exhausted at the plant (ie. after the return air has absorbed all
return duct gains) whereas if not nominated, the exhaust air is assumed to be
exhausted from each room. As a consequence of being exhausted at the plant,
after absorbing the return air duct gains, some of the return duct gains do not
become a load on the plant. This reduction in load is shown in the load chart as
‘EXHAUSTED RETURN DUCT GAINS.’
7-40 Psychrometrics
CAMEL models seven different psychrometric processes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Constant volume multi-zone with reheat
Single zone constant volume heating and cooling
Constant volume Face & Bypass
VAV NO reheat
VAV with reheat
Reverse Cycle Heat Pump
Evaporative cooling
The psychrometric process can be analysed using either:
i
i
•
The bypass factor of the coil - the program calculates the supply air quantity
and leaving coil dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. This can be interpreted
as an apparatus efficiency. This method is described in DA9.
•
A nominated leaving coil dry bulb - the program calculates the supply air
quantity and the coil leaving wet bulb temperature.
® A nominated leaving coil dry & wet bulb - the program calculates the supply
air quantity and the room relative humidity.
•
A nominated supply air quantity - the program calculates the coil leaving dry
and wet bulb temperature.
With the first two options an Apparatus Dew Point can be specified if required.
The method CAMEL uses to model the different psychrometric processes (air
system types) is as follows:
Constant Volume Heating and Cooling Coil
1.
Do initial load calculations at each hour and accumulate the adjusted room
sensible (ie room loads plus supply duct gains) and latent heat for the AHU ie
sum the zone loads which in turn are the sum of the room loads.
2.
Make first estimate of outside air depending on the way the data is entered
ie. sum of room values, percentage of supply air, etc.
3.
Calculate the AHU coil loads (including outside air) and do psychrometrics at
each hour including fixed bypass if nominated.
4.
Determine time of peak AHU coil grand total heat and the time of the peak
grand total sensible heat. The latter is the time of peak air quantity.
At time of Peak AHU Grand Total Heat:
5. Determine the leaving coil conditions or if nominated the supply air quantity.
6. Calculate zone air quantities at AHU peak load on basis of zone peak load to
AHU peak load. Note, in the current version of CAMEL constant volume
heating and cooling systems are only allowed one zone.
7. Proportion supply air to rooms on basis of AREA or LOAD as specified by
user.
8. Check minimum supply air specified in any rooms and if violated proportion
supply air for AHU and all zones and rooms up to satisfy largest required
increase.
9. Apply AS 1668-2012 modification formula (refer clause 7-20) if requested or
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
125
if not, add up zone outside air quantities and calculate percentage for AHU
and hence the AHU outside air quantity.
10. If outside air quantity not equal to that in 2 above go to 3 and recalculate.
11. Once outside air converged, recalculate loads at each hour for Tables in
results.
12. Estimate the temperature and relative humidity for each room. This is
calculated as follows:
From the required leaving coil condition for the air handling unit (which is
based on the sum of room adjusted sensible and latent heats ie. the
AHU room sensible heat factor line) construct the room sensible heat
factor line for each room individually. These will (unless they are all
thermally identical) have different slopes. The resultant room dry bulb
temperature and relative humidity are the estimated hourly room
conditions.
Note that at other off design conditions the temperatures and humidities
for each room could vary further. It should be also noted that if the room
temperatures do increase (or decrease) the room load will, as a
consequence, decrease (or increase) slightly so that the estimate in
CAMEL is conservative estimate.
!
f
Constant Volume Multi-Zone with Face and Bypass Dampers
1.
Do initial load calculations at each hour and accumulate the adjusted room
sensible (ie room loads plus supply duct gains) and latent heat for the AHU ie
sum the zone loads which in turn are the sum of the room loads.
2.
Make first estimate of outside air depending on the way the data is entered ie
sum of room values, percentage of supply air, etc.
3.
Calculate the AHU coil loads (including outside air) and do psychrometrics at
each hour including fixed bypass if nominated.
4.
Determine time of peak AHU coil grand total heat and the time of the peak
grand total sensible heat. The latter is the time of peak air quantity.
I
At time of Peak AHU Grand Total Heat:
5.
Determine the leaving coil conditions or if nominated the supply air quantity.
6.
Calculate zone air quantity as zone maximum adjusted Sensible Heat divided
by 1.2 times (Room temp - AHU coil leaving dry bulb).
7.
Proportion supply air to rooms on basis of AREA or LOAD as specified by
user.
8.
Check if minimum supply air specified in any rooms and if violated proportion
zone supply air up to satisfy largest increase.
9.
Calculate for each zone, the room entering temperature for peak zone load,
and determine lowest leaving coil temperature.
10. Set AHU air quantity to sum of zone quantities.
11. Apply AS 1668-2012 modification formula (refer clause 7-20) if requested or
if not, add up zone outside air quantities and calculate percentage for AHU
and hence the AHU outside air quantity.
12. If outside air quantity not equal to that in 2 above go to 3 and recalculate.
13. Once outside air converged, recalculate loads at each hour for Tables in
results.
14. Estimate the temperature and relative humidity for each room. This is
calculated as detailed in item 12 of Constant Volume Heating and Cooling.
126
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
t
Constant Volume Multi-Zone with Reheat
1.
Do initial load calculations at each hour and accumulate the adjusted room
sensible (ie room loads plus supply duct gains) and latent heat for the AHU ie
sum the zone loads which in turn are the sum of the room loads.
2.
Calculate sum of zone peak adjusted sensible loads.
3.
At each hour determine the percentage of peak zone adjusted sensible load
for each zone and select the maximum percentage. Multiply the peak zone
load for each zone by this maximum percentage at this hour. This will be the
load including reheat for each zone assuming the leaving coil temperature is
reset to satisfy the most demanding space.
4.
Make first estimate of outside air depending on the way the data is entered ie
sum of room values, percentage of supply air, etc.
5.
Calculate AHU total loads (sum of zone load from 3 plus outside air load) and
do psychrometrics at each hour.
6.
Determine when peak GTH occurs.
7.
From the air off temperatures calculated in 5, determine air quantity
requirements for each zone to satisfy zone peak demand if air quantity not
fixed. If air quantity fixed proportion zone air quantities on basis of zone peak
loads.
8.
Proportion supply air to rooms on basis of AREA or LOAD as specified by
user.
9.
Cycle through zones and check if minimum supply air specified in any room
and if violated proportion zone air quantity to satisfy and adjust AHU air
quantity.
r"'-
10. Apply AS 1668-2012 modification formula (refer clause 7-20) if requested or
if not, add up zone outside airs and calculate percentage for AHU and hence
the AHU outside air quantity.
11. If outside air quantity not equal to that in 4 above, go to 5 and recalculate.
12. Once outside air converged, recalculate loads for Tables in results.
13. Calculate estimated minimum and maximum zone reheat coil capacities.
Minimum is reheat assuming leaving coil temperature is reset. Maximum is
reheat without coil reset.
The way in which the reheat is calculated for each zone is as follows:
(a)
with no reset
Add the zone total room sensible heat divided by (1.2 times the zone
air quantity) to the leaving coil temperature to determine the average
room temperature for this zone without reheat (t-,). The reheat is then
the zone supply air quantity multiplied by 1.2 times the difference
between the entered room design temperature and temperature tv
(b)
with reset
For each particular zone determine (using the calculated zone supply
air) which zone requires the lowest leaving coil temperature. Then
determine the reheat as above using this revised leaving coil
temperature.
Note that this “estimate” of reheat may not be the maximum required. Room
loads at other times could easily give higher values eg. If all the internal loads
in one particular room are off and all the people leave when other rooms are
at full cooling load, ie. in theory the reheat capacity required would be the
total internal heat load.
14. Estimate the temperature and relative humidity for each room. This is
calculated as detailed in item 12 of Constant Volume Heating and Cooling.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
127
Variable Air Volume
1.
Do initial load calculations at each hour and accumulate the adjusted room
sensible (ie room loads plus supply duct gains) and latent heat for the AHU ie
sum the zone loads which in turn are the sum of the room loads.
2.
Analyse as a Conventional constant volume with Heating and Cooling Coil to
obtain leaving coil temperature (or use fixed if user nominated).
3.
Set AHU leaving air temperature as leaving coil or mixed temperature if a
bypass system.
At Each Time and Month
4.
Determine variable air volume air quantity for each zone based on adjusted
room sensible heat plus reheat (if air quantity less than maximum turndown
and VAV with reheat being modelled).
5.
Proportion supply air to rooms on basis of AREA or LOAD as specified by the
user.
6.
Set AHU hourly air quantity equal to sum of zone air quantities and select
maximum as plant air quantity.
7.
If first iteration go to 9.
8.
If plant air quantity same as last iteration go to 11.
9.
Recalculate AHU adjusted sensible heat (adding in reheat).
10. Recalculate air quantities and go to step 2.
11. Once plant air quantity converged calculate hourly loads for Tables (air
quantities already calculated in 6).
12. Estimate the temperature and relative humidity for each room. This is
calculated as detailed in item 12 of Constant Volume Heating and Cooling.
Minimum Air Quantity Calculation
The room air quantities in a zone are proportioned on the basis of floor AREA or
the peak room LOADS as selected by the user. If there are multiple rooms on a
zone, the air quantity to all rooms is increased until all specified minimums are
satisfied. An indication of the extent of the increase is reported in the results in the
Zones and Rooms Cooling Check Figures as an air quantity multiplier The largest
multiplier indicates which room has the largest increase and hence impact on the
zone air quantity.
If there are multiple zones on an AHU:
•
In all systems except face and bypass and VAV with reheat, when the air
quantity is increased in a zone to satisfy a minimum requirement, the leaving
coil temperature will increase and this will necessitate a proportional increase
in air quantity to all other zones.
• In a VAV system with reheat, any increase in the zone air quantity to satisfy a
minimum requirement, results in increased reheat to that zone (without a
change in leaving coil temperature). Hence other zone air quantities are
unaffected.
• In a face and bypass system, increasing the air quantity for a specific zone (to
satisfy a minimum requirement) will result in an increase in the bypass air to
that zone but will not affect other zones
Note that if the load in a room only requires a small air quantity (and hence has a
low air change rate), specifying a minimum for this room either specifically or
using the global value (on the Project Screen) can increase room, zone and AHU
air quantities significantly, eg. A corridor requiring only 20 I/s (say 0.5 air change)
will increase air quantities by a factor of 12 if a minimum of 6 is specified.
L.
t.
I
Mixed or return by-pass process
L
The by-pass processes are normally used when the supply air quantity to the
128
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r
I
rooms is required to be higher than the calculated dehumidified air quantity eg. to
maintain satisfactory air movement without raising the design leaving coil
temperature.
When a mixed or return by-pass process is nominated the supply air quantity
must therefore also be nominated on the AHU-Coil Tab Page. The by-pass air
quantity is then expressed as:
By-pass air quantity = Supply air quantity - Dehumidified air quantity
The resultant transfer of heat from the entering to the leaving side of the
apparatus is printed in the load chart as either MIXED or RETURN BY-PASS
ADJUSTMENT.
It is possible to model a dump back process i.e. a system where the dehumidified
air quantity exceeds the supply air quantity with the excess dehumidified air being
'dumped back' to the 'air on' side of the coil. This can be done by nominating a
mixed air bypass and supply air quantity with a bypass factor but not a nominated
ADP nor leaving conditions.
Evaporative cooling process
The program models evaporative cooling as a constant wet bulb process as an
approximation of the constant enthalpy process. The outside air quantity is set to
100%.
Since the grand total heat for an evaporative cooling process is zero (or
approximately zero), the criteria selected for when the load chart and
psychrometrics are printed is that of peak adjusted room sensible heat (unless
time and month are nominated). In the process the resultant room relative
humidity is computed while maintaining the specified room design dry bulb
temperature. The user is required to specify a room design relative humidity as a
first approximation.
Desiccant Humidity Control Unit
The way the desiccant humidity control unit is modelled in CAMEL is as follows:
1. The ambient design conditions for sizing the Humidity Control Unit is entered
by the user on the Project Tab. The default is the maximum summer design
wet bulb temperature for the location entered and 80% RH
2. The required specific humidity (g/kg) of the air leaving the Humidity Control
Unit (entering the main Air Handling Unit) to offset the room latent load is
determined by the program.
3. The program then estimates the moisture removal (g/kg) (as a function of the
ambient DB, WB and Specific Humidity and the Specific Humidity leaving the
HCU). This value is added to the required moisture (from step 1) to give the
moisture level of the air entering the desiccant wheel
4. The relative humidity of the air entering the desiccant wheel is assumed to be
at 95%. (point D)
5. The cooling capacity of the DX unit, that also heats the de-activation air to dry
the desiccant, is estimated at the entered HCU design conditions as a
function of the enthalpy of the air entering the desiccant wheel and the air
quantity being handled by the HCU. This DX coil capacity is assumed to be
constant under all other ambient conditions and required specific humidity.
6. The dry bulb temperature leaving the desiccant wheel is next calculated by first
determining the dry bulb temperature at the intersection of the enthalpy of
point D and the required specific humidity from step 2. To this is added the
temperature rise of the air due to the residual heat in the desiccant after it has
been re-activated and the supply fan heat to give the leaving conditions from
the HCU (point G). The temperature rise due to the residual re-activation heat
is estimated by the program as a function of the DX capacity (step 5 and the
air quantity).
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
129
7. From the DX coil capacity, the condition of the air entering the DX unit (point
C) is next determined again assuming 95% RH. These conditions are also the
air leaving the pre-cooling coil so that the capacity of the pre-cooling coil can
be calculated.
[
These calculations are then performed at each time and month based on the
summer design conditions for the selected location and the internal room latent
loads, to determine the peak load on the pre-cooling coil and the peak load on the
main AHU, or the main AHUs, if the HCU is a preconditioner serving a number of
AHUs.
For the hourly calculations at each month:
1. If the ambient condition is below point C, then the entering DX coil condition is
the enthalpy of point C and the ambient dry bulb temperature.
2. If the enthalpy of ambient air is less than that of point C then the desiccant DX
coil is assumed to cycle
Because the formulas used in the above calculations are empirical and based on
correlations with a particular manufacturers data, provision is made to re-run
CAMEL with the moisture removal rate (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel and/or the
cooling capacity (at the ambient HCU design conditions) of the DX unit serving the
desiccant wheel. These values are entered on the Project Tab and are used in
step 2 and 4 respectively instead of being calculated.
/
7
4
Pre-cooling coil
DX Coll
20.
15
A
z
—....
10
z±< ><
E
35
A
12
|
E
4SS
2
l
z
*yst
2s
CSs.
i
Ent. Desiccant
wheel g/kg
/
A"
T>
•<
2
H
? —...
>4
ZSP3sss
:2a*.
z
0
'y"''
22
■"> c
Z:
/
2^
22<2
Z
s
** Desiccant Moisture Removal
- Main AHU cooling coll
/
/
i
i
Z.
z
r
>-c
-4- I
—I
2j>5kLv9 desiccant
wheel g/kg 2
1
5
L,.
2 PK.
Fig 7-40A
1
r^sh
2t-T
"2k-
Desiccant Humidity Control Unit Process
7-50 Adjusted Room Sensible, Latent and Total Heat
The terminology of ’adjusted’ room sensible heat, ’adjusted’ room latent heat and
’adjusted’ room total heat is introduced in this program.
The description ’effective’ has traditionally been used to identify the heat quantities
associated with the Carrier method for psychrometric calculations. Using this
method the value for dehumidified air quantity is given by the equation:
130
i
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
r"”
Air Quantity =
Effective Room Sensible Heat
eqn 7-50a
1.2 (1 - Bypass factor) (Room temp - App. dewpoint)
where the effective room sensible heat is:
supply duct
room
sensible + sensible +
heat
heat
portion of outside air
bypassed through
the apparatus
This equation is not strictly correct because the by-pass factor should be applied
to the GTH line. Manually this can only be done by a trial and error process on
the psychrometric chart. With the aid of a computer the exact equation is:
Air Quantity =
(Adjusted Room Sensible Heat)
1.2 (Room temp - Leaving apparatus temp)
eqn 7-50b
where:Adjusted Room Sensible Heat
Room Sensible Heat
+ Supply Duct Sensible Heat Gains
This formula can be employed, using the computer to iterate to the precise
answer. For a further description of the approximation in the Carrier method see
Reference 3.
The program uses the exact equation, ie. the equation 7-50b. The description
’adjusted1 room sensible heat is used to identify the numerator of the equation.
Similarly ’adjusted’ room latent heat is the sum of room latent heat and supply
duct latent heat gains. ’Adjusted’ room total heat is the sum of adjusted room
sensible and latent heat.
7-60 Apparatus Load and Air Quantity Option
This option was in earlier versions of CAMEL but has not been implemented in
Version 5.00 - a future update. It will allow a re-run of the program, to gauge the
effect on room relative humidity of selecting a commercial air conditioning unit
which may be different in capacity to the design capacity calculated in the first run
of the program.
7-70 Light Weight Roofs
One deficiency in the CARRIER method is the lack of provision for modern
lightweight roof constructions in the evaluation of solar and transmission gains
through the roofs. In the CARRIER method, equivalent temperature differences
(ETD’s) are used to take account of the solar and transmission gain through
roofs. They are tabulated for a given latitude, number of hours of plant operation,
3 pm outdoor temperature, room temperature and daily range with corrections
available for other latitudes and conditions. The tabulated CARRIER data (Table
22 page 61 of DA9) only provides for roof surface densities (at the stated
conditions) down to 50 kg/m2. For other conditions and latitudes the ETD’s for
roof in shade are used in evaluating the corrections and the tabulated values in
this case only go down to 100 kg/m2. This is a severe limitation when using
lightweight roofs such as metal decking where the surface density can be 10
kg/m2 or less.
An investigation was undertaken by ACADS to find a means of extrapolating the
available data by comparison with other published data, ie. data published by
ASHRAE, and with computer generated data using the CSIRO computer program
TEMPER. (Refer. 4)
The resulting alternative ETD’s for roofs are listed in Appendix A . The values at
200 kg/m2 and above remain unchanged, while those at 100 and 50 kg/m2 have
been modified and those at 10 kg/m2 are new data.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
131
The alternative ETD’s are used when “Light Weight Roof ETD’s” is checked on
the Wall Tab Page,
7-80 Modified Window Storage Load Factors (SFMOD) and
I
Wall ETD's
One of the limitations of the Carrier method is that the way in which the solar gain
through windows is predicted does not allow for shadows from reveals, overhangs
and other shading devices traversing the window throughout the course of the
day. For a window facing a given orientation, the solar gain at any given hour
when it is unshaded throughout the whole day is determined using equation 780a.
SGij = A x PGj x SLFy x S.C. x Corr.
eqn 7-80a
where SGij
A
PGj
SLFy
S.C.
Corr.
solar gain at hour j
area of window
peak solar heat gain for the particular orientation i, latitude and
month (Table 5, page 25 in the Application Manual - DA9)
the storage load factor for the particular orientation , storage
mass and hour j (Table 6 and 10 in the Application Manual DA9)
glass shading coefficient
Correction factors (Sash, haze, altitude and dew pt correction)
f
I
For a window that is in shade at all times the solar gain is determined from
equation 7-80b,
eqn 7-80b
SGj = Ax PGSx SLFsjx S.C. x Corr.
Where the subscript S denotes the value for shade - normally the south exposure
value but in tropical locations when the sun is on the south facade, it is the north
exposure value.
r~
f:
I
L.
Hour of Day
10
11 noon 1pm 2
8
9
0.44 0.37 0.39 0.43 0.50 0.57 0.64 0.68 0.70
1 SLF (North)
0.81 0.84 0.86 0.89 0.91 0.93 0.93 0.94 0.94
2 SLF(Shade)
220 185 195
215 250 285 320 340 350
3 SG full sun
4 SG full shade 17.8 18.5 18.9 19.6 20.0 20.5 20.5 20.7 20.7
100 50
0
Sun Off
100 100 100 100
5 % shaded
0
0
170 350
0
0
6 SG (unshaded) 220 185 0
18.9 19.6 20.0 20.5 20.5 10.3 0
7 SG (shaded)
21
20 21
180 350
20
8 TOTAL
220 185 19
0
0
0
159 329
0
0
9 Row 8-4
176 195 230 264 299 319 329
10 Row 3-4
= row 9/row 10 = 807/2325 = 0.347
11 F
35
10
20
-35 10
20
35 35
12 Rate max
21
21
21
18
19
19
20
20 21
13 Row 4
104 111 114
70
58
61
68
80 92
14 F (3-4)
88
52
55
63 75
100 115
15 SG (shade)*
148 160 175
112 115 123 135
16 SG (unshaded)
88
77
80
88
100 113 125 140 175
17 TOTAL**
Row Description 6am 7
3
4
5
0.68
0.95
340
20.9
0
340
0
340
319
319
0.63
0.95
315
20.9
100
0
20.9
21
0
194
0.53
0.95
265
20.9
Sun Off
265
-10
21
111
150
210
210
-25
-50
21
102
185
245
185
21
85
265
[
106
* Maximum rate of decrease is half of -50 when load is less than 256
** The higher value of row 13 plus 14 and the total of row 15 x Ashade and row 16 x Asun is used when sun is on
the facade.
Table 7-80Alllustrating the Carrier and the ACADS modified method for calculating Solar Gain Through Windows.
132
L
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
|
The problem with using these two formulae is that eqn 6-70a applies to areas of
glass that are fully exposed to the sun (ie unshaded) whilst 7-80b applies to areas
of glass that are in full shade all the time. When a shadow traverses the window
these formulae do not apply and quite serious errors can occur if they are used the "hump in CAMEL" problem.
ACADS developed a practical method of interpolating these two formulae to
determine the solar gain through a window that has shadows traversing it during
the course of the day. The example illustrates the problem with the Carrier
method and how the ACADS method overcomes the problem.
Consider a north facing window of area 1 m2 situated in the Southern
Hemisphere. Table 7-80A details the calculations involved. Rows 1 and 2 are the
storage load factors for the north facing window in full sun (row 1) and the storage
load factors for the window in shade (row 2).
The peak solar gain for North and South facing windows on a building with a
storage mass of 500 kg/m2 and at 40° south latitude are 500 and 22 watts/mz
respectively. Assuming for simplicity that the SH & A correction factors are 1.0,
the solar gain in full sun and in full shade from equations 7-80a and b are then as
listed in rows 3 and 4 of the table. These values are also plotted in Fig. 7-80A.
400
E
EX
<A
5
300
FULL SUN
a
<
o
cc
< 200
O
M
100
FULL SHADE
6am 7 8
SUN
OFF
9
10 11 noon 1pm 2 3
TIME
100
50
0
4
5
100 SUN
OFF
% SHADED
Fig 7-80A Solar Gain per Unit Area for North Facing Window for Building with
Storage Mass of 500kg/m2 at 40°S Latitude, 12 Hour Plant Operation.
For the purpose of illustration the times the sun is on and off the north facade and
the percentage of the window area that is in shade is as listed in row 5. Firstly let
us look at the total solar gain when equations 7-80a and 7-80b are used,
multiplying the resultant values by the proportion in sun and in shade. These
calculations are listed in rows 6,7, and 8.
The total on row 8 clearly illustrates the "hump" in CAMEL with unrealistically high
values at 3 pm and at 5 pm when the sun goes off the facade. The values are
plotted in Fig. 7-80D.
Now let us compare this with the new method developed by ACADS.
STEP 1 . Determine the solar load (and equivalent storage load factor) when the
sun is off the facade.
This is determined by calculating a proportion between the load in sun and the
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
133
load in shade based on the ratio of the total solar energy that actually enters the
window during the time the sun is on the facade to the total solar energy that
would enter if the window were completely unshaded. To do this the following
steps as tabulated in Table 7-80A are taken.
(i)
Subtract the solar gain for the window in full shade (row 4) from the actual
solar gain (row 8) during the hours the sun is on the facade. The resultant
values are listed in row 9.
(ii)
The solar gain with the window in full shade (row 4) is then subtracted from
the solar gain for the window in full sun (row 3) to give row 10.
(iii)
The proportioning factor F is then calculated as the ratio of the sum of row 9
divided by the sum of row 10.
Expressed mathematically this reduces to:
T (Asun; XQn xSLFN j)
F=
j=1,n
(AShadej X Qs X SLFs j)
eqn 7-80c
L.
A tot S (Qn x SLFjvi j - Qg x SLFsj)
j=1,n
where:
the proportioning fraction
the total window area
the area in shade at hour j
the area in sun at hour j
the storage load factor for North at hour j
the storage load factor for South at hour j
the peak solar gain for North and South respectively
hour number from 1 to n, the hours of plant operation
F
Atot
Ashadej
Agunj
SLFNj
SLFSj
Qn.Qs
i
|r
The solar load at each hour that the sun is off the facade is then:
eqn 7-80d
SGj = Atot(SLFS j x Qs + F(SLFNj x QN - SLFSlj x Qs))
The calculations are tabulated in rows 13,14 and 17 for the hours the sun is off
the facade. The equivalent storage load factor is then:
SGj / (Ajot x Qn)
SLFE,j
eqn 7-80e
STEP 2. Determine the load (and equivalent storage load factors each hour when
the sun is on the facade).
r
400
Example 1.
Rats proportioned
between max. rets end
current value for full
sun. i.e. A/8 * C/D
E
a
tA
5
Example 2.
Proportioned value
exceeds full sun
value - use full
sun figure /
300
o
<
Max. rate of
increase ,.
o
FULL
SUN
< 200
y.
f
O
crt
100
Example 3.
Load at previous hour----less than load at start
of max. rate - use max. rate
LEGEND
a Total load at previous hour
O Load lor area in sun at current hour
6am 7 8
9
10 11 noon 1pm2 3
TIME
4
5
Fig 7-80B Method of determining Solar Load for Area of Window in Sun.
134
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r....’
I
(a) For the area of window that is in sun, the solar gain at the current hour is
increased from the total solar gain at the previous hour by the maximum
hourly rate of change per hour for the orientation in full sun. When however
the total solar gain at the previous hour is greater than the solar gain at the
start of the hour at which the maximum increase occurs, then the rate of
increase is proportioned between the maximum rate and the rate in full sun
at the particular hour. This is illustrated in Fig 7-80B.
Note that, as shown in example 2, if the calculated load ends up higher than
the value for full sun, the full sun value is used, i.e. the full sun value is used
as an upper limit.
(b) For the area of window that is shaded first equation 7-80d is used to evaluate
a base level at each hour. The solar gain at the current hour is then the total
solar gain for the previous hour decreased by the maximum hourly rate of
change for the orientation in full sun with the base level as an overriding
minimum. If the total solar gain at the previous hour is less than the solar
gain at the end of the hour when the maximum decrease occurs, then the
rate at the hour after the maximum rate is used, instead of the maximum
rate.
LEGEND
□ Total load at previous hour
O Load iot area in shade at current hour
400 r
Example 2.
Load at previous hour
is less than
Use rate of decrease
from Lu to Li2
E
C7
</»
§ 300
I
Example t.
toad a! previous hour
is greater than Lu
Use max. rate of decrease
Max. rate of
decrease
a
<
o
Alii
DC 200 FULL SUN
<
o
V)
L12
-J
too
\eM
V>3*e
FULL SHADE
Bam 7 8
9
10 11 noon 1pm 2
TIME
3
4
5
Fig 7-80C Method of determining Solar Load for Area of window in Shade.
If the maximum rate is the last hour of plant operation then this second rate is
taken as half the maximum. The calculations for the solar gain for the area of
window that is shaded is illustrated in Fig 7-80C.
i
These solar gain calculations {in shade & unshaded) are detailed in rows 15, 16
and 17 of Table 7-80C. Once the solar gain values are evaluated the equivalent
storage load factors can again be determined at each hour using equation 7-80b.
The hourly loads for the example in Table 7-80A using the Carrier method (row 8)
and the modified ACADS method (row 17) are plotted in Fig 7-80D. The user can
have the program use this modified ACADS method by selecting “Modified
Storage Load Factors” check box on the Windows Screen. If this is not checked
equation 7-80a and 7-80b are used.
Note that the example (fig.7-80D) to illustrate the differences in the two methods
of calculation is extreme in as much as the changes from full sun to full shade
have been exaggerated. In practice with normal shading configurations the
differences in the two methods, although still significant would not normally be as
dramatic. The user of CAMEL must determine in his own mind whether this
modified method is more realistic. A point to consider in this evaluation is that the
modified method will reduce both refrigeration plant loads and coil loads; normally
more so the former. As a consequence of the peak coil load being lower
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
135
however, it is more likely that the peak dehumidified air quantity could occur at a
different time to the peak load and users should check carefully the relevant
psychrometrics to see if the coil will operate satisfactorily under both peak
conditions.
[
The same technique is used to calculate a modified Equivalent Temperature
Difference (ETD) for walls which are partially shaded during the course of the day.
400
I
£
jr
I
i
i
i
i
t
300 •
i
/
FULL SUN
a
<
o
?
\
/
I
% 200
l
/*/
' CARRIER
> METHOD
O
Cfl
t
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
I
I
I
A
\
t \<
S
1 '\i
i
i
100
i
i i
\ t
i i
i
i
i
/
t
\
\FULL SHADE/
6am 7 8
SUN
OFF
l
t
1
*
\
u
u
1
i
9 10 11 noon 1pm 2
TIME
100
i
f
50
34
0
5
SUN
100 OFF
% SHADED
Fig 7-80D
Comparison of Carrier Method and ACADS modified Method for
Determining Effects of Shading on Windows.
[
7-90 Window, Wall & Roof Shading Calculations
With the extended capabilities provided in CAMEL for modelling a variety of
shading devices on walls and roofs, numerous shadows can fall on any one
surface. Because of the complexity associated with resolving overlapping
shadows where a large number of shading devices are involved, a method for
calculating shading using an elemental approach, has been developed to
determine the areas of external surfaces that are in sun and shade at each hour.
The method involves dividing the facade being considered into a large number of
small elements and then determining which of these elements are shaded by the
shading devices. A shading device is represented by a convex polygon with a
solar transmission factor (in the range zero to unity) such that the effective
shaded area of each element shaded by the device is (1-T)A where T is the
transmission factor and is analogous to a solar transmission coefficient. A is the
area of the element in shade and is assumed to be small enough to be fully in
shade or fully in sun. Generally shading devices are opaque and have a
transmission factor of zero. Complex shapes for shading devices can be
represented by a series of adjacent convex polygons. Where a number of
devices shade the same element, the effective area of the element which is
shaded is assumed to be:As = (1-(TiXT2x
Tn)) x A
eqn 7-90a
where:
Ti
As
A
136
is the transmission factor for each device shading the element,
is the area of the element in shade,
is the area of the element.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
i
To determine which elements are in shade at a particular time, the vertices of the
polygon representing the shading device (the shading polygon) are projected
along the sun's ray onto the surface being shaded. The vertices on the surface
produce a shadow convex polygon. Each element of the shaded surface is then
tested to determine if it lies within the shadow polygon and if so the effective
shaded area is adjusted for the transmission factor of the current shading device.
This process is repeated for each of the shading polygons. The area of the wall
and windows in shade at a particular time is then determined by accumulating the
effective areas of elements in shade which lie within the boundaries of the wall
and window areas respectively.
The above is based on the assumption that if the mid point of an element is in
shade then the whole element can be considered to be in shade. This results in
an error in the evaluation of the shaded area, however if the number of elements
is very large then the error in the calculation of the shaded area is very small and
vice versa.
Consequently the accuracy of the calculation is inversely proportional to the
number of elements in the facade.
Conversely the computer processing time is directly proportional to the number of
elements in the facade.
To decrease the processing time required to perform the calculations, a number
of techniques have been employed. These are primarily directed at reducing the
number of elements that have to be considered for enclosure within a shadow
polygon. Other techniques are also employed because in CAMEL all shading
devices can be represented by shading polygons which are rectangles and
consequently, all shadow polygons are four sided figures with at least 1 pair of
sides parallel.
Two of the techniques used are:• where a shadow line (the side of a shadow polygon) lies within the boundaries
of an element, instead of simply considering the whole of the element to be
completely in sun or in shade, the portion of the element that is in sun or shade
is calculated.
• where a window boundary lies within the boundaries of an element then the
portion of the element that is on the window is calculated (rather than
assuming that the whole element is a window) and the respective areas are
used in determining the heat gain through the window and the wall.
l
/
X- \
V
S'U'A> -f\
*,
1\
CflTH £
t
/
A
Fig 7-90A Shading from
Hoods on Windows and
Walls.
/
/
.. *
?/■
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
!
137
r~
I
OFACT « 1
DFACT * 0
DEPTH
\
\
\
P
«c
DHOF
01 ST
Fig 7-90B Shading from a drop Panel.
'■mkJ.
I#;
m
m
r
§333
'/
rf*
A
/f//
*£/,
/
sT /'
y
s
.Tr ?* xV
y
A*y*iKK
A
DIST
(—vs)
A
1.
s ,S*
ii
w
, /✓* '
y
✓
X?
M-
H
A
/
r
/
/
f.
I
DROP
(—ve)
y
y\/-;
Fig 7-90C Shading from Balconies.
/
r
/y
DEPTH
itT5
*p'
SSI
Disre
VOFF
HOFF
Fig 7-90D Shading from Reveals
and Overhangs on a Complete
Facade.
These two techniques allow the selected element area to be significantly larger
than would otherwise be necessary for a given level of accuracy.
Once the areas in sun and shade have been determined then the heat load for
the window and/or wall is calculated using these areas and the appropriate
storage load factor and/or equivalent temperature difference.
An indication of the wide range of shading schemes that can be catered for by
CAMEL is shown in figures 7-90A to 7-90D and 4-50H.
138
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
i
t
[
7-100 Skylights
The methods of modelling skylights is not well defined in the original Carrier data as detailed in Application Manual DA9. While peak solar gains (table 5) are given
for horizontal surfaces, no storage load factors (tables 5-10) for horizontal glass
are given.
The storage load factors used for skylights in CAMEL are taken as the maximum
value of the storage load factors for vertical glass facing NE, N, NW - see Fig 7100A. This results in the factor remaining high during the period of the day when
the sun is high in the sky but not quiet as high as an E facing window in the early
morning or a high as a W facing window in the evening.
/-SKYLIGHTS
P
.8
o
7
o '
«
u, .6
NORTH
EAST
O
S'*
/--NORTH
.4
NORTH
WEST
Z-*
o
fe-2
NORTH-
//
¥
.1
0
4
6
L
6
7
8
a to 11
AM
12
1
2
3
4 S 6
s
PM
TIME
Fig 7-100A Typical Storage Load Factors for NE, N and NW and the resultant
SLF for Skylights.
The solar gain used in calculations for a skylight in shade, i.e. diffuse radiation
only, is taken as being twice the vertical window shade figure. This is because a
window is exposed to one half of the sky (source of diffuse radiation) while a
skylight (even one in shade) is exposed to virtually the whole sky.
The method of treating skylights allows shading of skylights by both shading
devices on the skylight itself or on the roof containing the skylight. Shading from
adjacent buildings is also considered.
Having established these basics a skylight is then treated in the same way as
vertical windows - even the shading calculations are done in the same way.
However, since the Storage Load Factors and shaded radiation used are
approximations, the results of the skylight load calculation must be considered to
be less accurate than vertical window loads and, as such, it is the users
responsibility to confirm the results especially if the skylight represents more than
a very small percentage of the total roof area above an air conditioned zone.
7-110 Azimuth Angles
The original Carrier data only catered for the eight cardinal points of the compass
for the determination of the heat gain through walls and windows i.e. at 45°
intervals of azimuth. To evaluate heat gain for azimuth angles between these
cardinal points required interpolation. If the tabular data used in these
calculations is plotted it will readily be seen that linear interpolation is quite
inaccurate. The tabulated data dependant on exposure used in the calculations is
(a)
(b)
(c)
L
ETD's for walls
Solar data for windows
Storage load factors for windows.
Plots of all of these are reasonably sinusoidal in shape and a careful evaluation of
these plots for all conditions reveals that 22.5° intervals are sufficient for (a) and
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
139
1
(c) but for (b) 15° intervals are required to enable linear interpolation to be used
for any finer shift in exposure.
All of the existing tables in the Carrier manual of peak solar gain, and SLF's for
windows and ETD's for walls have therefore been plotted and a curve fitted so
600
500
,.>r
With linear
interpolation
between Carrier's
K etrdimi points
Jr*-
r'
2
/
fiS
,xX
m
5 300
8
Si
* /*/
/7
v/ frlarcft/Sept
JOB
A'
\
f\ \
V/
Us y/July
<(
June
7-,V
y\ %y;t
t
Jen
Dec
\k'<S\
V*
^
\
\ww
' \\ \ \ ^
\
too
\
\
<1
Aprtj/Aug'
Now
\
\*4
\
X.
I
r
■Feb/Oct
400
3
w
[
• Carrier Data
X Interpolated Data
C\
0
NE
NW
Fig 7-110A
5
W
EXPOSURE
SE
SW
S
Peak Solar Gain per Square Metre Through Reference Glass; 40°S
Latitude.
that extra data at the smaller increments can be included in CAMEL (Refer Fig 7110A which is a typical plot for the peak solar gain through reference glass).
r
[
[
f
L,
For storage load factors the existing Carrier 'SHADE' figures are applied to the
average south (or north if the north value is lower) solar gain over the period of
the day rather than the peak values which is the case for all the other exposures.
To obtain values for SSE and SSW, values for SE and SW could be used but
values for South (in sun) were not available so these had to be interpolated as
well. Because the shape of the curves in this region are relatively flat this did not
present any problem. The nett result was SLF's for 15° intervals from North and
including South (sun) and SHADE.
In the new tables of solar data (Appendix B) an extra column for the peak value
for south was also required to be used with the SLF's for South when determining
the solar gain when the South window is in sun.
l
7-120 Sun on the Normally Shaded Exposure
The Carrier data for peak solar gain through glass (Table 5 in the Application
Manual DA9) uses the average instantaneous solar gain values from Table 14 for
South and Shade. For the other exposures the peak values from Table 14 are
used.
For the Southern Hemisphere when the sun is on the South facade the south
values used need to be the peak values. The average value for the North
exposure is also often less than the average value for South and should therefore
be used as the figure for shade. To accommodate this an extra column in Table
5 has been established containing the smaller of the average value for South and
the average value for North. These are then the Shade values to be used with the
storage load factors for shaded glass (from Tables 6 to 10). The solar gain
values for north and south are then the peak values from Table 14. The new
interpolated storage load factors (refer clause 7-110) for the south exposure
(north exposure in the Northern hemisphere) are then used (in lieu of the South
140
L
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
(Shade) values in tables 6 to 10) with the peak solar gains each month to
determine the solar gain for glass in sun. The new peak solar gain values are
shown in Appendix B.
7-130 Operation in the Northern Hemisphere
|.•
CAMEL works equally well in the Northern or Southern Hemisphere and entry of
N or S in the appropriate field on the Project Tab Page determines the
hemisphere used in the calculations. CAMEL was originally developed for use in
the Southern Hemisphere and several additions were made in version 3.0 to allow
it to operate in the North.
For peak solar gains and storage load factors it is only a matter of mirroring the
exposures to cater for the Northern hemisphere. For the peak solar gain values
in the Northern hemisphere the peak solar gain for June and July must however
be divided by 1.07; January and December values of solar gain in the Southern
Hemisphere are approximately 7% higher than for the equivalent months in the
Northern Hemisphere due to the position of the earth relative to the sun. To avoid
a sudden step at the equator this increase is assumed to be linearly applied from
a zero correction at the equator to a + 7% increase at 10° South latitude.
One further complication occurs with the peak solar gain data when swapping
from the Northern Hemisphere to the Southern Hemisphere. The data at the
equator is generally symmetrical so that in April in the Southern hemisphere the
peak solar gain for a NE exposure is 440 w/m2. When it is April in the Southern
Hemisphere it is October in the Northern Hemisphere and the value for October is
obtained from the southern hemisphere values by swapping the orientations i.e.
by reading the SW exposure value of 440 w/m2. For the north and south
exposure however the data is not symmetrical. Hence for April in the Southern
Hemisphere the peak solar gain for a N exposure is 105 w/m2. For October in the
Northern Hemisphere reading the value for south exposure yields a value of 80
w/m2,- approximately 20% lower. To avoid the anomaly of the load when a
building is entered at zero degrees south latitude being different from the same
building entered at zero degrees north latitude the values for north and south
exposures in the northern hemisphere are used for both hemispheres at the
equator. These values therefore differ slightly from the values for the north and
south exposure listed in Table 5 in DA9.
7-140 Plant Operating Times
The user can nominate the plant start and stop times for each AHU and it is only
for the hours between (and including) these hours for which the calculations are
performed on each design day.
!
However in the case of windows (and skylights) the data available in the Carrier
Method (DA9 Application Manual) is for 24 hour operation or 12 or 16 hour
operation, in which case the plant is assumed to start at 6 am. The difference
between the window loads for 12, 16, or 24 hour operation is that the 16 hour
operation figures include extra pull down load in the morning which tends to taper
off later in the day and the 12 hour operation includes a higher pull down load in
the morning and this affect may last all 12 hours.
The program determines which of these window factors will be used simply
depending on the operating hours selected.
I
If the operating hours are between 6 am and 5 pm (inclusive) the window figures
for 12 hour operation are used. If the plant is operating after 9 pm or before 6 am
then the 24 hour factors are used otherwise the 16 hour factors are used
(covering operation between 6 am and 9 pm inclusive).
Users should therefore be aware that whenever operating times do not line up
with the original 12,16 (starting at 6 am) or 24 the puli down load due to the
windows may be reduced or even not allowed for at all. This will mean a larger
plant is required or the plant will need to start earlier to remove the pull down load.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
141
7-150 Winter Warm Up Capacity
For buildings with intermittently operated warm air heating plants (e.g. office
blocks) or with dual temperature operation (eg. 21°C during the day and 10°C at
night), additional heating capacity should be provided if unduly long heating up
periods are to be avoided, (from DA9 page 5).
Locations with lower winter design conditions require additional warm up capacity.
In general, buildings of heavier construction or with less daily hours of operation
(longer “off’ periods) require more heating capacity and, for those with lighter
construction or more hours of operation less heating capacity is required.
i;
r
In the case of direct heating (electric heaters in the air stream, direct gas fired
heater in the air stream, steam air heating coil or reverse cycle heating) the extra
heat up capacity is applied to the heating element. (See note on bottom of the
Heating Load Estimate Form, Fig 2 page 7 of DA9)
In the case of hot water heating coils, with heating provided by a boiler, this
additional capacity is added to the boiler but NOT to the heating coils (from DA9
page 5). This works because during the warm up period, when room
temperatures are low, there is a larger temperature difference between the water
and the air which will result in the extra heat being transferred. The extra capacity
of the boiler means that the boiler leaving temperature is at the design value even
though the return water temperature is lower than the design temperature ie. a
larger temperature difference across the boiler.
[
Boiler or Heating coil warm up allowance as show in the table below (from DA9) is
applied in CAMEL.
Difference between Inside & Outside
Winter Design Temperatures (° C)
10.0
12.5
15.0
17.5
20.0
Winter Warm up (%)
10
10
15
20
25
As discussed in AIRAH's DA9 on pages 5 and 6 under Heating Load Estimate this
Winter Warm Up Capacity will enable "average construction" buildings with the
plant operating approximately 11 hours per day to reach inside design
temperatures (during design outside conditions) within 2 - 2!4 hours of boiler plant
start. In the case of direct heating (electric, gas, steam etc.) since there is no
heating of the water, the boiler and pipework, the inside design temperatures
should be reached sooner.
If the heating operates for other than 11 hours per day or the building storage
mass is other than 350 kg/m2 then the Winter Warm Up % is
[
L
Modified Winter Warm up (%) = Winter Warm up (%) x F(Storage) x F(Plant
hours)
where:
Extra Heat Up Capacity is entered on the Project Tab Page. The default is
as per the table above.
F(Storage) = 1 + log(Storage mass / 350) where the Storage mass is the
weighted average storage mass of all rooms on the AHU
Storage Mass kg/mz 100
0.46
F (Storage)
200
0.76
300
0.93
F(Plant hours) = 1.05
350
1.0
400
1.06
600
1.23
800
1.36
1000
1.46
1200
1.54
(10-N)
for Plant hours (N) <= 10 and
l
1.0 - ((N-10)/14)1'2 for N >10
Plant Hours
F (Storage)
6
1.22
8
1.10
10
1.00
11
0.96
12
0.90
14
0.78
16
0.64
18
0.51
20
0.33
The plant operating hours for a boiler is taken as the earliest start time to the
latest finish time of all the AHU's connected to the boiler.
142
!
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
i
Appendix A
Revised Equivalent Temperature Differences for Roofs Exposed to Sun and in Shade.
The values tabulated below are used in preference to those in Table 22 page 61 of the Air Conditioning
Systems Design Manual. For further explanation refer to clause 7-70.
ALTERNATIVE EQUIVALENT TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCES (°C)
FOR DARK COLOURED; SUNLIT AND SHADED ROOFS*
Based on 35°C DB Outdoor Design Temp; Constant 25°C DB Room Temp; 10°C Daily Range; 24-hour
Operation; January and 40° South Latitude
Cond­
ition
Mass of roof
Per unit
Area kg/m2
SUN TIME
6
7
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
-2.2
2.0 13.2 20.8 29.2 36.4 41.6 44.2 45.2 43.4 39.0 31.6
d
50
-1.8
0.6
to
Sun
100
-0.4 -0.2
200
4.4
300
7.2
Shaded
Cond­
ition
Expose
d to
Sun
Shaded
7.2 14.7 22.2 29.0 36.0 40.0 41.8 41.6 39.0 34.0
2.4
7.8 13.0 17.1 25.2 30.6 34.2 36.0 36.0 34.0
3.9
3.3
3.9
6.7
5.6 6.1
5.6
7.8
8.3 11.1 14.4 17.2 19.4 21.7 23.3
11.1 15.0 17.8 20.6 23.3 24.4
400
9.4
8.9
8.3 8.3
6.7
8.9
10-50
-0.6
0.8
1.5
3.0
4.6
6.4
8.0
9.4
10.0
10.2
9.8
9.0
100
-0.6
-0.6
0.0
1.1
2.2
3.3
5.6
7.2
8.9
9.4
10.0
9.4
200
-0.6
-0.6
0.0
0.6
1.1
2.2
3.3
5.0
6.7
7.8
8.9
9.4
300
0.6 0.6 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.7 2.2 3.3 4.4 5.6 6.7 7.2
4
5
Mass of roof
Per unit
Area kg/m2
9.4 11.1 14.4 16.7 17.8 20.0 21.7
8
9
SUN TIME
Midnight
10
11
12
10
22.8 13.6 8.1
8.6
3.8
1.9
0.3
-1.0 -1.9
-2.8 -3.7 -3.6
5.6
PM
6
7
AM
1
2
3
50
27.2 19.4 13.0
6.0
4.0
2.2
0.8 -0.4
-1.2 -1.9 -2.3
100
30.2 25.2 19.4 14.2 10.6
8.0
6.0
4.4
1.6 0.7 -0.1
200
25.0
8.3 7.2
5.6
300
23.9 23.3 22.2 21.1 19.4 17.8 16.1 14.4 12.2 11.1 9.4
8.3
400
22.8
22.8 21.7 21.1 21.1 20.0 18.9 17.2 15.0 13.3 12.2 10.0
10-50
7.8
6.4
3.0
23.9 21.7 20.0 17.8 15.6 13.3 11.7 9.4
5.2
4.0
2.8
1.8
1.0 -0.2 -0.8 -1.2 -1.2 -0.8
100
8.9
7.8
6.7
5.0
3.3
2.8
2.2
1.7
0.6
0.0 -0.6 -0.6
200
8.9
8.3
7.8
6.7
5.6
4.4
3.3
2.2
1.7
0.6
0.0 -0.6
300
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.2
6.7
5.6
4.4
3.3
2.8
2.2
1.7
1.1
Equation: Heat Gain through walls. W = (Area. mz) x (Equivalent temperature difference) x
(Transmission coefficient U, Tables 30 and 32)
*With attic ventilated and ceiling insulated roofs, reduce equivalent temperature difference
25%. (This is not implemented in CAMEL).
For peaked roofs use the roof area projected on a horizontal plane.
For other conditions, refer to corrections listed immediately following Table 23
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
8
PM
10
Expose
[.
Noon
AM
143
Appendix B
Peak Solar Heat Gain Through Reference Glass
(Revision of Table 5 from Application Manual DA9)
This Table of Peak Solar Gain Through Reference Glass is a revision of Table 5 from Application Manual DA9
modified as detailed in clause 7-120 to cater for 15° increments of azimuth angle and to include separate South peak
solar gain values and provide for the Northern Hemisphere as described in clauses 7-130.
Solar Gain in Watts per square metre (W/m2)
SE
s
E
NE
N
SOUTH
Lat
N
or
Azimuth ->
Month
s
4
0°
10°
20°
30'
50°
105 120 135
255 240 225
W
SW
NW
N
150 165
210 195
180
180
S Hoz Sha
45 50
45 70
45 150
105 220
210 305
260 350
45 50
44 47
75
150
255
335
400
435
75
65
160
250
370
440
480
490
160
130
270
350
450
510
525
525
270
240
385
440
507
535
525
515
385
350
480
510
530
510
480
460
480
460
525
535
525
440
385
350
525
515
525
510
460
350
270
240
525
525
480
440
370
250
160
130
480
490
400
325
245
125
75
65
400
435
790 160
770 80
790 32
770 32
740 32
710 32
740 150
760 190
July
Aug & Apr
Sep & Mar
Oct & Feb
Nov & Jan
Dec
May
June
Jan
Feb & Oct
Mar & Sep
Apr & Aug
May & Jul
Jun
Nov
Dec
47
45
90
230
330
380
45
47
60
75
190
315
400
425
55
50
115
185
310
400
460
470
100
80
220
300
400
470
510
510
210
190
350 450
390 465
490 525
520 525
525 510
525 500
335 435
320 420
530
510
520
490
450
430
500
520
545
520
490
420
350
310
525
535
535
495
425
330
240
190
520
540
500
410
320
210
115
90
470
520
390 260 130 830 95
300 165 50 790 40
190 75
45 780 32
90 55
45 730 31
70 50
45 660 29
60 48
45 640 29
365 250 120 780 95
425 315 170 820 135
July
Aug & Apr
Sep & Mar
Oct & Feb
Nov & Jan
Dec
May
June
Jan
Feb & Oct
Mar & Sep
Apr & Aug
May & Jul
Jun
Nov
Dec
47
80
210
350
440
470
45
47
130 210
180 275
290 365
405 455
470 500
495 512
117 190
100 170
290
360
440
500
520
530
270
250
375
445
500
525
530
530
350
345
470
510
525
515
495
470
440
440
550
520
510
460
400
380
510
540
567
495
470
360
285
260
520
560
550
445
375
260
175
140
500
550
470
370
270
160
80
57
440
520
365 240 95 850
235
90 45 780
135
65 45 740
75
50 45 660
50
45 40 570
47
42 40 540
335 215 90 790
415 285 140 840
65
35
32
29
26
25
60
88
July
Aug & Apr
Sep & Mar
Oct & Feb
Nov & Jan
Dec
May
June
Jan
Feb & Oct
Mar & Sep
Apr & Aug
May & Jul
100 175
200 270
330 380
460 490
500 520
510 525
95 165
70 140
260
340
427
507
522
523
240
220
340
410
480
510
510
510
320
300
405 502
475 520
515 522
505 482
485 450
475 425
395 472
375 455
550
520
500
430
370
330
520
540
555
485
445
335
270
215
525
560
530 440
430 340
365 280
225 120
135 50
85 38
500 410
550 470
315
240
190
65
43
38
295
350
200 75 830
105 45 740
100 45 670
50 45 560
38 38 460
38 38 410
185 50 780
230 110 840
55
35
30
26
20
21
49
68
July
Aug & Apr
Sep & Mar
Oct & Feb
Nov & Jan
Dec
May
June
305
210
120
60
50
47
305
350
210
105
45
45
45
45
210
260
Jan
Feb & Oct
Mar & Sep
Apr & Aug
May & Jul
Jun
Nov
Dec
230
320
440
510
520
520
220
180
295 355
365 410
465 487
517 517
516 510
520 505
260 330
240 305
420
460
510
510
490
470
390
370
480
505
522
486
450
425
450
425
532
520
515
445
395
355
495
485
550
510
470
380
320
270
520
550
550
475
370
300
220
165
520
565
530
400
275
205
115
65
492
550
430
320
180
110
38
32
400
450
320
225
100
55
35
32
295
340
205 80 790
125 45 680
60
45 580
40
38 410
35
35 320
32
32 270
185 75 740
225 110 800
51
36
28
23
17
16
48
58
Jan
Feb & Oct
Mar & Sep
Apr & Aug
May & Jul
Jun
Nov
Dec
360
440
500
530
480
440
330
310
400 445
465 482
507 510
525 515
470 445
430 410
375 415
365 415
480
500
510
500
400
370
450
460
520
512
505
460
340
290
490
505
545
512
490
405
265
215
510
535
550 535
500 445
440 352
330 245
200 125
150 80
510 487
550 550
490
380
260
160
60
40
440
525
390
300
180
90
28
22
370
430
285
210
90
52
28
22
265
320
175 70 710
120 45 580
47
38 470
38
35 300
28
28 170
22
22 125
150 65 670
210 100 740
48
35
26
17
11
8
45
53
S
0
0
S
Notes
75 90
285 270
Jan
Feb & Oct
Mar& Sep
Apr & Aug
May & Jul
Jun
Nov
Dec
Jun
Nov
Dec
40°
15 30 45 60
0
360 345 330 315 300
SE
E
NE
345 330 315 300 285 270 265 250 235 210
15 30 45
60 75
90 105 120 135 150
SW
W
NW
N Hoz Sha
195 180
165 180
N
[
L
!
July
Aug & Apr
Sep & Mar
Oct & Feb
Nov & Jan
Dec
May
June
July
Aug & Apr
Sep & Mar
Oct & Feb
Nov & Jan
Dec
May
June
t
Month
<- Azimuth
NORTH
[
l
L
1. Hoz = Heat Gain on Horizontal Glass.
2. Sha = Heat Gain on Totally Shaded Glass; For horizontal glass twice this figure is taken.
3. For Northern hemisphere June and July values from the table need to be divided by 1.07.
ls_.
144
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L.
r'“"
Appendix C
Extract from MASTER.WEA file
r
1;
I
Illustrated below is an extract from the file MASTER.WEA which contains the
monthly design conditions and other data for the the Australian and Pacific Island
locations. The first four lines of the data file describe the data in each entry.
The four lines for each entry consist of:Line 1 Location number and Location
Line 2Daily Range, Latitude, North or South, Longitude, Summer 3 pm Dry
Bulb and Wet Bulb Design Temperatures, Winter 8 am Dry Bulb
Temperature and Relative Humidity.
Line 3Monthly 3 pm Dry Bulb Design Condition (January to December).
Line 4Monthly 3 pm Wet Bulb Design Condition (January to December).
The last value on lines 2 to 4 is the algebraic sum of all the values on the line and
is used to check that no values have been inadvertently modified. The first 8
columns on each line are not read by the program and may be used to describe
the line. The data on each line is in fixed format.
The user may add other data to the file provided it is of the same form and
entered in exactly the same format, complete with the check sums as the last
item on the line.
19-05-15 0000 DESCRIPTION (Last value on line is arithmetic sum of all values)
#1 Daily range, Lat, N or s, Long, Summer 3pm db&wb, winter 8am db&rh, Ref Long,
#2 12 Monthly 3PM DB values(JAN to DEC) | Temps, exceeded on average no
#3 12 Monthly 3PM WB values(3AN to dec) | more than once every 2 years.
WA 1990-2012(3)
1006 WYNDHAM AERO
9.4 15.5 S 128.1 41.4 27.7 18.2 80.0 120.0
11
3PM DB 41.9 41.0 40.4 39.1 37.3 35.0 35.7 36.9 39.8 41.7 42.5 42.4
WB 28.3 28.2 27.6 27.2 24.9 23.6 23.5 23.6 24.8 27.2 27.3 27.9
WA 1993-2013(4)
1007 TROUGHTON ISLAND
6
5.4 13.8 S 126.1 33.5 28.8 20.7 80.0 120.0
3PM DB 33.4 33.5 33.7 33.7 32.6 30.0 29.2 29.8 31.2 32.7 33.9 33.9
WB 29.4 28.9 28.9 28.5 26.8 25.5 24.9 25.8 27.2 28.0 28.9 29.7
WA 1990-2013(4)
1013 WYNDHAM
11
10.3 15.5 S 128.1 41.5 28.9 16.5 80.0 120.0
3PM DB 41.9 40.9 40.3 39.0 37.0 34.9 35.6 36.9 39.7 41.6 42.5 42.6
WB 29.7 29.0 28.6 28.0 26.9 24.9 25.2 25.1 27.1 28.0 28.8 29.5
WA 1994-2013(4)
1018 MT ELIZABETH
546
10.8 16.4 S 126.1 37.7 25,8 17.8 80.0 120.0
3PM DB 37.2 36.7 35.7 35.0 33.1 31.5 31.8 34.3 36.8 38.9 39.1 39.0
WB 26.7 27.7 25.9 24.8 23.0 21.9 21.3 20.9 21.9 23.9 24.9 26.4
WA 1990-2013(4)
1025 DOONGAN
10.3 15.4 S 126.3 38.4 27.5 14.1 80.0 120.0
385
3PM DB 37.7 36.8 36.4 35.9 34.6 32.3 32.9 35.2 37.9 39.7 39.9 39.3
WB 29.6 28.1 27.0 25.8 24.8 24.7 23.5 22.6 25.1 25.8 27.1 30.1
WA 1990-2012(3)
2012 HALLS CREEK AERO
11.3 18.2 S 127.7 40.7 24.7 13.3 80.0 120.0
422
3PM DB 41.2 40.7 39.1 37.7 34.5 32.2 32.4 34.9 38.3 40.6 41.5 41.8
WB 25.3 25.5 24.8 23.3 21.4 19.8 19.5 19.5 20.7 22.2 23.7 24.9
WA 1990-2013(4)
2032 WARMUN
203
12.2 17.0 S 128.2 42.0 27.8 14.5 80.0 120.0
3PM DB 42.5 41.7 40.6 38.7 36.6 34.5 34.7 36.9 39.9 42.2 43.0 43.3
WB 28.0 28.8 27.1 27.2 27.6 24.8 22.8 26.7 25.4 26.0 28.6 27.3
WA 1990-2012(3)
2056 KUNUNURRA AERO
44
10.1 15.8 S 128.7 40.9 26.8 17.5 80.0 120.0
3PM DB 40.9 39.9 39.5 38.6 36.4 34.6 34,8 36.7 39.2 41.0 42.0 42.0
WB 27.7 27.7 26.8 25.9 24.5 21.6 21.4 21.8 23.5 25.9 25.9 27.0
WA 1995-2013(3)
2064 ARGYLE AERO
10.3 16.6 S 128.4 41.0 28.6 16.2 80.0 120.0
165
3PM DB 41.1 40.7 39.1 38.0 36.0 34.3 34.6 36.6 39.6 41.4 42.0 42.3
WB 28.9 26.9 30.2 30.6 28.7 22.4 21.4 21.5 27.6 27.4 25.9 29.7
WA 1990-2012(3)
3003 BROOME AERO
7
6.0 18.0 S 122.2 37.3 27.9 14.8 80.0 120.0
3PM DB 35.7 36.4 38.3 38.0 36.5 33.4 32.8 34.9 37.3 38.1 38.6 37.0
WB 28.6 28.7 28.7 27.4 25.0 23.7 22.6 22.8 24.4 26.6 27.4 28.2
... etc.
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
451.3
473.7
314.1
434.3
387.6
332.5
451.8
472.9
330.8
980.6
429.1
289.3
817.0
438.6
314.2
857.9
454.9
270.6
644.7
474.6
320.3
483.8
465.6
299.7
606.1
465.7
321.2
433.2
437.0
314.1
145
Appendix D
List of Standard Walls and Roofs
The thermal resistance, conductivities and the densities used in compiling the
standard list are listed in Table E.
m2K/W
WALLS
Air Gaps, vertical (still air) No reflective Foil
With reflective foil
Film Coefficient Inside (still air)
Outside (3.0 m/s)
Colourbond
Brick
L.W. Concrete
H.W. Concrete
Concrete Block walls:90mm Hollow L.W.
190mm Hollow L.W.
90mm Hollow H.W.
190mm Hollow H.W
90mm Solid L.W.
90mm Solid H.W.
Fib. Cement Sheet
Insulation Batts R1.5 (75mm)
Metal Siding
Plaster (pearlite)
Plasterboard (15mm)
Render, external
Weatherboard, pine
Polystyrene
0.16
0.61
0.12
0.04
Kg/m 3 W/m.K
7680
45.00
0.78
1950
0.69
1900
1.44
2400
1360
910
1650
1100
2020
2400
1490
10
7850
615
880
1570
506
16
0.54
0.83
0.76
1.04
0.95
1.40
0.32
0.052
47.90
0.12
0.17
0.53
0.10
0.039
mzK/W
ROOFS
Roof Spaces naturally ventilated
NO reflective foil
with reflective foil
Air Gaps, horizontal still air
No reflective foil
With reflective foil
Film Coefficient Inside (heat flow down)
Outside (3.0 m/s)
0.46
1.36
0.16
0.57
0.16
0.04
Kg/m 3
Acoustic tile ceiling
480
1120
Bituminous membrane
320
Compressed Straw Board.
16
Insulation Blanket R1.5 (60mm)*
16
Insulation Blanket R2.0 (80mm)*
Insulation Blanket R2.5 (100mm)* 16
Insulation Blanket R3.0 (120mm)* 16
880
Plasterboard
Steel Roofing
7850
1920
Tiles, clay
W/m.K
0.06
0.16
0.081
0.042
0.042
0.042
0.042
0.17
47.9
0.84
* allows 5% reduction for compression and other
losses
l.
Table E Thermal Resistance, Conductivities and Densities Used in Compiling the Standard List.
Listed below are the standard wall and roof numbers which can be referenced in the External
Tab Page together with the U value (W/m2K), the surface density (kg/m2) and the description
of each wall or roof. They correspond with the walls and roofs in the MASTER.RFF file for the
energy analysis program BEAVER.
WALLS
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W10
W11
W12
Clay Brick
Solid Double Brick
2.262 429 110 brick, 110 brick
1.764 438 110 brick, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
Brick Veneer
1.924 223 110 brick, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.633 223 110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.510 224 110 brick, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.331 224 110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
Cavity Double Brick
1.661 429 110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick
1.375 438 110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
1.593 337 110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete
1.139 346 110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete , 15mm plaster
1.726 363 110 brick, Airgap, 90 HW concrete
1.420 372 110 brick, Airgap, 90 HW concrete , 15mm plaster
W13
W14
W15
Heavyweight Solid Concrete Block
Solid Double
3.465 432 90 HW solid concrete , 90 HW solid concrete
2.418 441 90 HW solid concrete , 90 HW solid concrete , 15mm plaster
Block Veneer
2.257 225 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
t
146
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
F
r
0.665 225 90 HW solid concrete block, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.530 226 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.340 226 90 HW solid cone blk, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
2.229 432 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW solid concrete block
1.743 441 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW solid concrete block, 15mm plaster
1.815 338 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
1.479 348 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
1.989 365 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block
1.593 374 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
W16
W17
W18
r~~-
W19
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
W45
W46
W47
W48
W49
W50
W51
W52
W53
W54
W55
W56
W57
W58
W59
W60
L
f
W61
W62
W63
W64
W65
W66
W67
W68
W69
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
Lightweight Solid Concrete Block
Solid Double Block
2.861 364 90 LW solid concrete block, 90 LW solid concrete block
2.108 373 90 LW solid concrete block, 90 LW solid concrete block, 15mm plaster
Block Veneer
2.112 191 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.652 191 90 LW solid concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.522 191 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.336 191 90 LW solid cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap,R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
1.963 364 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW solid concrete block
1.576 373 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW solid concrete block, 15mm plaster
1.720 304 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
1.416 313 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
1.876 330 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block
1.519 340 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
Lightweight Hollow Concrete Block
Single Concrete Block
2.517 173 190 LW hollow concrete block
2.293 212 Concrete render, 190 LW hollow concrete block
1.833 131 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
1.645 182 190 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.623 131 90 LW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.600 182 190 LW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.503 132 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.488 182 190 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.328 132 90 LW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
0.322 182 190 LW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
1.687 170 Concrete render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
1.527 221 Concrete render, 190 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.605 171 Cone render, 90 LW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
0.583 221 Cone render, 190 LW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
0.491 171 Cone render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.477 222 Concrete render, 190 LW hollow cone blk, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.323 172 Cone render, 90 LWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
0.317 222 Cone render, 190 LWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
1.531 245 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
1.285 254 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
1.428 284 Cone render, 90 LW hollow cone blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
1.211 293 Concrete render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LWHCB, 15mm plaster
Heavyweight Hollow Concrete Block
Single Concrete Block
2.918 209 190 HW hollow concrete block
2.565 248 Concrete render, 190 HW hollow concrete block
Block Veneer
2.011 157 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
1.781 218 190 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.642 157 90 HW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.617 218 190 HW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.532 149 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.499 219 190 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.333 158 90 HW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p’board
0.326 219 190 HW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p’board
1.837 197 Concrete render, 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
1.643 257 Concrete render, 190 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.623 197 Cone render, 90 HW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
0.599 257 Cone render, 190 HW hollow cone blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
0.503 197 Cone render, 90 HW hollow cone blk, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.488 258 Cone render, 190 HW hollow cone blk, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
147
I
W77
W78
W79
W80
W81
W82
W83
W84
0.328 197 Cone render, 90 HWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
0.321 258 Cone render, 190 HWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
1.796 297 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block
1.476 306 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block. 15mm plaster
1.656 336 Cone render, 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block,
1.372 345 Cone render, 90 HW hollow cone blk, Airgap, 90 HW hollow cone blk, 15mm plaster
1.653 271 Cone render, 90 HW hollow cone blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow cone blk, 15mm plaster
1.370 280 Cone render, 90 HW hollow cone blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow cone blk, 15mm plaster
1.533 310 Cone render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
1.287 319 Cone render, 90 LW hollow cone blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow cone blk, 15mm plaster
W85
W86
W87
W88
W89
W90
W91
W92
W93
W94
W95
W96
Solid Concrete Walls
4.358 240 100mm Heavy Weight concrete
3.785 360 150mm Heavy Weight concrete
3.346 480 200mm Heavy Weight concrete
2.821 249 100mm Heavy Weight concrete, 15mm plaster
2.570 369 150mm Heavy Weight concrete, 15mm plaster
2.359 489 200mm Heavy Weight concrete, 15mm plaster
2.231 249 100mm Heavy Weight concrete, Airgap, 15mm plaster
2.070 369 150mm Heavy Weight concrete, Airgap, 15mm plaster
1.932 489 200mm Heavy Weight concrete, Airgap, 15mm plaster
0.578 250 100mm Heavy Weight concrete, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.566 370 150mm Heavy Weight concrete, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.556 490 200mm Heavy Weight concrete, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W97
W98
W99
W100
Infill Panels
4.302 95 50mm Light Weight concrete
2.797 104 50mm Light Weight concrete, 15mm plaster
2.216 104 50mm Light Weight concrete, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.577 105 50mm Light Weight concrete, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W101
W102
W103
W104
W105
W106
W107
W108
W109
W110
W111
W112
W113
W114
W115
W116
W117
6.249
13
1.299
13
2.640
21
0.695
21
0.549
22
0.624
26
1.206 21
2.055 135
0.647 135
1.635 144
0.598 144
2.568 253
2.357 373
2.179 493
1.944 262
1.821 382
1.713 502
W118
W119
W120
W121
Weatherboards
2.005 15 13mm Weatherboards, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.642 15 13mm Weatherboards, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.515 16 13mm Weatherboards, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.333 16 13mm Weatherboards, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W122
W123
W124
W125
Fibrous Cement Sheet
2.515 18 6mm Fibro cement sheet, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.618 18 6mm Fibro cement sheet, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
0.544 18 6mm Fibro cement sheet, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
0.345 18 6mm F’cement sheet, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W126
W127
W128
W129
W130
Sandwich Panel
10 50 mm Polystyrene between .6 mm colorbond
0.693
10 75 mm Polystyrene between .6 mm colorbond
0.480
11 100 mm Polystyrene between .6 mm colorbond
0.367
11 125 mm Polystyrene between .6 mm colorbond
0.297
12 150 mm Polystyrene between .6 mm colorbond
0.250
W75
W76
[
[
I
r
Metal Siding
148
Metal siding
Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil
Metal siding, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
Metal siding, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
Metal siding, R1.5 batts, Metal siding
Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil, 10mm plasterboard
Metal siding, Airgap, 90 LW hollow cone blk
Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
Metal siding, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
Metal siding, Ref A'gap, Foil, Ref A'gap, 90 LW hollow cone blk, 15mm plaster
Meta! siding, Airgap, 100mm HW concrete
Metal siding, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete
Metal siding, Airgap, 200mm HW concrete
Metal siding, Airgap, 100mm HW concrete, 15mm plaster
Metal siding, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete, 15mm plaster
Metal siding, Airgap, 200mm HW concrete, 15mm plaster
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
l
;I
S
ROOFS
Membrane
Note: Roof membrane is a waterproofing layer such as bitumen, asphalt etc.
R1
0.997 377 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R2
1.159 383 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R32
378 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.411
379 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.344
R33
0.295 379 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R3
0.259 379 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R60
0.436 384 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R34
R35
0.361 384 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R4
0.308 384 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R61
0.269 384 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
3.061 371 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW concrete
R5
r
R6
R7
R8
R36
R37
R9
R62
R38
R39
R10
R63
b
iI
i
:
Metal Deck over Concrete
2.357 373 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete
0.908 379 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
1.041 384 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
0.395 380 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.333 380 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.287 380 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.253 381 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.419 385 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.349 385 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.299 386 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.262 386
Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal Deck
R11
R12
R40
R41
R13
R64
R42
R43
R14
R65
R15
R16
R44
R45
R17
R66
R46
R47
R18
R67
R19
R48
R49
R20
R68
R21
R22
R50
R51
R23
R69
I
i
i
I
I
i
I1
i
1.195
1.436
0.441
0.365
0.311
0.271
0.471
0.384
0.325
0.281
0.527
0.569
0.301
0.263
0.234
0.210
0.314
0.273
0.242
0.217
0.435
0.268
0.238
0.214
0.194
6.249
1.370
0.463
0.380
0.321
0.279
19
24
20
20
20
21
25
25
26
26
19
24
20
20
20
21
25
25
26
26
29
30
30
30
30
13
13
14
14
14
14
Metal deck, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 50mm compressed straw
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 50mm compressed straw
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R2.0 batts, 50mm compressed straw
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R2.5 batts, 50mm compressed straw
Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R3.0 batts, 50mm compressed straw
Metal deck
Metal deck, Ref Airgap, Foil
Metal deck, Ref Airgap, Foil, R1.5 batts
Metal deck, Ref Airgap, Foil, R2.0 batts
Metal deck, Ref Airgap, Foil, R2.5 batts
Metal deck, Ref Airgap, Foil, R3.0 batts
Clay Tiles
R24
R25
R52
R53
R26
R70
R54
R55
1.164
1.391
0.437
0.368
0.309
0.269
0.466
0.381
43
48
44
44
44
45
49
49
19mm clay tile, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
19mm clay tile, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
19mm clay tile, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
19mm clay tile, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
19mm clay tile, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
19mm clay tile, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
19mm clay tile, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
19mm clay tile, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
149
R27
R71
R28
R29
R56
R57
R30
R72
R58
R59
R31
R73
0.323 50 19mm clay tile, Roof space, R2.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.280 50 19mm clay tile, Roof space, R3.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.521 43 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.562 48 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm plasterboard
0.299 44 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.262 44 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R2.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.233 44 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R2.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.209 45 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R3.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
0.312 49 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.271 49 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R2.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.240 50 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R2.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
0.216 50 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space,R3.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
t
r
150
CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I;
Appendix E
Extract from CAMEL.WAR file
This is the CAMEL file containing the U values and surface densities for the walls
and roofs that can be entered as Wnn or Rnn in the External Tab Page. They
correspond with the walls and roofs in the MASTER.RFF file for the energy analysis
program BEAVER. Users can add their own walls and roofs if they require and these
can also be added to the MASTER.RFF file if compatibility is to be maintained.
The first line for each wall/roof type contains the code in the first four columns
followed by the U value and the surface density in a fixed format. The second line is
a description (up to 80 characters) that is displayed in the results for CAMEL when
the particular wall or roof is used. The lines which begin with '{}' or'}{' are sub­
heading lines which are displayed in the CAMEL selection list.
{}Clay brick walls
W1 2.130 422 A
110 brick, 110 brick
W2 1.682 432 A
110 brick, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
W3 1.867 220 B
110 brick, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W4 0.627 220 D
110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W5 0.506 230 C
110 brick, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W6 0.329 230 E
110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W7 1.588 422 B
110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick
W8 1.325 432 B
110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
W9 1.319 337 B
110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete block
W10 1.132 346 B
110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete block, 15mm plaster
}{Water proofed concrete roofs
R1 .997 377 A
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R2 1.158 377 A
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R32 .411 378 B
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R33 .359 379 C
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R3 .296 379 D
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.4 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R34 .436 381 B
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R35 .378 382 C
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.0 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R4 .308 382 D
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW cone, Roof space, R2.4 batts, 13mm plasterboard
etc.
DA5 CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
151
Appendix F
CAMEL & BEAVER Master Glass Data
The following glass types (listed by manufacturer) are contained within the program and may be selected on the
window screen for any particular window by reference to the number in the first column. They represent some of
the most commonly used glass types but this in no way can be taken as endorsement of a particular glass or
manufacturer and indeed the user should advise ACADS-BSG if it is thought that the list should be expanded or
modified. While the list is believed correct at the time of preparation it is the users responsibility to ensure that
any data he uses for a particular glass is indeed correct by checking with the manufacturer. This data was
calculated using WINDOW 5.2 and the standard NFRC 100-2001 conditions and the International Glass
Database Number is also shown. This means the NFRC U-value stated (w/m2oC) is calculated at -17.8 °C and
a wind speed of 5.5 m/s while the NFRC SC (shading Coefficient) and SFIGC are at an outside temperature of
32 °C and a wind speed of 2.8 m/s and an inside air velocity of 0 m/s. They are not based on the same
parameters as the data in DA9 and as used in CAMEL.
Those with -NLA in the Type are No Longer Available
Generic
Type
Thick
NFRC CamelNFRC
No. NFRC Camel
(mm)
SHGC
SC SC
U-val U-val
Clear
6
0.94 0.94 0.82
98
5,82 5.49
Clear /12mm Air / Clear
6
0.70
0.81 0.81
99
2.70 2.95
r
IGDB No.
103
103/103
G.James - Single
No.
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
NFRC Camel
U-val U-val
4.91 5.48
4.91 5.48
4.91 5.48
4.91 5.48
5.25 5.48
5.25 5.48
5.25 5.48
5.25 5.48
5.49 5.48
5.49 5.48
5.49 5.48
5.49 5.48
5.54 5.48
5.18 5.48
5.37 5.48
5.60 5.48
4.97 5.48
4.97 5.48
4.97 5.48
4.97 5.48
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.27
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.27
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.27
3.56 5.27
3.55 5.27
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.26
3.55 5.27
3.58
3.58
3.55
3.55
3.53
3.55 5.26
152
NFRC Camel NFRC Thick
(mm)
SC SC SHGC
6
0.36 0.38 0.30
6
0.35 0.37 0.29
6
0.34 0.36 0.29
6
0.34 0.37 0.29
6
0.44 0.45 0.38
6
0.41 0.41 0.35
6
0.39 0.40 0.33
6
0.40 0.41 0.34
6
0.55 0.55 0.47
6
0.48 0.47 0.41
6
0.45 0.45 0.39
6
0.46 0.46 0.39
0.64 0.64 0.55
6
6
0.43 0.44 0.36
6
0.50 0.50 0.43
6
0.59 0.58 0.50
6
0.38 0.40 0.32
6
0.36 0.38 0.30
6
0.35 0.37 0.30
6
0.35 0.37 0.30
0.73 0.78 0.63 10.76
0.52 0.60 0.45 10.76
0.66 0.71 0.57 10.76
0.56 0.63 0.48 10.76
0.65 0.71 0.56 10.76
0.54 0.61 0.47 10.76
0.41 0.49 0.34 10.76
0.48 0.56 0.41 10.76
0.46 0.54 0.39 10.76
0.53 0.60 0.45 10.76
0.46 0.54 0.39 10.76
0.50 0.57 0.42 10.76
0.44 0.53 0.38 10.76
0.40 0.49 0.34 10.76
0.47 0.54 0.40 10.76
8.76
0.39
0.46
0.40
8.76
0.47
0.37
0.31 10.76
0.33 10.76
0.39
0.29 12.76
0.35
0.35 0.42 0.29 10.76
IGDB No.
Type
Solarplus TS21 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus TS21 on Green (S2)
Solarplus TS21 on Grey (S2)
Solarplus TS21 on Panasap Blue (S2)
Solarplus TS30 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus TS30 on Green (S2)
Solarplus TS30 on Grey (S2)
Solarplus TS30 on Panasap Blue (S2)
Solarplus TS40 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus TS40 on Green (S2)
Solarplus TS40 on Grey (S2)
Solarplus TS40 on Panasap Blue (S2)
Solarplus TS50 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus SC22 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus SC30 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus SC40 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus SS22 on Clear (S2)
Solarplus SS22 on Green (S2)
Solarplus SS22 on Grey (S2)
Solarplus SS22 on Panasap Blue (S2)
Optilighf HL119 Laminate
Optiiight HL129 Laminate
Optilight HL139 Laminate
Optiiight HL149 Laminate
Optilight HL169 Laminate
Optiiight HL219 Laminate
Optilight HL229 Laminate
Optilight HL319 Laminate
Optiltight HL339 Laminate
Optilight HL419 Laminate
Optilight HL5a19 Laminate
Optilight HL5p19 Laminate
Optilight HL719 Laminate
Optilight HL739 Laminate
Optilight HL819 Laminate
Optilight Excel Elephant Hide Laminate -NLA
Optilight Excel Oasis Spring Laminate -NLA
Optilight Excel Turkish Bath Laminate -NLA
Optilight Excel Island Sea Laminate -NLA
Optiiight Excel Midnight Laminate -NLA
Solarplus SL20 Low E Laminate
5774
5775
5776
5778
5766
5767
5768
5770
5758
5759
5760
5762
5750
5830
5822
5814
5790
5791
5792
5794
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5557
5558
5563
5565
5569
5575
5581
5587
5589
5594
5500
5532
5540
5526
5503
5901
DAS CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
[
t
L
L
f_.
141
142
143
144
3,55
3.55
3.55
3.55
5.26
5.26
5.26
5.26
0.40
0.46
0.54
0.59
0.48
0.53
0.61
0.66
0.34
0.39
0.47
0.51
10.76
10.76
10.76
10.76
Solarplus SL30 Low E Laminate
Solarplus SL40 Low E Laminate
Solarplus SL50 Low E Laminate
Solarplus SL60 Low E Laminate
5900
5899
5898
5897
G.James - Double Glazing
r„..
No.
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
NFRC Camel NFRC Camel
NFRC Thick
Type
U-val U-val
SC
SC SHGC (mm)
2.70
0.81
2.95
0.81
0.70
6 Clear
/12 Air / 6mm Clear IGU
2.70 2.95
0.57
0.57 0.49
6 Green
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
2.70 2.94
0.52
0.52 0.45
6 Grey
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
2.70 2.95
0.45
0.46 0.39
6 Azuria
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
2.70 2.94
0.46
0.45 0.40
6 Evergreen
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.88 1.93 0.77
0.77 0.67
6 Clear
/12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU
1.88 1.93 0.52
0.52 0.45
6 Green
/12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU
1.88 1.93 0.46
0.46 0.40
6 Grey
/12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU
1.88 1.93 0.39
0.40 0.34
6 Azuria
/12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU
1.88 1.93 0.40
0.40 0.35 6 Evergreen
/12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU
2.41 2.61
0.25
0.26 0.22 6 Solarplus TS21 on Clear (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
2.53 2.75
0.33
0.33 0.28 6 Solarplus TS30 on Clear (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
2.60 2.84
0.43
0.43 0.37 6 Solarplus TS40 on Clear (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
2.62 2.86
0.50
0.51 0.44 6 Solarplus TS50 on Clear (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
2.43 2.64
0.27
0.28 0.23 6 Solarplus SS22 on Clear (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80
0.60
0.60 0.52 6 LE80i on Clear (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80 0.43
0.44 0.38 6 LE80i on Green (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80 0.36 0.37 0.32 6 LE80i on Grey (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80 0.43 0.43 0.37 6 LE80i on Bronze (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80 0.39 0.39 0.34 6 LE80i on Panasap Blue (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80 0.35 0.35 0.30 6 LE80i on Arctic Blue (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80 0.35 0.35 0.30 6 LE80i on Azuria (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.80 0.35 0.36 0.31 6 LE80i on Evergreen (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.45 0.46 0.39 6 LE60i on Clear (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.36 0.36 0.31 6 LE60i on Green (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.30 0.30 0.26 6 LE60i on Grey (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.34 0.34 0.30 6 LE60i on Bronze (S2)
/12 Air/ 6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.32 0.33 0.28 6 LE60i on Panasap Blue (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.29 0.30 0.25 6 LE60i on Arctic Blue (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.30 0.30 0.26 6 LE60i on Azuria (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.30 0.30 0.26 6 LE60i on Evergreen (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.42 0.42 0.36 6 LE54i on Clear (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.32 0.33 0.28 6 LE54i on Green (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.28 0.28 0.24 6 LE54i on Grey (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.32 0.32 0.27 6 LE54i on Bronze (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.30 0.31 0.26 6 LE54i on Panasap Blue (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.28 0.28 0.24 6 LE54i on Arctic Blue (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.28 0.28 0.24 6 LE54i on Azuria (S2)
/12 Air/ 6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.28 0.28 0.24 6 LE54i on Evergreen (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.34 0.34 0.29 6 LE40i on Clear (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.27 0.27 0.23 6 LE40i on Green (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.23 0.23 0.20 6 LE40i on Grey (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.26 0.26 0.22 6 LE40i on Bronze (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.25 0.25 0.21 6 LE40i on Panasap Blue (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.23 0.23 0.20 6 LE40i on Arctic Blue (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.24 0.24 0.20 6 LE40i on Azuria (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.79 1.79 0.23 0.24 0.20 6 LE40i on Evergreen (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.40 0.40 0.35 6 DLE70 on Clear (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.34 0.34 0.30 6 DLE70 on Green (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.27 0.27 0.23 6 DLE70 on Grey (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.29 0.29 0.25 6 DLE70 on Bronze (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.29 0.30 0.25 6 DLE70 on Panasap Blue (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.27 0.27 0.23 6 DLE70 on Arctic Blue (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.30 0.30 0.26 6 DLE70 on Azuria (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
1.68 1.64 0.30 0.30 0.26 6 DLE70 on Evergreen (S2)
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
IGDB No.
9804/9804
914/9804
9834/9804
5036/9804
9884/9804
9804/9924
914/9924
9834/9924
5036/9924
9884/9924
5774/9804
5766/9804
5758/9804
5750/9804
5790/9804
5650/9804
5651/9804
5652/9804
5653/9804
5654/9804
5655/9804
5656/9804
5657/9804
5670/9804
5671/9804
5672/9804
5673/9804
5674/9804
5675/9804
5676/9804
5677/9804
5680/9804
5681/9804
5682/9804
5683/9804
5684/9804
5685/9804
5686/9804
5687/9804
5700/9804
5701/9804
5702/9804
5703/9804
5704/9804
5705/9804
5706/9804
5707/9804
5600/9804
5601/9804
5602/9804
5603/9804
5604/9804
5605/9804
5606/9804
5607/9804
I.
L
DA5 CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
L
153
Pilkington (Australia) (Viridian) - Single
No.
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
320
321
322
323
324
326
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
NFRC Camel
U-val U-val
5.82
5.74
5.69
5.59
5.82
5.69
5.59
5.82
5.69
5.82
5.69
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.65
3.64
3.62
3.61
3.61
5.82
5.81
4.91
4.91
4.91
5.25
5.25
5.25
4.97
4.97
4.97
4.53
5.75
5.75
5.76
5.94
5.42
5.38
5.29
5.48
5.38
5.29
5.48
5.38
5.48
5.38
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.49
5.41
5.41
5.41
5.41
5.49
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.43
5.42
5.43
Thick
NFRC Camel NFRC
SC
SC SHGC
(mm)
0.82
0.79
0.77
0.73
0.58
0.47
0.42
0.62
0.54
0.63
0.53
0.62
0.41
0.48
0.45
0.36
0.36
0.70
0.51
0.49
0.50
0.68
0.82
0.52
0.30
0.29
0.29
0.38
0.33
0.35
0.32
0.30
0.30
0.20
0.33
0.40
0.35
6
8
10
12
6
10
12
6
10
6
10
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.38
6.38
6.38
6.38
6.38
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6.38
6.38
6.38
0.94 0.94
0.91 0.91
0.88 0.88
0.84 0.84
0.67 0.65
0.55 0.53
0.49 0.49
0.72 0.71
0.63 0.62
0.73 0.71
0.61 0.60
0.72 0.75
0.48 0.55
0.53 0.59
0.53 0.59
0.43 0.50
0.42 0.50
0.81 0.84
0.60 0.66
0.58 0.64
0.59 0.65
0.79 0.83
0.94 0.94
0.60 0.59
0.36 0.38
0.34 0.36
0.35 0.37
0.44 0.45
0.39 0.40
0.41 0.41
0.38 0.40
0.35 0.37
0.36 0.38
0.24 0.28
0.39 0.38
0.47 0.46
0.42 0.40
Optifloat Clear
Optifloat Clear
Optifloat Clear
Optifloat Clear
Optifloat Grey
Optifloat Grey
Optifloat Grey
Optifloat Blue-Green
Optifloat Blue-Green
Optifloat Bronze
Optifloat Bronze
Eclipse Advantage Clear
Eclipse Advantage Grey
Eclipse Advantage Bronze
Eclipse Advantage Blue-Green
Eclipse Advantage Evergreen
Eclipse Advantage Artie Blue
Energy Advantage
Comfort Plus 6.38 Neutral
Comfort Plus 6.38 Grey
Comfort Plus 6.38 Green
Comfort Plus 6.38 Clear
Optilam Clear 6.38mm
Evergreen
Suncool TS21 on Clear (S2)
Suncool TS21 on Grey (S2)
Suncool TS21 on Green (S2)
Suncool TS30 on Clear (S2)
Suncool TS30 on Grey (S2)
Suncool TS30 on Green (S2)
Suncool SS22 on Clear (S2)
Suncool SS22 on Grey (S2)
Suncool SS22 on Green (S2)
Suncool SS08 on Clear (S2)
TS21 on Clear Laminate
TS30 on Clear Laminate
SL20 on Grey Laminate
Pilkington Australia (Viridian) - Double Glazing
No. NFRC Camel NFRC Camel NFRC Thick
SHGC (mm)
U-val U-val SC SC
400
404
407
409
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
420
2.70
2.70
421
422
423
424
426
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
1.96
1.96
1.96
1.96
1.96
1.96
1.88
1.88
2.95
2.94
2.94
2.94
2.85
2.05
2.05
2.05
2.05
2.05
1.93
1.94
0.81
0.52
0.58
0.58
0.63
1.87
1.87
1.87
2.70
2.70
2.41
2.40
2.40
2.53
2.52
2.52
2.43
2.42
2.42
1.92
1.92
1.92
2.95
2.94
2.61
2.61
2.61
2.75
2.75
2.75
2.64
2.64
2.64
0.48
0.49
0.69
0.81
0.46
0.25
0.22
0.23
0.33
0.26
0.28
0.27
0.22
0.24
2.69
2.69
154
0.39
0.44
0.44
0.33
0.33
0.71
0.50
0.81
0.52
0.58
0.58
0.64
0.39
0.45
0.44
0.34
0.34
0.71
0.50
0.48
0.50
0.69
0.81
0.46
0.26
0.22
0.23
0.33
0.26
0.28
0.28
0.23
0.24
0.70 6
0.45 6
0.50 6
0.50 6
0.55 6
0.33 6
0.38 6
0.38 6
0.29 6
0.29 6
0.62 6
0.43 6.38
0.41 6.38
0.43 6.38
0.60 6.38
0.70 6.38
0.40 6.38
0.22 6
0.18 6
0.20 6
0.28 6
0.22 6
0.24 6
0.23 6
0.19 6
0.20 6
IGDB No.
Type
9804
9805
9806
9807
9834
9836
9837
9874
9876
9854
9856
9909
9911
9908
9907
9910
9906
9924
9702
9703
9700
9701
9804
9884
5774
5776
5775
5766
5768
5767
5790
5792
5791
5860
5840
5850
5904
IGDB No.
Type
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Optifloat Clear
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Optifloat Grey
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Optifloat Blue-Green
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Optifloat Bronze
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Eclipse Advantage Clear
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Eclipse Advantage Grey
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Eclipse Advantage Bronze
Eclipse Advantage Blue-Green /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
Eclipse Advantage Evergreen /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
Eclipse Advantage Artie Blue /12 Air / 6 Clear IGU
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Energy Advantage
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Comfort Plus Neutral
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Comfort Plus Grey
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Comfort Plus Green
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Comfort Plus Clear
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Optilam Clear
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Evergreen
Suncool TS21 on Clear (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
/12 Air/6 Clear IGU
Suncool TS21 on Grey (S2)
Suncool TS21 on Green (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear G
I U
Suncool TS30 on Clear (S2)
/12 Air / 6 Clear G
I U
Suncool TS30 on Grey (S2)
/12 Air / 6 Clear G
I U
Suncool TS30 on Green (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear G
I U
Suncool SS22 on Clear (S2)
/12 Air / 6 Clear G
I U
Suncool SS22 on Grey <S2)
/12 Air / 6 Clear G
I U
Suncool SS22 on Green (S2) /12 Air / 6 Clear G
I U
9804/9804
9834/9804
9874/9804
9854/9804
9909/9804
9911/9804
9908/9804
9907/9804
9910/9804
9906/9804
9924/9804
9702/9804
9703/9804
9700/9804
9701/9804
9804/9804
9884/9804
5774/9804
5776/9804
5775/9804
5766/9804
5768/9804
5767/9804
5790/9804
5792/9804
5791/9804
DA5 CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
r..
439
2.26
440
441
442
450
454
457
459
461
462
463
464
465
466
470
471
472
473
474
476
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
2.68
2.67
2.68
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.78
1.78
1.78
1.78
1.78
1.78
1.75
1.74
1.74
1.74
1.88
1.88
1.85
1.85
1.85
1.86
1.86
1.86
1.85
1.85
1.85
1.83
1.87
1.87
1.87
2.44
2.93
2.93
2.93
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.93
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.78
1.74
1.74
1.74
1.93
1.93
1.89
1.89
1.89
1.91
1.91
1.91
1.90
1.90
1.90
1.87
1.92
1.92
1.92
0.16
0.27
0.35
0.28
0.77
0.46
0.52
0.52
0.61
0.36
0.41
0.41
0.31
0.31
0.48
0.46
0.47
0.67
0.77
0.40
0.22
0.17
0.19
0.28
0.21
0.23
0.23
0.18
0.19
0.13
0.23
0.30
0.22
0.16
0.14 6
Suncool SS08 on Clear (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
0.28
0.23 6.38 TS21 on Clear Laminate (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
0.35
0.30 6.38 TS30 on Clear Laminate (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
0.28
0.24 6.38 SL20 on Grey Laminate (S2) /12 Air/6 Clear IGU
0.77
0.67 6
Optifloat Clear
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.46
0.40 6
Optifloat Grey
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.53
0.45 6
Optifloat Blue-Green
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.52
0.45 6
Optifloat Bronze
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.61
0.53 6
Eclipse Advantage Clear
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.37
0.31 6
Eclipse Advantage Grey
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.41
0.36 6
Eclipse Advantage Bronze
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.42
0.36 6
Eclipse Advantage Blue-Green /12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU
0.32
0.27 6
Eclipse Advantage Evergreen /12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU
0.32
0.27 6
Eclipse Adv Artie Blue
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.48 0.42 6.38 Comfort Plus Neutral
/12 Air/ 6 Energy Adv IGU
0.46
0.40 6.38 Comfort Plus Grey
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.47
0.41 6.38 Comfort Plus Green
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.67
0.58 6.38 Comfort Plus Clear
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.77
0.67 6.38 Optilam Clear
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.40
0.35 6.38 Evergreen
/12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU
0.22
0.19 6
Suncool TS21 on Clear (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.18
0.15 6
Suncool TS21 on Grey (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.19
0.16 6
Suncool TS21 on Green (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.29 0.25 6
Suncool TS30 on Clear (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.21
0.18 6
Suncool TS30 on Grey (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.20 6
0.23
Suncool TS30 on Green (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.24
0.20 6
Suncool SS22 on Clear (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.15
0.18
Suncool SS22 on Grey (S2) /12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU
0.20
0.17 6
Suncool SS22 on Green (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.14
0.11 6
Suncool SS08 on Clear (S2) /12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.23
0.20 6.38 TS21 on Clear Lam (S2)
712 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.31
0.26 6.38 TS30 on Clear Lam (S2)
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
0.22
0.19 6.38 SL20 on Grey Lamin(S2)
/12 Air/6 Energy Adv IGU
5806/9804
5840/9804
5850/9804
5904/9804
9804/9924
9834/9924
9874/9924
9854/9924
9909/9924
9911/9924
9908/9924
9907/9924
9910/9924
9906/9924
9702/9924
9703/9924
9700/9924
9701/9924
9804/9924
9884/9924
5774/9924
5776/9924
5775/9924
5766/9924
5768/9924
5767/9924
5790/9924
5792/9924
5791/9924
5806/9924
5840/9924
5850/9924
5904/9924
L
DA5 CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
I
L,
155
r
r
Appendix G
Users Weather Data File
When “File” is selected from the weather location pull down list (clause 3-30) the program reads the hourly design dry
bulb and wet bulb temperatures for each month from a user nominated file; an example of which is shown below. The
name of the file is requested by the program at run time and the data must be entered in the file using the following
format.
The first 8 columns on each line are not read by the program and may be used to describe the line. The daily
range latitude hemisphere and the elevation for the particular location must be entered on the first line of the file
starting in columns 9-12,14-17,19,20-25 respectively. Subsequent lines must have 12 values, corresponding to the
twelve months of the year from January to December, separated by one or more spaces. The first line after the daily
range contains the 6 am dry bulb temperatures. The second line the 6 am wet bulb temperatures. Two lines, each
of 12 values, are then entered for each one hour increment such that the file eventually contains 48 lines of 12
values, finishing with the wet bulb temperatures for 5 am. Data for all 24 hours must be entered regardless of the
number of hours of plant operation.
6AM DB
WB
7AM DB
WB
8AM DB
WB
9AM DB
WB
10AM DB
WB
11AM DB
WB
NOONDB
WB
1PM DB
WB
2PM DB
WB
3PM DB
WB
4PM DB
WB
5PM DB
WB
6PM DB
WB
7PM DB
WB
8PM DB
WB
9PM DB
WB
10PM DB
WB
11PM DB
WB
MIDN DB
WB
1AM DB
WB
2AM DB
WB
3AM DB
WB
4AM DB
WB
5AM DB
WB
156
!
1
r"
11.5 38.0 S 123
25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
18.6 18.6 18.1 16.1 14.1 9.6 9.9 11.6 13.1 15.6 17.6 18.1
26.3 26.3 26.3 20.8 17.8 10.8 10.8 13.8 15.8 22.3 24.3 26.3
19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
26.3 26.3 26.3 20.8 17.8 10.8 10.8 13.8 15.8 22.3 24.3 26.3
19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
27.3 27.3 27.3 21.8 18.8 11.8 11.8 14.8 16.8 23.3 25.3 27.3
19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
28.6 28.6 28.6 23.1 20.1 13.1 13.1 16.1 18.1 24.6 26.6 28.6
19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
29.6 29.6 29.6 24.1 21.1 14.1 14.1 17.1 19.1 25.6 27.6 29.6
19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
30.6 30.6 30.6 25.1 22.1 15.1 15.1 18.1 20.1 26.6 28.6 30.6
20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13,0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
32.0 32.0 32.0 26.5 23.5 16.5 16.5 19.5 21.5 28.0 30.0 32.0
20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
33.0 33.0 33.0 27.5 24.5 17.5 17.5 20.5 22.5 29.0 31.0 33.0
21.0 21.0 20.5 18.5 16.5 13.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 18.0 20.0 20.5
34.0 34.0 34.0 28.5 25.5 18.5 18.5 21.5 23.5 30.0 32.0 34.0
21.0 21.0 20.5 18.5 16.5 13.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 18.0 20.0 20.5
33.0 33.0 33.0 27.5 24.5 17.5 17.5 20.5 22.5 29.0 31.0 33.0
21.0 21.0 20.5 18.5 16.5 13.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 18.0 20.0 20.5
32.0 32.0 32.0 26.5 23.5 16.5 16.5 19.5 21.5 28.0 30.0 32.0
20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
31.6 31.6 31.6 26.1 23.1 16.1 16.1 19.1 21.1 27.6 29.6 31.6
20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
30.3 30.3 30.3 24.8 21.8 14.8 14.8 17.8 19.8 26.3 28.3 30.3
20.020.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
29.3 29.3 29.3 23.8 20.8 13.8 13.8 16.8 18.8 25.3 27.3 29.3
20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
27.9 27.9 27.9 22.4 19.4 12.4 12.4 15.4 17.4 23.9 25.9 27.9
19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
26.9 26.9 26.9 21.4 18.4 11.4 11.4 14.4 16.4 22.9 24.9 26.9
18.6 18.6 18.116.114.1 9.6 9.9 11.6 13.115.6 17.6 18.1
25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
17.3 17.3 16.8 14.8 12.8 7.4 8.0 10.3 11.8 14.3 16.3 16.8
24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12.4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
16.9 16.9 16.4 14.4 12.4 6.8 7.6 9.9 11.4 13.9 15.9 16.4
24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12.4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
16.9 16.9 16.4 14.4 12.4 6.8 7.6 9.9 11.4 13.9 15.9 16.4
24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12,4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
17.3 17.3 16.8 14.8 12.8 7.4 8.0 10.3 11.8 14.3 16.3 16.8
24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12.4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
17.3 17.3 16.8 14.8 12.8 7.4 8.0 10.3 11.8 14.3 16.3 16.8
25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
17.6 17.6 17.115.113.1 8.0 8.5 10.6 12.114.6 16.6 17.1
25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
18.6 18.6 18.116.114.1 9.6 9.9 11.6 13.115.6 17.6 18.1
[
....
I
DA5 CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
References
1.
AIRAH / 1RHACE Application Manual DA9 - Air Conditioning Systems, Load Estimation and
Psychrometrics
2.
ACADS-BSG - User Guide for the Computer Program Beaver
3.
Mason and Hamilton - Some Practical Aspects of Cooling Load Estimation with Particular Reference
to the Carrier Method and the Computer Program Camel AIRAH Federal Conference March 1976
Melbourne.
4.
Mason M. - So You Know How To Determine Air Conditioning Loads? AIRAH Federal Conference
April 1983 Sydney.
5.
Mason and Kingston - Weather Data for Air Conditioning Load Calculations AIRAH Federal
Conference 1988 Sydney.
6.
Delsante and Mason - An Expanded Climatic Data Base for Australia AIRAH Federal Conference
1990 Adelaide.
7.
AS 1668.2-2012 The Use of Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning In Buildings
f "
r..
DA5 CAMEL User Guide © ACADS-BSG
157
I
1
m
0
U